Home

Avaya BCM200/400 Installation and Maintenance Manual

1. ll M gm EA C Disconnect from Lp I O Card single fan fan 1 ew o _ 1 9 6 oo a Main Card i E 7 Remove the fan at the rear of the platform base chassis a Remove the snap rivets that hold the fan to the platform base chassis The snap rivet has two parts a center pin and a collar Gently separate the plastic rivet pin with your fingernails from the center of the rivet collar Remove the rivet pin and the collar from the chassis Place the rivet pin and collar in a safe location b Pull the fan away from the platform base chassis from the interior C Place the fan in a safe location Figure 113 Remove the snap rivets from the BCM200 platform base chassis 4 Remove the rivet pin from Fan exhaust the rivet collar Platform base chassis 2 Remove the rivet collar _ from the fan access panel X N P 134 SS Rivet pin Rivet collar 8 This procedure is complete P0993133 03 Chapter 8 Install or Replace a Cooling Fan 187 Install the BCM200 cooling fan Use this procedure to install a cooling fan in a BCM200 platform base chassis Warning Prot
2. m x Platform Initialization Menu TF 1 Initialize Menu 2 Upload an Etiquette core load to the MSC 3 Upload an CT2 Plus core load to the MSC 4 Upload an E1 core load to the MSC 5 Upload an E1 Global core load to the HSC 6 Upload an E1 CALA core load to the MSC 7 Toggle the automatic MSC upload Enabled 8 Selection not available no SSH firmware on BCH466 M Main Menu Product Version BCHh88 Release 3 8 Version RC 2 8 Issue 1 Initialization Pending Configuration Valid Service startup Auto Motherboard TBD PCI Cards MSC Empty Modem LAN LAN HSCUersion MMMM MM MMMM Hake a selection 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 M 7ff Installation and Maintenance Guide 178 Chapter 7 Hard Disk Replacement Procedures 4 Enter the number beside the upload for the software you want to install If you do not know which software to upload refer to Core Software and Regions on page 299 5 Ensure the correct MSC configuration has been entered Enter 1 Select the hardware profile for this unit 6 The current MSC configuration is indicated on screen If you want to change this make a different selection from the Platform Initialization menu The system checks to see if a core upload is re
3. Installation and Maintenance Guide 352 Media Bay Module Combinations P0993133 03 353 Appendix D System Options The Business Communications Manager system provides a number of software applications that enhance basic functionality Some of the telephony applications work immediately after you install the Business Communications Manager system this is considered core software Other applications are enabled when you enter software keycodes which you generate when you purchase one of the applications Refer to the Business Communications Manager Software Keycode Installation Guide for specific directions for entering a code Telephony Features and Options The telephony features and options have individual installation and features guides This section lists the application guides and provides a brief description of the application function Programming Operations Guide and Telephone Features Programming Guide These guides provide programming for core telephony features and user features such as Voice telephony configuration for digital IP ISDN and radio based telephones and equipment over analog digital ISDN and voice over IP VoIP trunks How to use and program user telephony features at the telephone Companion Application Server software that controls the interface between the Business Communications Manager system and the Companion wireless system available for sel
4. External sets Note Some of the components described in this document are not available in all areas Ask your Business Communications Manager sales agent for information about availability Installation and Maintenance Guide 40 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware Business Communications Manager Field Replaceable Units Table 2 provides a list of field replaceable units FRUs for the BCM200 and BCM400 base hardware platforms Use Table 2 to Table 7 as a reference when you need to order replace or install component hardware The tables indicate the component s product engineering code PEC and references to the description and installation procedures Note that the codes may change over time consult the catalogue for the latest information Table 2 Card field replaceable units Installation Component description BCM200 PEC BCM400 PEC FRU Description procedure BCM embedded modem NTAB9854 NTAB9854 Modem card on Installthe modem page 63 card on page 229 Media services card NT5B15AAAK NT5B15AAAH Media services Install the media card MSC on services card page 57 MSC on page 226 Media services PEC III NTBB80AAAB NTBB80AAAB page 60 Install a processor expansion card PEC on page 233 WAN interface card with CSU NTAB3212 NTAB3212 WAN interface Install the WAN V 35 North America only card
5. Enter these switch To assign Sale settings these DNs Fo pssianihes To assign these DNs DS30 DNs to DSM 32 or bus to DSM16 or DSM 32 to Companion 1 2 3 4 5 6 DSM 16 on on on on on on 221 252 2 221 236 DS30 2 and 3 on on on on on off 237 268 3 237 252 DS30 3 and 4 N A on on on on off on 253 284 4 253 268 DS30 4 and 5 on on on on off off 269 300 5 269 284 DS30 5 and 6 on on on off on on 285 316 6 285 300 565 580 PDD onl DS30 6 and 7 y t47 on on on off on off 301 316 N A 581 596 PDD only The extensions listed are based on a three digit DN with a Start DN of 221 If your system has longer DNs or a different Start DN enter the range in the blank column If your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 channel split you cannot use DS30 7 for the DSM 16 module You cannot configure the DSM 32 module for DS30 6 because the second set of DNs cannot be accessed If you need more DNs for Companion sets use the range that starts at 597 ISDN or DECT and change the DN type to NA Portable If you system is set to Full Double Density FDD Companion telephones are not supported Installation and Maintenance Guide 340 Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings DSM16 and DSM 32 double density switch settings upgraded system The following table shows the switch settings for DSM plus modules deployed as double density on a system that has been upgraded from 2 5 to 3 0
6. 04 220 Install the WAN Card 1 seeme nar an n 221 Configuration main menu display llle eee eee 222 Platform initialization menu illii 223 initialize menu 5s 26s necp he Sheek nh te Gg Qld ues 224 MSC chassis mounting screws 20 000 cece eee eee 226 Modem Card uL seks eRe tei aan toed SERRE eS Ted 228 PEC replacement overview 000 cece eee tees 230 Remove the processor expansion card PEC Ill 232 Insert the processor expansion card PEC Ill 0 234 Memory replacement overview 0000 cece eee eee eee 235 Remove and replace the dual in line memory module 236 Battery replacement overview 0000 0c eee eee eee 238 Removing the clock calendar battery liliis 240 Overview of installing a Companion system 0 0005 249 RP Unity 1 amet hope ak pedo os bet ae bae tes aie Res 251 P0993133 03 Figures 29 Figure 162 RPI mounting holes 0 0 eee ae 253 Figure 163 Open the RPl cover 0 cece eee eee eee eens 253 Figure 164 RPI component oi ocean RR ERR ee ae 254 Figure 165 RPI connector printed circuit board 0 0 cee eee 255 Figure 166 Output connector pinout 0 00 eee eee 256 Figure 167 Input connector pinout sasaaa ee 257 Figure 168 Bracket termination board 0 0 00 0002 262 Figure 169 Slide the cover on bracket
7. On On The module is read to operate Media bay module power connections The back of the modules have a single connector that provides a DS256 channel and power to the module These connectors plug into the media bay backplane on the base function tray or expansion unit Some modules also have a cooling fan that runs off the module power source Figure 38 shows the rear views of the two types of modules Figure 38 Rear of modules showing DS256 channel and power connectors DS256 and power connector DS256 and power connector Installation and Maintenance Guide 74 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware Media bay module DIP switches The underside of most modules has a set of DIP switches that set the DS30 channel numbers and offsets used by the module Figure 39 shows the location of the DIP switches on the module The exception to this is the DECT module where the switches are found on the rear of the module Refer to Digital enhanced cordless telecommunications DECT media bay module on page 81 For more information about setting DIP switches refer to Appendix Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings Figure 39 Underside of module showing DIP switches anaauut Rear of module DIP switches Trunk Media Bay Modules You install the trunk media bay modules in the base function tray or the Business Communicatio
8. Installation and Maintenance Guide 130 Chapter 5 Business Communications Manager System Startup Table 16 Business Communications Manager LED states Continued Temperature Temperature is N A Sensor is N A l below threshold non operational or Temperature is out of range Fans All installed fans are N A e working Fan failure N A 1 If the base function tray Power LED does not light a Disconnect the power cords b Check all cables and power connections Ensure that the ac outlet has power C Reconnect the power cords 2 Ifthe Power LED is red and there is no power use a paper clip to select the reset button Alternatively power cycle the system to restart 3 You are now ready to connect the system to the network and initialize it Note You can monitor the state of the Business Communications Manager LEDs from your computer Refer to Access the System Status Monitor to Monitor LEDs on page 292 When the system power is on and the system has successfully booted the power and status LEDs on the faceplates of the media bay modules are lit and remain constant Figure 73 shows an example of a media bay module and the LEDs on the module faceplate Figure 73 Module power and status LEDs All modules have a power and status LEDs P0993133 03 Chapter 5 Business Communications Manager System Startup 131 Table 17 Module power and status LED states I
9. Danger Disconnect the power cord telephone cables and network cables before opening AN the computer Read and follow installation instructions carefully P0993133 03 Chapter 10 Replace Data Cards and Processing Hardware 239 Remove the clock calendar battery Use this procedure to remove the clock calendar battery Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static discharge Always wear a ground wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container 10 11 12 If you still have access to the Unified Manager shut down the system using the Shutdown command For details refer to Shut down the system software on page 145 Otherwise skip to step 2 Set up the server for maintenance as described in Shut down the system hardware on page 146 Disconnect the Business Communications Manager from the AC power outlet Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface Disconnect any connectors from the front of the base function tray Partially remove the base function tray from the platform base chassis Do not crimp stretch or damage cables or connectors Remove the base function tray bezel See Remove the base function tray bezel on page 153 Continue to the next step of this procedure when complete Remove the WAN card if applicable See Remove the WAN card on page
10. Language Country Time Date format Danish 2001 01 01 13 57 Dutch 1 Jan 01 13 57 EuroFrench 1 jan 13 57 EuroSpanish 1 Ene 13 57 German 1 Jan 13 57 Italian 1 Gen 13 57 NA English Jan1 1 57pm NA French 2001 01 01 13 57 NA Spanish Ene 1 1 57pm Norwegian 1 Jan 13 57 Swedish 2001 01 01 13 57 Turkish 1 Ock 13 57 UK English 1 Jan 1 57 pm System Defaults Table 47 compares the system defaults for the North American Global and UK regions In addition the following functionality applies e Regions for Denmark Holland and Sweden are the same as the Global region except for the default to local languages and local tones and cadences e The Region for the Caribbean is the same as the North American region except that it supports the M7000 telephone e The Region for CALA is the same as the Caribbean region except NI ISDN is replaced by ETSI ISDN u law e The Region for Europe is the same as the United Kingdom region except there are no default dialing restrictions and ATA parameters are set to European values P0993133 03 System Region Attributes 309 Table 47 Region defaults Functionality Attribute North American Global United Kingdom Direct Dial Access code 0 0 0 DTMF parameters Tone duration 120 msec 120 msec 120 msec Pause time 1 5 1 5 H3 Interdigit time 80 msec 80 msec 100 msec Conference tone disabled disabled enabled Call Back Kill time 180 sec 180 sec 360 sec PCM
11. DS30 channel 3 l DS30 buses DS30 buses available to modules DS30 channel 4 available to modules in a 2 6 split in a 3 5 split DS30 channel 5 DS30 channel 6 DS30 channel 7 DS30 numbers are set using the number 4 5 and 6 DIP switches on the back or underside of the media bay modules The exception is the FEM module The FEM DIP switches turn on ports each of which consumes one bus Installation and Maintenance Guide 318 Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings Setting offsets Each offset is one quarter of a DS30 bus Each bus supports 16 lines 32 time slots for most modules Note Double Density The 32 time slots are important when you are working with station media bay modules The DSM 16 DSM 32 and ASM 8 modules can be configured using the offset dip switches to use each of these time slots as separate telephone lines This essentially doubles your system telephone capacity On a default 3 0 system this feature called Partial Double Density PDD is available on DS30 2 3 4 and 5 DS30 6 and 7 maintain the current two time slots per line configuration which supports the Companion application For systems where Companion is not required you can use the Unified Manager to change all six DS30 buses to FDD Exception If your system has a 3 5 channel split only DS30 6 becomes double density and is available to media bay modules when the system is changed to FDD How
12. P0993133 03 Chapter 13 Install Analog Terminal Adapters 279 Measure insertion loss Measure the total insertion loss between the CO and voice messaging device by using standard dial up test lines with a transmission test set For example Hewlett Packard 4935A Transmission Test Set Measure insertion loss between the Central office and analog device Use this procedure to measure the insertion loss from the CO to the voice messaging device 1 Establish a connection to the 1 mW 1 kHz CO service line with a single line telephone attached to the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 2 Ensure that the analog port terminates correctly in 600 ohms a Replace the single line telephone with the test set b Use RECEIVE 600 OHM HOLD mode on the test set 3 Ensure that the test set connects in parallel to the service line before removing the single line telephone or the line drops Remove the single line telephone Measure the 1 KHz tone at the far end of the analog port which is where the analog loop ends and where the voice messaging device connects Note The tone must be greater than 10 dB for example 9 dB is acceptable gt 6 This procedure is complete Measure insertion loss from the analog device to Central Office Use this procedure to measure the insertion loss from the voice messaging device to the CO 1 Establish a connection to a silent termination on the CO service line with a single line tel
13. expansion unit Install new module Check the module inmedia ba settings in the Unified Remove power y Manager from both units Replace bezel Remove front bezel from expansion unit Restore power to BCM and expansion unit Remove failed module Reconnect all cables If a media bay module fails follow this procedure to properly replace the module 1 Follow the steps in Shut down the system on page 110 to ensure the system shuts down correctly Remove all cables and disconnect the Business Communications Manager from the AC power outlet Remove the front bezel from the unit where the module resides Pull the latch beside the module to be replaced to release the module Refer to Figure 63 on page 114 Slide the module out of the bay where it is installed Record the switch settings from the old module Set the DIP switches on the new module to match the settings you recorded in the previous step Refer to Install a Media Bay Module on page 109 to install the module into the media bay Refer to Reconnect the equipment on page 112 to restore the system to operation 10 This procedure is complete P0993133 03 Chapter 4 Install remove or replace the Media Bay Modules 117 Wire the Media Bay Modules This section describes how to wire the cables that connect to the station and trunk mod
14. 47 BCM400 platform redundant feature option RFO configuration 49 BCM400 advanced function tray AFT liiis 50 BCM400 advanced function tray RAID status LEDS 51 Platform Media Bay Module Bays and Backplane 000 e eee eee 51 Base Function Tray Component Hardware 000 c cece eee eee 54 Base function tray chassis liliis 54 Base function tray interfaces liliis 55 Base function tray system status display LEDs 0 0 055 55 Media services card MSC iisissleseselesese eres 57 MSC IP call processing hardware llli else 59 Maincard CP rrr 60 Main card connections 0 00 cee es 61 PGliriseE card eet ede i due kat ave ad ee hte OX d e as 61 Data networking components saaa aaaea 62 WAN interface card 00 0 00 cee eee 62 Modem cards oce tt phe a ede B asse betur acp Pane dol be Qed 63 I O InterfaGe Gardia asser we te tcm Ra tet a ERR Atte tes a MORET a 64 Platform Power Supply ssulsssseeeses hn 65 BCM400 redundant power supply 0 0c eee eee eee 66 FLAG DIS EE CO rare at CEU PRAE ULM REN 67 RAID upgrade Kit sese ms ee e ee a a ter etal 67 COOling FAN acceded PET 68 Telephony Components 0 0 0 cece cette rn 69 Media bay modules MBMS lt riar renei ranna eae 71 Media bay module LED indicators 0 0000 73 Media bay module power connec
15. 000 e cece ee eee ee 324 Determine module DIP switch settings 0 0 0 eee eee 326 Set the media bay module DIP switches 0 00000 cee eee 330 Line and extension numbers for specific modules 000 eee eae 332 DTM switch settings 2 000 cee IRI 332 DDIM switch settings xn rb r da wan vega edhe a danced 333 BRI switch settings seriet eae cee nh 334 CTM switch settings 4 ae ce ev a ta ee ae ee dis 334 4X16 switch settings 0 0 eae 336 ASM 8 switch settings lille eh 337 DSM switch s ttirigs iive Rb LSSAAe eRNER VERE equis 338 DSM16 DSM 32 single density switch settings upgraded system 338 DSM16 and DSM 32 double density switch settings upgraded system 340 DSM16 DSM 32 single density switch settings new 3 0 system 341 DSM16 and DSM 32 double density switch settings new 3 0 system 342 DECT switch settings III 343 FEM switch settings orre erati rye oe aaa a p RII 344 Appendix C Media Bay Module Combinations leere 345 Combining CTMs and 4X16s8 020000 aaea 345 Fully loaded Setup is erp a IDORISGRUMEEIN UK EERBOMAS dare heed 346 DECT Combinations x eR ee Ex eee Ae eens Ree ee eee ees 349 Changing Configurations sasaaa cette 350 System Setup xad tes alse area deans ea ben ACERO ete ione ple te Bal eaten teed 350 Set DNs and Port Numbers 0000 cece eee teens 351 Installation and Maintenance
16. Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static discharge Always wear a ground wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container Installation and Maintenance Guide 236 Chapter 10 Replace Data Cards and Processing Hardware 1 If you still have access to the Unified Manager shut down the system using the Shutdown command For details refer to Shut down the system software on page 145 Otherwise skip to step 2 2 Setup the platform base hardware for maintenance as described in Shut down the system hardware on page 146 Disconnect the Business Communications Manager from the AC power outlet Disconnect any connectors from the front of the base function tray Remove the platform base chassis cover See Remove the platform base chassis top cover on page 161 Continue to the next step in this procedure when complete 6 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 7 Partially remove the base function tray from the platform base chassis Ensure you do not pinch stretch or damage any cables 8 Remove the base function tray bezel See Remove the base function tray bezel on page 153 Continue to the next step in this procedure when complete 9 Remove the WAN card if applicable See Remove the WAN card on page 219 Continue to the next step in this procedure when complete 10 D
17. 20 00 0 cee 251 Install the base station remote power interconnect RPI unit 251 Mountthe RPI unit moisie cioe eg He EEA 252 RPI wiring and connections sslleleee eh 255 Install a Companion base station 0 00 nae 261 Position the Companion base station 0 00 eee 261 Attach a Companion Base Station to a wall or ceiling 262 Companion set registration liliis 264 System resta E TEEETE DT TI DERIT TOES 264 Install an external antenna and lightning surge protection 265 Read before you install equipment 000 e eee eee 265 Antenna installation United States of America 2005 265 Install a lightning surge protector USA 0 000 cee eee eee 267 Install an antenna Canada 200 osnin ttn por pEr ria Oat 269 Install DECT Systems 00 een een eens 275 Chapter 13 Install Analog Terminal Adapters 0c eee ee eee eee 277 Before Installation e iare niania aaa a a aria e EA re 277 Environmental requirements llle 277 Operating requirements 0 00 ccc 277 Analog transmission parameters llis 278 North American systems only llis 278 Connect the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 uss 280 Installation and Maintenance Guide 22 Contents Mount the Business Communications Manager ATA2 00000 cee eee 281 Determ
18. 5 This procedure is complete Installation and Maintenance Guide 272 Chapter 12 Install Companion or DECT Systems Install an outdoor omnidirectional antenna Canada Use the procedure in this section to install an outdoor omnidirectional antenna Canada only Use the following guidelines to install an outdoor omnidirectional antenna Locate the antenna on the external wall of the building Note You must install the antenna on a vertical surface gt e Keep the outdoor omnidirectional external antenna as close as possible to the base station The base station itself must always be located inside the building e The recommended installation height is 4 m 13 ft to 5 m 16 5 ft above ground level e Always install a surge protector between an outdoor omnidirectional external antenna and a base station Note The connector on the outdoor omnidirectional external antenna is a TNC female connector To connect the antenna you need an adapter to connect the TNC connector to the BNC coaxial cables or a coaxial cable with a TNC male connector on one end and BNC male connector on the other end Caution Fit lightning protection to the antenna if appropriate See Install a lightning surge protector Canada on page 274 for more information Important points to remember Do not install the external antenna or the lightning surge protector during an electrical storm Always turn
19. To Select Enter these switch settings e assign DS30 bus 1 2 3415 6 Mica lines 2 on on on on on on 211 234 3 on on on on on off 181 204 4 on on on on off on 151 174 Select DS30 bus 5 6 vu Enter these switch settings 1 2 3 4 56 on on on on off off on on on off on on on on on off on off If your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 channel split DS30 7 is not available To assign these lines 121 144 91 114 61 84 Table 55 shows the switch settings for each DS30 bus and the resulting line assignments Table 55 DTM switch settings North American PRI If your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 channel split DS30 7 is not available Select Enter these switch settings Toassign Select Enter these switch settings To assign DS30 these DS30 these bus 1 2 3 4 5 6 lines bus 1 2 3 4 5 6 lines 2 on on on on on on 211 233 5 on on on on off off 121 143 3 on on on on on off 181 203 6 on on on off on on 91 113 4 on on on on off on 451 173 7 jon on on off on off 61 83 P0993133 03 Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings 333 Table 56 shows the switch settings for each DS30 bus and the resulting line assignments Table 56 DTM switch settings E1 and UK PRI Enter these switch settings To Select DS30 assign bus 1 2 34 5 6 these lines 2 on on on on on on 211 2
20. Install the modem card guide pin Carefully grasp the new modem card with your finger tips Install the modem card in the correct location on the main card Ensure the modem card pins correctly align with the main card modem connectors and modem guide pin Gently push on the modem card with your fingertips until it fully seats in the main card modem connectors If applicable connect the RJ11 modem card connector to the main card socket Install the MSC in the correct PCI riser card connector See Install the media services card MSC on page 226 When complete continue to the next step of this procedure Install the two chassis mounting screws that secure the MSC to the base function tray chassis extension at the rear of the MSC See Figure 151 Position the WAN card if applicable in the top PCI riser card connector See Install the WAN card on page 221 When complete continue to the next step of this procedure Partially install the base function tray in the platform base chassis Connect the DS30 connectors to the MSC Position the PCI cover plate on the front of the base function tray such that the base function tray and cover plate screw holes align Position the PCI cover plate locking screw in the PCI cover plate Tighten the PCI cover plate locking screw until the plate is firmly set in place see Figure 147 Push the base function tray completely into the chassis see Install the base function tray on page 1
21. Note DSM modules deployed with 2 5 systems are all single density and cannot be set to double density The DSM 16 and DSM32 modules can be set to either density Companion has not be included in this table because you cannot use modules set to double density to deploy Companion Table 63 DSM 16 and DSM32 double density switch settings for 2 5 systems upgraded to 3 0 different Start DN enter the range in the blank column Select Enter these switch settings To assign these DS30 DNs to DSM 16 bus 1 2 3 4 5 6 A DSM1 B DSM2 off on on on on on JA 221 236 2 off on off on on on B 377 392 off on on on on off A 237 252 3 off on off on on off B 393 408 off on on on off on JA 253 268 3 off on off on off on B 409 424 off on on on off off A 269 284 B off on off on off off B 425 440 off on on off on on A 285 300 6 off on off off on on B 441 456 E off on on off on off A 301 316 i off on off off on off B 457 472 A B A B A B A B A B A B The extensions listed are based on a three digit DN with a Start DN of 221 If your system has longer DNs or a If your system is configured with a 3 5 channel split you cannot use DS30 7 for the DSM 16 module Available only on systems set to FDD Modules cannot be set to double density on systems set to PDD Refer to the previous chart for the switch settings for single density and
22. Replace the cover a Q N Restore the Business Communications Manager system to operation For details refer to Restart the System after Maintenance on page 147 The Business Communications Manager system starts up when you connect the AC power cord The start up process takes several minutes to complete 6 Test the direction of the fan exhaust air flow to determine if the fan is correctly installed a Hold apiece of paper or your hand close to the fan exhaust A correctly installed fan blows air away from the platform base chassis b Ifthe fan exhaust air flow is incorrect remove the cooling fan See Remove a BCM200 cooling fan on page 185 and re install the fan in the correct orientation this procedure 7 This procedure is complete P0993133 03 191 Chapter 9 Replace or Upgrade a Power Supply The BCM200 uses a standard power supply The BCM400 and expansion units use either a standard or redundant power supply This chapter describes the following power supply installation and replacement techniques replace a standard power supply upgrade from a standard power supply to a redundant power supply BCM400 only install or replace the power supply modules in a redundant power supply system cable routing and mangement how to maintain the power supply Note For the BCM400 RFO configuration only a redundant power supply is included Use a redundant fan with the redundant power supply
23. To assign these DNs ESE HITS DSM 32 to Companion bus 1 2 3 4 5 6 to DSM 16 T B or DSM 16 9p QUO 2 on on on on on on 221 236 253 268 221 236 3 on on on on on off 253 268 285 300 253 268 N A 4 on on on on off on 285 300 317 332 285 300 5 on on on on off off 317 332 349 364 317 332 ff a kkkk e em o o Onf 349 364 381 396 349 364 H i FUB on on on off on off 381 396 N A Sm PDD The extensions listed are based on a three digit DN with a Start DN of 221 If your system has longer DNs or a If your system is configured with a 3 5 channel split you cannot use DS30 7 for the DSM 16 module You cannot configure the DSM32 module for DS30 6 because the second set of DNs cannot be accessed If you need more DNs for Companion sets use the range that starts at 597 ISDN or DECT and change the If you system is set to Full Double Density FDD Companion telephones are not supported Installation and Maintenance Guide 342 Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings DSM16 and DSM 32 double density switch settings new 3 0 system The following table shows the switch settings for DSM plus modules deployed as double density on a new 3 0 system Note DSM modules deployed prior to 3 0 are all single density and cannot be set to double density but they can still be used on new 3 0 systems The DSM 16 and DSM32 modules can be set to either density Companion has not be included in this ta
24. Brown Red Black Blue Blue Black Black Green Green Black Black Slate Slate Black 15 P0993133 03 Chapter 12 Install Companion or DECT Systems 259 Table 29 RPI 8 BIX wiring chart Continued Yellow Orange Orange Yellow 19 OBIX7 BS7 RPI 8 BIX wiring chart Table 30 lists the wiring chart for the RPI 16 BIX Table 30 RPI 16 BIX wiring chart PWR Yellow Brown Brown Yellow PWR Violet Blue Blue Violet Violet Green Green Violet White Blue Blue White White Green Green White White Slate Slate White Installation and Maintenance Guide 260 Chapter 12 Install Companion or DECT Systems Table 30 RPI 16 BIX wiring chart Continued 32 7 38 13 15 44 19 21 OBIX11 BS11 OBIX13 BS13 OBIX15 BS15 PWR Red Orange Orange Red Red Brown Brown Red Black Blue Blue Black Black Green Green Black Black Slate Slate Black Yellow Orange Orange Yellow Yellow Brown Brown Yellow Violet Blue Blue Violet Violet Green Green Violet P0993133 03 Chapter 12 Install Companion or DECT Systems 261 Install a Companion base station Before you install wireless equipment ensure that a site planner determines base station locations a
25. Do Not Disturb A feature that stops calls from ringing at a telephone Only Priority Calls ring at the telephone when this feature is set A line button flashes when a call is received but the set does not ring domain name The domain name is used to translate Internet IP addresses into common language to allow for easier user access Domain Name Server DNS The domain name system or server is the system that maps names of objects into IP numbers or other resource record values dual tone multifrequency DTMF Two distinct telephone signaling tones used for dialing dynamic IP address This feature is provided by an IP address server which assigns an IP address to a computer every time it logs on to the network Emergency 911 dialing The ability to access a public emergency response system by dialing the digits 9 1 1 emergency telephone A single line telephone that becomes active when there is no power to the Business Communications Manager This telephone is also referred to as a 500 2500 telephone Ethernet A local area network that networks computers with coaxial cable or twisted pair wiring This protocol makes use of Carrier Sense Multiple Access Collision Detect CSMA CD LAN to allow computers such as the Business Communications Manager to listen for pauses before they communicate event message These are messages generated by the system to record activity The messages are written to the system log
26. Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge N Always wear a ground wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container Remove the old battery See Remove the Clock Calendar battery on page 239 Ensure you have the positive side of the battery facing up when you position it in the socket Push down until the battery snaps into the socket b amp b WO N a Install the media services card See Install the media services card MSC on page 226 Continue to the next step of this procedure when complete 5 Install the WAN card if applicable See Install the WAN card on page 221 Continue to the next step of this procedure when complete Partially insert the base function tray into the platform base chassis Connect the DS30 connectors to the MSC P0993133 03 Chapter 10 Replace Data Cards and Processing Hardware 241 10 11 12 13 Position the PCI cover plate on the front of the base function tray such that the base function tray and cover plate screw holes align Position the PCI cover plate locking screw in the PCI cover plate Tighten the PCI cover plate locking screw until the plate is firmly set in place see Figure 147 Install the base function tray bezel see Install the base function tray bezel on page 154 Continue to the next step in this procedure when complete Completely insert the base fun
27. on page 317 for more information i Warning Changing the DS30 channel split If you change the channel split from 2 6 default to 3 5 after the system is initialized any module set to DS30 channel 7 or requiring the use of channel 7 becomes inoperable If you change the channel split from a 3 5 split to a 2 6 split after the system is initialized all data is lost and all optional applications must be reinstalled and reconfigured Refer to Chapter 4 Install remove or replace the Media Bay Modules on page 109 for details about determining how many media bay modules can be installed in a system P0993133 03 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware 71 Figure 36 Telephony hardware components A Trunk Media Bay Modules on page 74 fa Station Media Bay Mod ules on page 78 TE zh coo crrrjs omm mn lt Specialized Media Bay moe ee e zum Modules on page 81 eos NN i Refer to Media Bay Module Availability by Region on page 303 and Trunk Availability by Region on page 304 to determine which media bay modules and which types of trunk lines are available in your location Telephones and adapters on page 85 Media b
28. sss 263 Figure 170 Installed antenna and lightning surge protectors USA 266 Figure 171 Antenna with antenna bracket USA 0 000 eee aes 267 Figure 172 Lightning surge protector and bracket USA 05 268 Figure 173 Indoor directional external antenna Canada 270 Figure 174 Indoor omnidirectional external antenna Canada 271 Figure 175 Install the outdoor omnidirectional external antenna Canada 273 Figure 176 Install the lightning surge protector Canada 274 Figure 177 R451 connectors on the DECT media bay module 276 Figure 178 Insertion Loss from the CO to the single line telephone 278 Figure 179 Single line telephone installation overview lisse 280 Figure 180 ATA 2 pin outs essseeeeee 280 Figure 181 ATA2topview seeleeeleeee ns 281 Figure 182 ATA 2 backview ERARE EEEE ens 282 Figure 183 Data communication device installation overview 285 Figure 184 Auxiliary ringer jack lslselee BI 287 Figure 185 Audio input jack sseeeleee eh 288 Figure 186 Page relay jack errr orta 2 00 eee 289 Figure 187 Music on hold jack 0 0 EEN A EE eee 290 Figure 188 SSD board connections 0000 e ee eee 292 Figure 189 LED locations on the face of the base function tray 293 Figure 190 System Status Mon
29. DS256 connector Warning The timing in the Business Communications Manager base unit system is AN critical you must use the correct length cable as supplied with the expansion chassis The system may not work properly if you connect the Business Communications Manager expansion unit using a cable that varies in length Business Communication Manager 3 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 108 Chapter 3 Install the Business Communications Manager amp Expansion Unit Platform Base Chassis P0993133 03 109 Chapter 4 Install remove or replace the Media Bay Modules Use the procedure in this chapter to install remove or replace the media bay modules in the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis and the expansion unit Install a Media Bay Module After you set the switches on the media bay modules you can install them in the Business Communications Manager or the expansion unit The BCM200 platform accommodates a maximum of two media bay modules The BCM400 platform accomodates a maximum of four media bay modules If your BCM400 system requires more than four media bay modules you need to connect a Business Communications Manager expansion unit to the Business Communications Manager Figure 61 provides an overview of the process for installing media bay modules Note The number of media bay modules you can add varies depending on the DS30 resources that are available Refer to Figu
30. Push against the bottom Pull out from the top media bay module latches Grasp the top and bottom edges of the media bay module Remove the media bay module from the Business Communications Manager expansion unit Place the media bay module in a clean safe and static free area This procedure is complete Replace a Media Bay Module When media bay modules require replacement follow the steps in this section A Warning This section describes replacing a module with the same type of module If you want to replace a module with a different type of module you must treat it as a new installation Refer to Chapter B Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings and review Figure 200 on page 330 to ensure the new module does not overrun any lines already assigned to other modules Installation and Maintenance Guide 116 Chapter 4 Install remove or replace the Media Bay Modules Figure 66 provides an overview of the process for replacing media bay modules Figure 66 Overview of module replacement process Module failure Disconnect cables Set DIP switches Monitor LEDs for from the front of on new module to power and status the server and match old module
31. 299 300 293 294 295 296 DS30 channel 7 FEM port 6 Norstar 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 BCM 305 306 307 308 301 302 303 304 313 314 315 316 309 310 311 312 Installation Replacement Troubleshooting The Business Communications Manager media bay modules are working when both the Power and Status LEDs on the modules are on and are not blinking e If the Power LED does not light refer to Shut down the system on page 110 After the Business Communications Manager is correctly shut down remove the module and check the connectors at the back of the module for dirt or loose connections After you reinstall the module if the LED still does not light install a different module into that bay to check for a possible fault in the backplane If the second module works assume that the first module is defective and replace it with a new module e If the Power LED lights but the Status light does not light or continues to blink wait 10 minutes to allow for information download If the light continues to blink power down the system and check the DIP switch settings on the module Ensure the connector is clean and free from debris e Ifthe LEDs are on solid but the module cannot communicate or be communicated with check the Unified Manager settings for the module For information about the LEDs on the
32. Companion Wireless System on page 249 e DECT provides virtual BRI loops within the DECT module Refer to Install DECT systems on page 275 The Companion Wireless System Your Companion portable telephone allows you to leave your desk without missing important telephone calls The portable telephones can access most Business Communications Manager business features such as call forward call transfer voice conference and voice messaging using feature codes Figure 160 provides an overview of the process for installing a Companion wireless system onto the Business Communications Manager system Figure 160 Overview of installing a Companion system Business Communications Manager Companion equipment DSM module Install external installed and antennas and configured lightning protection if required Restore system to operation Install remote power interconnect RPI Configure DN records for the Install base stations handsets Connect base stations to DSM In the United States you must enter a UTAM keycode before you Register Companion sets register the handsets Installation and Maintenance Guide 250 Chapter 12 Install Companion or DECT Systems Note Companion wireless availability is region specific Refer to Mobility Services by Region on page 303 This option also requi
33. It also reboots the Business Communications Manager and expansion unit Ethernet crossover cable usage You use an ethernet crossover cable connected to a computer with a network card to connect your computer to the LAN card in the Business Communications Manager With this connection you can run Business Communications Manager Unified Manager to configure the Business Communications Manager system when you are unable to immediately connect your system to the live LAN card or your system does not have a network connection You use this type of connection in these situations e the computer you are using does not have access to the Business Communications Manager system through the network e the Business Communications Manager is not connected to a LAN or WAN e you have to change the IP address and netmask for the Business Communications Manager system before you connect it to the network Set the crossover connections To connect to the Business Communications Manager using an Ethernet crossover cable you need a computer equipped with a 10 100 Base T network interface card and TCP IP protocol Figure 77 shows the connections required P0993133 03 Chapter 5 Business Communications Manager System Startup 141 Figure 77 Ethernet crossover cable 3TD 3TD 6TD 6TD 1RD 1RD 2RD 2RD Configure your computer You must configure your computer before you use it to connect to the Business Communications Manager sy
34. Mur io zi ii Installation and Maintenance Guide 76 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware Table 10 provides a description of the function for each DTM LEDs Table 10 DTMLED functions D Power On indicates that the DTM is receiving 5 volts Status On indicates there is data communication between the DTM and the MSC card In Service Flashing indicates that the T1 ETSI or PRI trunks are out of service because a loopback test is running or the DTM is initializing Loopback On indicates a continuity loopback test is running Receive Alarm On indicates a problem with the received digital transmission This half duplex link does not work Receive Error On indicates a small error as a result of degraded digital transmission Possible causes are an ohmic connection water ingress or too long a loop Transmit Alarm On indicates the DTM cannot transmit The DTM sends an Alarm indication signal AIS to the terminating switch This half duplex link does not work Transmit Error On indicates the DTM is sending a remote alarm indication RAI carrier failure alarm CFA to the terminating switch If the Transmit Alarm is not on this error indicates a far end or cable problem All LEDS flashing All LEDs flashing continuously indicates that the DTM is initializing TIP You can install a maximum of three DTM modules in the Business
35. P0993133 03 165 Chapter 7 Hard Disk Replacement Procedures The hard disk is a core software and data storage component For BCM200 platform base configurations the hard disk assembly installs at the rear of the platform base chassis For BCM400 platform base configurations the hard disk assembly installs in the advanced function tray AFT chassis The standard Business Communications Manager configuration includes one factory installed hard disk The RFO Configuration includes 2 hard disks and RAID controller card The field upgrade includes a mirror hard disk and RAID controller card Use this procedure under the following conditions e if you need to replace an existing hard disk e if you need to upgrade to RAID Remember to take suitable precautions when working inside the Business Communications Manager system Maintain a clean and static safe site Danger Electrical shock warning AN Disconnect the power cord telephone cables and network cables before opening the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis Read and follow installation instructions carefully Caution Use only a Nortel Networks approved replacement Contact your account representative for the current list of approved replacement parts Warning Maintain a current backup of your system When you replace the hard disk you must restore the Business Communications Manager system programming from the backup Caution D
36. See installation instructions for details e Use only an FCC Part 68 compliant Universal Service Order Code USOC network interface jack as specified in the installation instructions to connect this telephone to the telephone line To connect the phone press the small plastic tab on the plug at the end of the phone s line cord Insert into a wall or baseboard jack until it clicks To disconnect press the tab and pull out See installation instructions for details Installation and Maintenance Guide e Ifthe terminal equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of the product may be required But if advance notice isn t practical the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary e If anetwork interface jack is not already installed in your location you can order one from your telephone company Order the appropriate USOC Network interface jack as specified in the installation instructions for wall mounted telephones or for desk table use In some states customers are permitted to install their own jacks e Your telephone may not be connected to a party line or coin telephone line Connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commissio
37. Serial port A port that sends and receives data one bit at a time Software keycode Refer to Keycode static IP address A Static or fixed IP address that is permanently assigned to a computer Station Auxiliary Power Supply SAPS A device which provides power to a telephone that is more than 300 m 975 ft and less than 1200 m 3900 ft from the server or to a CAP module Station media bay module Physical units installed in a Business Communications Manager that connect the telephone lines to the system subnet mask A value used to route packets on TCP IP networks When the IP layer has to deliver a packet through an interface it uses the destination address contained in the packet together with the subnet mask of the interface to select an interface and the next hop in that subnet Synchronous A synchronous signal is sourced from the same timing reference A synchronous signal causes the interval between successive bits characters or events to remain constant or locked in to a specific clock frequency System speed dial code A two digit code 01 to 70 that you program to dial a telephone number a maximum of 24 digits long You can program System speed dial codes for the complete system under the System Speed heading SSD The SSD system status display is a LED interface used to visually monitor the status of system components SSM The SSM system status monitor is a graphical user interface used
38. applications cable only 0 4 mm wire side or 2 400 ft of 26 AWG wire Analog transmission parameters North American systems only The following are the required analog parameters for an ATA2 Input impedance at tip and ring 600 ohms Return loss gt 20 dB for 200 to 3 400 Hz when Network terminated with 600 ohms Insertion loss on an internal call Business Communications Manager ATA 2 to Business Communications Manager system loss 3 0 dB 0 5 dB Insertion loss on an external call Business Communications Manager ATA 2 to Business Communications Manager system loss 2 2 dB 1 0 dB Business Communications Manager system to Business Communications Manager ATA 2 loss 0 5 dB 1 0 dB The maximum loss for Business Communications Manager ATA 2 to Central Office CO configuration shown in Figure 178 must not exceed 10 dB Figure 178 Insertion Loss from the CO to the single line telephone Business Communications Manager ATA 2 Single line telephone Central Office cable loss L F de RS irnn Cable loss m Business Communications Manager to ATA 2 pe ATA 2 to Business Communications Manager 4 _ 10 dB Max Longitudinal balance to ground 50 dB 60 to 4 000 Hz With IEEE 455 1976 test Overload level 3 dB
39. e serial port LAN interface The following interfaces are classified as Telecommunication Network Voltage TNV circuits and shall NOT be connected to exposed plant e ATAI Limited Warranty Nortel Networks warrants this product against defects and malfunctions during a one 1 year period from the date of original purchase If there is a defect or malfunction Nortel Networks shall at its option and as the exclusive remedy either repair or replace the telephone set at no charge if returned within the warranty period If replacement parts are used in making repairs these parts may be refurbished or may contain refurbished materials If it is necessary to replace the telephone set it may be replaced with a refurbished telephone of the same design and color If it should become necessary to repair or replace a defective or malfunctioning telephone set under this warranty the provisions of this warranty shall apply to the repaired or replaced telephone set until the expiration of ninety 90 days from the date of pick up or the date of shipment to you of the repaired or replacement set or until the end of the original warranty period whichever is later Proof of the original purchase date is to be provided with all telephone sets returned for warranty repairs Exclusions Nortel Networks does not warrant its telephone sets to be compatible with the equipment of any particular telephone company This warranty does not extend to dam
40. example its source destination and protocol and perform a controlling action on the traffic when certain user defined characteristics are matched VPN Virtual Private Networks Business Communications Manager 2 5 uses the PPTP point to point tunneling protocol and IPSec IP security tunneling protocols to create secure extranets These secure extranets provide safe transport of data to and from the Business Communications Manager using the public data network PDN Installation and Maintenance Guide 358 System Options P0993133 03 359 Glossary access code A unique digit or digits entered by the user to access some telephony features such as Line pools Call park external lines Direct Dial telephone and Auto DN address A unique identifier assigned to networks and stations that allows each device to receive and reply to messages Analog terminal adapter ATA A device that connects analog telecommunication devices such as fax machines answering machines and single line telephones to the Business Communications Manager system through a Digital station module Application program interface API An application program uses this interface to make requests of the operating system or another application The API is an interface to an operating system or a program asynchronous A method of transmission where the time intervals between characters are not required to be equal and signals are s
41. off on on on on on DSM 32 settings off on on on on off DSM 16 settings off on on on off on DSM 16 settings off on off on off on 5 ASM8 settings on on on on off on ASM8 settings on on off on off on ASM8 settings on off on on off on ASM8 settings on off off on off on 6 on on on off on on 7 on on on off on off Installation and Maintenance Guide 348 Media Bay Module Combinations Table 71 Demonstrates a partial double density system PDD the default setting for 3 0 where Companion can be installed on DS30 06 and 07 Table 71 Two double density DSMs plus a single density DSM for Companion Each heavily outlined and shaded square represents one module Switch setting DS30 1 2 channel DSM 32 DTMs Offset 0 Offset 0 12 3 4 5 6 DSM 32 settings off on on on on on DSM 32 settings off on on on on off DSM 32 set to single density for Companion P0993133 03 Media Bay Module Combinations 349 DECT Combinations This section describes a system containing a DECT module three BRI modules and two DSM 32s This configuration uses all the DS30 channels with the exception of one offset Note DECT systems are not available for all profiles Refer to Mobility Services by Region on page 303 Table 72 demonstrates this combination including the switch settings fo
42. see Install a BCM400 cooling fan on page 182 i Warning You must remove all of the connections to the Business Communications Manager before you power the system down Failure to disconnect lines before power down can cause damage to the system i Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a ground wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container Installation and Maintenance Guide 192 Chapter 9 Replace or Upgrade a Power Supply Replace a Standard Power Supply If the platform base chassis or expansion unit has a standard power supply that fails then all activity on the system ceases This procedure describes how to replace a failed standard power supply unit Figure 117 provides an overview of the process to replace a standard power supply Figure 117 Standard power supply replacement overview Set up unit for maintenance Disconnect power supply cables Note cable routing Install new power Restore unit to supply operation Remove failed Reconnect power power supply supply cables Check power LED Check connections Remove a BCM200 standard power supply If the standard power supply fails the system is down Use this procedure to remove the standard power supply from a BCM200 platform base chass
43. 0 BIX Box Wiring Guide Installation and Maintenance Guide 122 Chapter 4 Install remove or replace the Media Bay Modules Table 13 and Figure 71 provide the wiring scheme for the DSM 16 4X16 and DSM 32 modules The Sets heading indicates the position of the set on the BIX block Set DNs are allocated by the Business Communications Manager based on the DS30 channel setting on the station module Table 13 DSM wiring chart Sets Sets Pin Wire color Port 1st 2nd Figure 71 Wiring for DSM 16 4X16 and DSM 32 26 White Blue X01 1 17 1 Blue White X01 1 17 25 pair connector 27 White Orange X02 2 18 T Tip 1R 2 Orange White X02 2 18 28 White Green X03 3 19 3 Green White X03 3 19 29 White Brown X04 4 20 DSM 16 4X16 4 Brown White X04 4 20 30 White Slate X05 5 21 5 Slate White X05 5 21 31 Red Blue X06 6 22 6 Blue Red X06 6 22 32 Red Orange X07 m 23 7 Orange Red X07 7 23 33 Red Green X08 8 24 8 Green Red X08 8 24 34 Red Brown X09 9 25 9 Brown Red X09 9 25 DSM 32 The second 25 pair connector is 35 Red Slate X10 10 26 wired in the same sequence as the 10 Slate Red X10 10 26 first one 36 Black Blue Xi n 27 11 Blue Black X11 11 27 37 Black Orange X12 12 28 12 Orange Black X12 12 28 38 Black Green X13 13 29 13 Green Black X13 13 29 39 Black Brown X14 14 30 14 Brown Black X14 14 30 40 Black Slate X15 15 31 15 Slate Black X1
44. 5 Ttip 6 Tshield Warning If you are using a service provider channel service unit CSU you must disable the Business Communications Manager system internal CSU using Business Communications Manager Unified Manager For more information refer to the Business Communications Manager 3 0 Programming Operations Guide e Figure 69 shows the wiring pin out for a CTM a CTMS or the CTM jacks on a 4X16 module to connect to the service provider AII the modules have an auxiliary jack the CTMS has two Do not attempt to plug digital equipment into this jack Figure 69 CTM RJ11 wiring array CTM connector Auxiliary jack e oL 3I 3E IC ol RJ11 jacks Pin Z connection 3 Ring 4 Tip The CTM 8 has ten RJ11 jacks including two auxiliary jacks The 4X16 and CTM media bay modules have four RJ11 jacks Installation and Maintenance Guide 120 Chapter 4 Install remove or replace the Media Bay Modules e Figure 70 shows the wiring pin out for an BRIM S T to the service provider Warning The BRIM S T must only be connected to an NT1 provided by the service provider The NT1 must provide a Telecommunication Network Voltage TNV to Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV barrier Figure 70 BRIM S T RJ45 wiring array BRIM S T connector e o oO of eld ell Pin connection 3 TX 4 RX LLLEELLE RJ45 jacks 4 RX
45. Business Communications Manager modem A communications device that allows computers to exchange data over telephone lines music source You can connect a radio or other source of music to the system to provide music for the Music on Hold and Background Music features A music source is not part of the Business Communications Manager system components Network Basic Input Output System NetBIOS An interface and upper level protocol developed by IBM for use with a proprietary adapter for its PC network product NetBIOS provides a standard interface to the lower networking layers The protocol provides higher level programs with access to the network network Two or more computers linked electronically to share programs and exchange data Installation and Maintenance Guide 368 Glossary network device A network device is a hardware entity characterized by its use as a communications component within a network network DN A number supplied by the ISDN network service provider for ISDN terminal equipment network interface card NIC This card is installed inside a computer so the computer can be physically connected to a network device such as the Business Communications Manager server On hold A setting that controls what external callers hear music tones or silence when you place the call on hold Program On hold under Feature settings in System programming overflow A setting in Routing Service that
46. Business Communications Manager and expansion unit refer to See Table 16 on page 129 P0993133 03 127 Chapter 5 Business Communications Manager System Startup This chapter describes initial system startup procedures for the Business Communications Manager The Business Communications Manager and expansion unit are each powered through an AC outlet The voltage required depends on the geographical location of the units All systems are initially set at the factory based on the intended destination You must check that the voltage and wiring are correct for you system before you connect any of the units to the power source Incorrect power settings result in equipment damage Read the following warnings You must protect yourself and the Business Communications Manager units from possible electrical shocks i Warning Use only qualified persons to service the system The installation and service of this unit must be performed by service personnel with the appropriate training and experience Service personnel must be aware of the hazards of working with telephony equipment and wiring They must have experience in techniques that minimize any danger of shock or equipment damage j Danger Electrical shock hazards Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunications network and ac mains are possible with this equipment To minimize risk to service personnel and users the Business Communications Manager system must b
47. COTO V V Main card e PCI Riser Main card connector Data networking components The data networking components connect the Business Communications Manager system to the wide area network WAN WAN interface card The network interface card uses a T1 interface and sync port that connects the Business Communications Manager system to the wide area network WAN The WAN card is available as a field installed unit The WAN card connects to a T1 PSTN line with an integrated T1 DSU CSUs North American The WAN card can also connect to a T1 PSTN line with an X 21 or V 35 interface Europe Middle East Africa EMEA P0993133 03 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware 63 Figure 24 WAN interface card international version PCI clamp d d ic press plate a yh T i T lee P ls SS PCI connector b IL DB25 female connector press plate PCI connector L PA PCI clamp 4 S Pd e lac P d P T1 CSU connector DB25 female connector Modem card Modem card Standard on North American systems optional for APAC EMEA a V 90 modem that sends and receives data using the public telephone system The modem kit consists of a modem card RJ11 interface and connector cable The modem connects the Business Communications Manager system to the public switched telephone network Figure 26 shows th
48. Component description BCM200 PEC BCM400 PEC FRU Description procedure BCM MBM Bay Filler Blanking NTAB3279 NTAB3279 BCM MBM Metal Install a Media Plate FRU filler Bay Module on page 109 DTM MBM NT7BO4AAAC NT7BO4AAAC Digital trunk media Install a Media bay module on Bay Module on page 75 page 109 CTM4 CLID Trunk MBM NT5B18AAAD NT5B18AAAD Caller ID trunk Install a Media media bay module Bay Module on on page 76 page 109 CTM8 CLID MBM NT5B18ABAA NT5B18ABAA Caller ID trunk Install a Media media bay module Bay Module on on page 76 page 109 BRI S T MBM NT7B76AAAH NT7B76AAAH Basic rate interface Install a Media media bay module on page 77 Bay Module on page 109 P0993133 03 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware 43 Table 7 Media bay module Component description BCM200 PEC BCM400 PEC FRU Description Installation procedure DSM 16 MBM NT7B08AAAD NT7B08AAAD Digital station media bay module DSM on page 78 Install a Media Bay Module on page 109 DSM 32 MBM NT7B09AAAC NT7B09AAAC Digital station media bay module DSM on page 78 Install a Media Bay Module on page 109 CMB4X16 MBM NT5B42AAAA NT5B42AAAA 4X16 Media Bay Module on page 79 Install a Media Bay Module on page 109 ASM8 MBM NT7B16AAAE NT7B16AAAE Analog station media bay module on page 80 Instal
49. Connect the primary B hard disk ribbon cable to the primary hard disk 3 This procedure is complete Install a hard disk cage in a BCM200 platform base chassis Use this procedure to install the hard disk cage into the BCM200 platform base chassis Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static discharge Always wear a ground wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container 1 Disconnect the Business Communications Manager from the AC power outlet 2 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 3 Remove the platform base chassis top cover see Remove the platform base chassis top cover on page 161 4 You can access the hard disk location from a panel at the rear of the platform base chassis Remove the four hard disk access panel screws see Figure 93 Place the panel and screws in a safe location 5 Install the hard disk in the hard disk cage Installation and Maintenance Guide 174 Chapter 7 Hard Disk Replacement Procedures Insert the hard disk cage through the hard disk access panel in the back of the BCM200 b Position the hard disk cage in front of the cage chassis mounting points The hard disk cage lift tab is at the rear of the hard disk cage C Slide the hard disk cage in the direction shown in Figure 100 until the unit attaches to the chassis You will hear and
50. DN DN DN 3 Green White Port 203 Port 303 Port 403 Port 503 Port 603 Port 703 29 White Brown DN DN DN DN DN DN 4 Brown White Port 204 Port 304 Port 404 Port 504 Port 604 Port 704 30 White Slate DN DN DN DN DN DN 5 Slate White Port 205 Port 305 Port 405 Port 505 Port 605 Port 705 31 Red Blue DN DN DN DN DN DN 6 Blue Red Port 206 Port 306 Port 406 Port 506 Port 606 Port 706 32 Red Orange DN DN DN DN DN DN 7 Orange Red Port 207 Port 307 Port 407 Port 507 Port 607 Port 707 33 Red Green DN DN DN DN DN DN 8 Green Red Port 208 Port 308 Port 408 Port 508 Port 608 Port 708 34 Red Brown DN DN DN DN DN DN 9 Brown Red Port 209 Port 309 Port 409 Port 509 Port 609 Port 709 35 Red Slate DN DN DN DN DN DN 10 Slate Red Port 210 Port 310 Port 410 Port 510 Port 610 Port 710 36 Black Blue DN DN DN DN DN DN 11 Blue Black Port 211 Port 311 Port 411 Port 511 Port 611 Port 711 37 Black Orange DN DN DN DN DN DN 12 Orange Black Port 212 Port 312 Port 412 Port 512 Port 612 Port 712 38 Black Green DN DN DN DN DN DN 13 Green Black Port 213 Port 313 Port 413 Port 513 Port 613 Port 713 39 Black Brown DN DN DN DN DN DN 14 Brown Black Port 214 Port 314 Port 414 Port 514 Port 614 Port 714 40 Black Slate DN DN DN DN DN DN 15 Slate Black Port 215 Port 315 Port 415 Port 515 Port 615 Port 715 41 Yellow Blue DN DN DN DN DN DN 16 Blue Yellow Port 216 Port 316 Port 416 Port 516 Port 616 Port 716
51. E d P dii Module is TOME On 123456 right side up B DIP switches s Back of the media bay module i E EU 2 Setthe switches to correspond with the settings you chose Determine module DIP switch settings on page 326 3 Repeat for each media bay module you want to install P0993133 03 Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings 331 4 You are now ready to install the modules into the Business Communications Manager base or expansion units Refer to Chapter 14 Install Optional Telephony Equipment on page 287 for details Tip Create a label with the DS30 bus and DIP switch settings and stick it to the front of the module to provide ease of reference for maintenance activities 5 This procedure is complete Installation and Maintenance Guide 332 Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings Line and extension numbers for specific modules The switch settings on the media bay module determine the line numbers and extension numbers the modules use The tables in this section show the correspondence between DS30 numbers switch settings and the line extension numbers for each type of module The DS30 number and switch settings correspond with Table 52 on page 328 DTM switch settings Although DTMs have more than 16 lines they occupy only one DS30 bus per DTM Table 54 shows the switch settings for each DS30 bus and the resulting line assignments Table 54 DTM switch settings T1
52. Figure 28 BCM200 and BCM400 STD platform power supply rear view Rear view On Off switch Standard power supply AC power connector Fan Figure 29 Standard power supply connectors Connector Configuration for Standard Sparkle Power Supply New Lengths Purpose and Notes 1 o o o o 525mm MBM Back plane rjooooH 525mm MBM Back plane for BCM400 not required for BCM200 FT 500mm to first 50mm to next 100mm to last total 650mm tie wrapped Hard disk cage extra connectors to be tucked under the every 5cm hard disk d ch gegoh SS ee V 430mm to first right angle 150mm to next total 580mm Reserved for future use ogooooooo0 gooooooooo 480mm I O Card 480mm I O Card Installation and Maintenance Guide 66 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware BCM400 redundant power supply The redundant power supply RPS is available as a field replaceable unit FRU The redundant power supply consists of two power supply modules and a power supply chassis The power supply modules are interchangeable and can be exchanged one at a time during power on conditions Figure 30 illustrates the redundant power supply chassis and modules Figure 31 provides details on the redundant power supply connectors Figure 30 BCM400 platform redundant power su
53. Figure 38 Rear of modules showing DS256 channel and power connectors 73 Figure 39 Underside of module showing DIP switches 00 74 Installation and Maintenance Guide 26 Figures Figure 40 Figure 41 Figure 42 Figure 43 Figure 44 Figure 45 Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48 Figure 49 Figure 50 Figure 51 Figure 52 Figure 53 Figure 54 Figure 55 Figure 56 Figure 57 Figure 58 Figure 59 Figure 60 Figure 61 Figure 62 Figure 63 Figure 64 Figure 65 Figure 66 Figure 67 Figure 68 Figure 69 Figure 70 Figure 71 Figure 72 Figure 73 Figure 74 Figure 75 Figure 76 Figure 77 Figure 78 Figure 79 Figure 80 Digital Trunk Interface Module DTM faceplate 75 CTM and CTM8 LEDS and jacks 2 0000 eee eee eee 77 ISDN BRI media bay module LEDs and jacks 77 Faceplates of DSM 16 and DSM 32 0 0 cece eee 79 Faceplate of 4X16 module LEDS connectors and jacks 80 ASM 8 frOnt VIEW 34 csse ha wa e Ge kd sik oe ER De es fe pair ea Rs 80 DECT faceplate with eight RJ45 connectors 000 eee 82 Fiber expansion media bay module FEM LEDs 83 Digital Drop amp Insert DDIM faceplate lisse 84 Business communication manager DS256 connectors and EXPANSION UNIT 4 ze E Pi et ee ey Gra Sober DESEE Fu Ed 90 Installation and initialization overview llle 93 Attach the rack mount bracket
54. Germany Y Y v Global v A v v Holland v v v Hong Kong Y v v v v Italy Y v North American v v v v v v Norway Y v P0993133 03 System Region Attributes 305 Table 43 Trunk availability by region Continued Country PRI specific ETSI 30 channels analog Region BRI S T 2 4 BRI U2 4 NA 23channels Analog DID E amp M CLASS trunk card PRC v v v v Spain Y v Sweden Y v Switzerland v v Taiwan A Y v v v United Kingdom A Y v Table 44 PHI line protocol supported by region Region BRI T side BRI S side PRI T1 Australia ISDN ETSI 300 403 ISDN ETSI 300 102 DASS2 DPNSS MCDN ISDN ETSI 300 403 ETSI QSIG 300 239 Brazil ISDN ETSI 300 403 ISDN ETSI 300 102 ETSI QSIG 300 239 CALA ETSI QSIG 300 239 ISDN ETSI 300 403 MCDN Caribbean NI 2 NI 2 NI 2 Loop North American 4ESS E amp M DMS100 DID DMS250 Ground MCDN Fixed trunk types Hong Kong ITU T ITU T ITU T Loop Taiwan E amp M DID Ground Fixed trunk types Denmark ETSI QSIG 300 239 ISDN ETSI 300 102 DASS2 France ISDN ETSI 300 403 DPNSS Germany MCDN Global ETSI QSIG 300 239 Holland ISDN ETSI 300 403 Norway PRC Spain Sweden Switzerland Installation and Maintenance Guide 306 System Region Attributes Table 44 PRI line protocol supported by region Continued Region BRI T side BRI S side PRI T1 Italy ISDN ETSI 300 102 ISDN ETSI 300 102 DASS2 ETS
55. Guide 24 Contents Appendix D System Options sei cisco pe vases u rpne Ea Ee REA a 353 Telephony Features and Options 000 0 cece eee eee 353 Data Features ek ue SS ees Bees 2 Rae ee AA ee ada 356 Glossary A UP 359 P0993133 03 25 Figures Figure 1 Acrobat Reader display setup selections 200 eae 34 Figure2 Business Communications Manager core system components overview 39 Figure 3 BCM200 platform base chassis and primary components 44 Figure4 BCM200 platform base chassis 00 0 c cece eee eee 45 Figure5 BCMAOO platform base chassis and primary components 46 Figure6 BCMA400 platform base chassis standard configuration 48 Figure 7 BCM400 platform base chassis RFO configuration 49 Figure8 Advanced function tray llli 50 Figure9 Advanced function tray RAID status LEDs 51 Figure 10 Media bay module filler blanking plate 0 00 02 ee eee 51 Figure 11 BCM200 media bay module bays lesse lees 52 Figure 12 BCM400 Media bay module bays lessen 52 Figure 13 BCM200 media bay module backplane 0 00000 eee 53 Figure 14 BCM400 media bay module backplane 200000 eee 53 Figure 15 Base function tray hardware and chassis llsslsss 54 Figure 16 Base function tray faceplate ports liliis 55 Figure 17 Busines
56. Manager system from 1 000 to 2 600 feet You line telephone the ATA 2 supports a long loop must use a dedicated cable to connect the two configuration For more information refer to locations Chapter 13 Install Analog Terminal Adapters on page 277 Portable systems The following sections describe the portable systems that are compatible with the Business Communications Manager system and the hardware components that are required Companion System Components The Companion system allows portable access from a fixed line The system consists of the following hardware components Companion base station transmits and receives signals between the Business Communications Manager system and portable handsets You install the base stations on walls or ceilings Each base station provides radio coverage for a maximum of 32 cells Note Companion systems installed in the United States require a keycode to activate the base stations Refer to The Companion Wireless System on page 249 e C3050 portable handset The C3050 CT2 Plus portable handset is available in Canada only The Etiquette C3050 portable handset is available in the USA only You can assign the C3050 Portable Handset a separate telephone number or the same telephone number as a desktop telephone The C3050 supports basic features such as call forward call transfer conferencing and visual message waiting indication e Remote power interconnect RPI
57. NetVision and the NetVision Data portable handsets The system can be set to automatically assign DNs to the Nortel IP telephones If you choose to manually assign DNs choose DNs from the following digital range if possible Ensure that the DN type in each DN record is set to IP telephony BI line DNs can default to unused DNs from 221 to 376 B2line DNs can default to unused DNs from 377 to 472 NetVision DNs are assigned to the handsets through the H 323 section under IP Telephony on the Unified Manager Use the DNs within the ranges described above If no DN is specified in the record the system will automatically assign one when the handset connects to the system For details about configuring DN records for the IP telephones and the NetVision telephones refer to the IP Telephony Configuration Guide Install Radio Based Portable Systems There are three radio based systems available for the Business Communications Manager system Availability depends on the geographical location of the system and is determined by the region you select for the system during system configuration Note The Symbol NetVision telephones are wireless telephones but to the Business Communications Manager they appear as IP telephones Companion portable system In North America you can provide cordless access throughout your site using the Companion cordless system This system allows you to provide portable units that are twinned with station
58. Offset 0 four lines single density Offset 2 8 lines double density Offset 3 1 DS30 bus 16 lines 32 time slots single density 32 lines 32 time slots double density Installation and Maintenance Guide 320 Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings Determining module channel requirements Figure 196 shows how much of a DS30 channel each module requires Note the differences between modules set to single density and modules set to double density Figure 195 Space requirements for media bay modules on a per DS30 configuration Trunks lines 1 DS30 bus offset set to 0 1 DTM per DS30 Lu 1 DS30 bus offset set to 0 1 or 2 3BRIs per DS30 E 1 DS30 bus offset set to 0 1 2 or 3 4 CTMs per DS30 1 DS30 bus Offset set to 0 1 or2 L CTM8s 4 max of 2 offsets 4 per DS30 1 DS30 bus offset set to 0 offset set to 0 B per DS30 2 DS30 buses Stations extensions Single density modules 1 DSM 16 1 DSM 32 per 2 DS30s Double density modules 1 DS30 bus 4 DD ASM8s per DS30 1 DS30 bus 2 DD DSM 16 4 per DS30 1 DS30 bus 1 DD DSM 32 per DS30 Note If you choose a CTM8 DDIM or a 4X16 module there are some restrictions about the offsets you can choose Refer to the DIP switch settings in CTM switch settings on page 334 and 4X16 switch settings on page 336 for d
59. P1 power cable length 2 2055 197 Remove the BCM400 power supply chassis screws 200 Remove the power supply and support bracket 200 Fasten the power supply support bracket cables 201 Fasten the power supply support bracket to the platform base chassis 202 Fasten the standard power supply to the platform base chassis 202 Redundant power supply upgrade overview 0 204 Remove the PSU status connector jumper 0005 205 Remove the BCM400 power supply adapter tab from the support bracket 00 000 eee eee eee 206 Remove the power supply knockout bracket 0 206 Fasten the power supply support bracket cables 207 Attach the redundant power supply cage 22055 208 Install a new cable clamp 0 cece 208 Install a cable grommet 00 000 eee eee eee eee 209 Remove the BCM400 redundant power supply chassis screws 211 Remove the redundant power supply cage and support bracket 212 Install the power supply modules into the power supply cage 213 BCM400 platform redundant power supply rear view 213 Remove the power supply module from the power supply cage 215 Base function tray interior components 2200005 218 Card replacement overview 00 0c eee eee 219 Remove the WAN card and PCI cover plate
60. PDD Available only on systems set to FDD with a 2 6 DS30 split Modules cannot be set to double density on systems set to PDD Refer to the previous chart for the switch settings for single density and PDD To assign these DNs to DSM 32 connectors A top B bottom 377 392 221 236 393 408 237 252 409 424 253 268 425 440 269 284 441 456 285 300 457 472077 301 316 7 P0993133 03 Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings 341 DSM16 DSM 32 single density switch settings new 3 0 system The following table shows the switch settings for DSM modules deployed as single density on a new 3 0 system Note DSM modules deployed prior to 3 0 are all single density and cannot be set to double density but they can still be used on new 3 0 systems The DSM 16 and DSM32 modules can be set to either density Note that Companion sets can only be assigned on DS30 6 and 7 and the handsets have a different set of default DNs than the digital sets Also Companion can only be deployed on systems that remain at Part Double Density PDD the default condition of 3 0 systems Table 64 DSM 16 DSM 16 and DSM 32 DSM32 single density switch settings for new 3 0 systems different Start DN enter the range in the blank column DN type to NA Portable Enter these switch To To assign these ee settings EUN DNs to DSM 32 or
61. Picks up ch 5 4 i Picks up ch 6 5 i Picks up ch 7 6 3 zo Not supported Not supported Module set to offset 0 Module set to offset 1 n Module set to offset 2 Module set to offset 3 Each shaded square represents the amount of the DS30 channel and the offset which the module requires If your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 channel split DS30 channel 7 is not available to media bay modules and DS30 channel 6 is not supported for the 4X16 and DDIM modules cs P0993133 03 Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings 329 Table 53 shows possible DS30 and offset configurations for each type of station module and the corresponding switch settings Note that offset 1 indicates the density mode for DSM 16 and DSM 32 modules SDD single density offset 1 on FDD Full Double Density offset 1 off Table 53 Possible station media bay module DIP switch settings Media bay module positioning DIP switch settings DIP switch settings DS30 station modules Single density Double density bus DSM 16 DSM 32 ASM 8 DSM 16 and DSM 32 Offsets 0 1 Offsets 0 1 Offsets 0 only SDD SDD FDD 15 23 123 4 5 6 123 4 5 6 FDD offset DS30 offset DS30 Ex 2 I i i g i T B Module set to offset 0 SDD and it supports Companion Module set to offset 1 E Module set to offset 2 E Module set t
62. Remove the BCM400 power supply chassis screws Unfasten cable clamp located on underside of chassis cover Unfasten power supply chassis mounting screws Unfasten exterior P power suppy support Le bracket mounting screws 11 Unfasten the exterior and interior power supply support bracket mounting screws see Figure 127 Place the screws in a safe location 12 Remove the power supply and support bracket out and away from the BCM400 platform base chassis Figure 127 Remove the power supply and support bracket supply amp support bracket from platform base chassis Cut the cable tie wrap away from the power supply support bracket Remove power supply am Remove exterior amp interior power suppy support 4 bracket mounting screws power supply not shown Remove power supply support bracket 13 Remove the tie wrap from the power supply support bracket Place the power supply in a safe static free location 14 This procedure is complete P0993133 03 Chapter 9 Replace or Upgrade a Power Supply 201 Install a BCM400 standard power supply Use this procedure to install a functional standard power supply in a BCM400 platform base chassis The base function and advanced function trays must be partially removed Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a ground wrist strap before you han
63. Service startup Auto Motherboard TBD PCI Cards MSC Empty Modem LAN LAN HSCUersion R Make a selection 1 2 3 5 5 6 7 8 X l Note If the Initialization Menu screen appears instead of the Main Menu shown above your Business Communications Manager system is not initialized correctly Installation and Maintenance Guide 140 Chapter 5 Business Communications Manager System Startup 9 If you want to change the IP addressing enter 2 System Configuration and follow the prompts 10 If you want to configure the system through the serial port enter 3 Configuration Wizard This wizard also allows you to change the IP addressing information This Wizard has the same information as the Quick Start Wizard that you access through the Unified Manager but in a slightly different format Refer to the Business Communications Manager 3 0 Programming Operations Guide for a detailed description of the fields that occur in the Configuration Wizard Note When you change IP address Region Template and or Start DN the system AN prompts you for a restart after you accept the changes After the system restarts you can continue with your system configuration Warning Changing this information on an existing system completely erases the telephony programming and disables the telephony system
64. Services Card MSC is a PCI card which performs call processing and media processing of the voice channels The Business Communications Manager 3 0 MSC contains two PEC IIIs that provide additional voice channel processing for the MSC Refer to Media services card MSC on page 57 Media bay modules The MBMs connect with external devices to implement various types of voice trunks and stations Install the MBMs in the media bay module bays in the BCM200 BCM400 base platforms and the expansion unit For further information on the media bay modules refer to Appendix Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings Telephones and adapters Business telephones and adapters connect to the media bay modules installed in the Business Communications Manager system Business Communications Manager supports Norstar and Business Series Terminal sets as well as IP based Nortel sets Refer to Telephones and adapters on page 85 for a description of the telephones that can be used with the system The Nortel Networks 12002 12004 IP telephones and Nortel Networks 12050 Software Phone have separate installation and operations documentation Refer to the main index on your system CD Installation and Maintenance Guide 70 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware The system also supports four types of cordless telephone systems Companion DECT T7406 Business Series Terminal and the Symbol NetVision and NetVis
65. TCM Tip A Lead o CEN The TCM input is not polarity sensitive P0993133 03 Chapter 13 Install Analog Terminal Adapters 281 Use this procedure to connect the cable 1 Connect one end of a line cord to the ATA2 Terminal jack Refer to Figure 181 Figure 181 ATA 2 top view Line jack Terminal jack Power supply connector receptacle a Ff o N Connect the other end to your telephone modem or FAX Connect one end of a line cord to the ATA2 Line jack Connect the other end to an available station port on the Business Communications Manager For a 120 V or 230 V system plug the DIN connector of the power supply cord into the power supply connector receptacle Plug the adapter into a standard ac outlet Caution In North America the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 must be powered from a Class 2 power source that is UL and CSA approved In Europe the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 must be powered from a Class II power source that is CE marked 6 This procedure is complete Mount the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 Use this procedure to mount the unit on a wall after the ATA 2 is correctly connected 1 When using 0 5 mm wire 24 AWG select a location within 800 m 2 600 ft of the Business Communications Manager system Allow 12 5 cm 5 in clearance for the line jack terminal jack and
66. Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static discharge Always wear a ground wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container or work area 1 If you still have access to the Unified Manager shut down the system using the Shutdown command For details refer to Shut down the system software on page 145 Otherwise skip to step 2 2 Setup the server for maintenance as described in Shut down the system hardware on page 146 Disconnect the Business Communications Manager from the AC power outlet Remove the platform base chassis top cover see Remove the platform base chassis top cover on page 161 Return to this step when complete Installation and Maintenance Guide 158 Chapter 6 Prepare Hardware for Maintenance or Upgrades 5 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 6 Remove the advanced function tray latch screws see Figure 86 Place the screws in a safe location Move the advanced function tray latches to the unlock position Grasp the advanced function tray latches and partially remove the unit from the platform base chassis Do not exert force on the hard disk power cables and connectors 9 Disconnect hard disk power cable connectors 10 Disconnect the IDE connector 11 Remove the advanced function tray completely from the platform base chassis 12 Place the advanced funct
67. a maximum of four ISDN BRI S T interfaces Note The DECT module contains the equivalent of a BRI module and does not require a separate module for trunk line functions Digital trunk media bay module The Digital Trunk media bay module DTM connects to standard digital PSTN T1 fT1 E1 fE1 or PRIISDN line using either a digital or PRI line The DTM also supports DASS2 DPN22 Q SIG and MCDN over ISDN e On North American Business Communications Manager systems the DTM connects to a T1 or PRI line With a T1 line you can add a maximum of 24 digital telephone lines With a PRI line you can add a maximum of 23 digital telephone lines e On International Business Communications Manager systems the DTM connects to an ETSI or PRI digital line With an ETSI or PRI line you can add a maximum of 30 digital telephone lines The front bezel of the DTM has a RJ48C connector that connects the DTM to the service provider connection point The faceplate also has a set of loopback connectors you can use to run loopback tests For details on loopback tests refer to the Business Communications Manager 3 0 Programming Operations Guide Figure 40 shows the DTM module interfaces Figure 40 Digital Trunk Interface Module DTM faceplate Power LED Status LED In Service LED Loopback Test LED Continuity Loopback Receive LEDs Transmit LED Loopback RJ48C digital telephone line connect f Front view DTM a c e CN
68. access panel 9 2 Remove the rivet collar from the fan access panel VL Rivet pin Rivet collar 8 Lift the fan away from the fan access panel and place it in a safe location 9 Repeat Steps 7 and 8 to remove the redundant fan on the BCM400 RFO configuration 10 This procedure is complete Install a BCM400 cooling fan Use this procedure to install a single or redundant cooling fan in a BCM400 platform base chassis Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static discharge Always wear a ground wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container 1 Place the new fan in the fan access panel in the position from which you removed the old fan Ensure the I O card connector cable is oriented to the bottom of the fan and that the fan label is closest to the grill on the panel Note Ensure the label of the new fan faces the back wall of the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis Airflow is out of the chassis as indicated by the arrows imprinted on the fan Note Redundant feature option dual fans If you are installing a second fan you must use the new fan access panel included with the redundant feature option Kit on the back of the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis The redundant fan access panel has two fan exhausts 2 Attach the fan to the fan access panel
69. allows users to decide which path an outgoing call takes if all the lines used in a selected route are in use packet A packet is a unit of data that is routed between an origin and a destination Each packet is separately numbered and includes the Internet address of the destination Packet and datagram are similar in meaning A protocol similar to TCP the User Datagram Protocol UDP uses the term datagram page A feature you can use to make announcements over the Business Communications Manager system using the telephone speakers and or external speakers Page Time out A setting that controls how long a Page Announcement can last Assign the Page Time out under Feature settings in System programming Page zone An area in the office that receives internal page announcements that other areas of the office do not hear Assign telephones to page zones under Capabilities in System DNs programming Parallel port A port that transfers data through multiple wires Parallel ports normally use a 25 pin interface that transmits and receives data using a separate data line for every bit Peripheral Component Interconnect PCI Slot Socket on the Business Communications Manager main printed circuit board that connects to the Business Communications Manager cards P0993133 03 Glossary 369 Personal Speed Dial Two digit codes 71 94 that can be programmed on the set to dial external telephone numbers You can access Pers
70. bay modules 00 e eee eee 74 Table 10 DIMLED functions sssssessll II ee 76 Table 11 Station module regional availability lllllslssn 78 Table 12 Specialized modules lllelllslel eA 81 Table 13 DSM wiring chart 0 000 cece 122 Table 14 ASM wiringchart llsslseesse eh 123 Table 15 Extension comparison chart lille 125 Table 16 Business Communications Manager LED states 129 Table 17 Module power and status LED states 20 131 Table 18 DB25 adaptercable 0 0c cee ee 133 Table 19 RS 422 EIA 530 adapter cable 00 000 e eee 134 Table 20 V 35 Adapter Cable 0 00 cece 135 Table 21 DB15 X 21 adapter cable cradi Diad tiaa e e ee 135 Table 22 Serial port pinout se cose eed eee ene eee daa eee 138 Table 23 Fan and temperature LEDs on the base function tray 180 Table 24 Powersupply LED lt crsa psano 0 0 00 198 Table 25 Cross referencing ports and DNs 0 00 e eee eee eee 244 Table 26 RPI Requirements os ara ORAA EEEE CETRA EERE TREE E 252 Table 27 Cabledistances 0 000 cect eee 255 Table 28 Input Wiring 2 eee 257 Table29 RPI 8 BIX wiring chart 0 0 0 e ee eee 258 Table 30 RPI H6BIX wiring chart 00 ee 259 Table 31 Minimum distance between office areas and base stations 262 Table 32 Clearance for the base sta
71. bw PS BCM 200 hard disk cage rear view Hard disk cage lift tab Figure 33 BCM400 standard hard disk and cage BCM400 hard disk cage front view Hard disk cage Hard disk BCM400 hard disk cage rear view Hard disk cage lift tab RAID upgrade kit The BCM200 BCM400 standard configurations can be equipped with a RAID redundant array of independant disks upgrade kit The BCM200 and BCM400 RAID upgrade kits come with and additional hard disk and RAID controller card Your current disk is used as the primary the other Installation and Maintenance Guide 68 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware disk in the kit is the mirror disk The information is written to both disks simultaneously The dual hard disk configuration provides RAID 1 fault tolerance capability The RAID card has three ribbon cable connectors The hard disk connectors are mounted on the right and left sides of the RAID controller card The third ribbon cable connection mounted at the rear of the card connects to the primary IDE connector on the I O card Figure 34 illustrates the RAID components For installation methods refer to Chapter 7 Hard Disk Replacement Procedures Figure 34 BCM200 400 2xHDD RAID controller Front view we a ar CEN um Primary z EU amp Harddisk ____s RAID cage i A oe Mirror Hard SE disk RAID Primary hard disk controlle
72. check that the ASM 8 is receiving power Check that the emergency telephone has dial tone Check the external line and emergency telephone connections To avoid damage to the emergency telephone connect the telephone directly to the external line and check for dial tone Replace the MSC This procedure is complete If the emergency telephone is connected to the CTM use the following procedure A Q N Check that the system has a CTM installed Check that there is no dial tone at the emergency telephone Replace the CTM This procedure is complete ATA 2 Does Not Function If the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 does not function Follow these steps to troubleshoot the problem o0 5 WO ND Make sure there is ac power connected to the ATA 2 unit Make sure that ATA 2 is in the Tones OFF mode For Data Applications only Correctly configure the ATA 2 telephone port for data communication Allow sufficient start up time Assign the prime line Assign a ringing line if required for example auto answer modems FAX This procedure is complete P0993133 03 Chapter 15 Troubleshooting 297 Check the ATA 2 wiring Check the following connections 1 ATA 2 to the terminal The resistance must be 200 ohms or less for data applications and 1 300 ohms or less for voice applications Business Communications Manager system to ATA 2 The wiring must be equivalent to 800 m of 0 5 mm wire 2 600 ft o
73. connect telephones and analog telecommunication devices to the Business Communications Manager system Table 11 provides a list of the station modules available by region Table 11 Station module regional availability DSM 16 Connects a maximum of 16 digital Digital station media bay module telephones DSM Connects a maximum of 32 digital DSM 32 telephones to the Business Digital station media bay module Communications Manager system DSM 4X16 Connects a maximum of four CLID lines Only available for North American Combination 4 line CTM and for a maximum of 16 digital telephones systems This module can be DSM16 4x16 Media Bay Module combined with CTMs on the same AX16 Media Bay Module pode ASM8 Connects a maximum of eight analog Only available for North American Analog station media bay devices to the Business Communications systems module Manager system Digital station media bay module DSM Three types of media bay modules support digital telephones on the Business Communications Manager This section describes the two DSM modules Refer to Figure 43 on page 79 Digital Station media bay module DSM 16 supports 16 digital telephones Set the full double density FDD switch to enable the module to carry 16 extensions over a half DS30 channel If required install a second DSM 16 and set the FDD switch to occupy the second half of the DS30 channel setting the FDD switch t
74. down 1 Ensure that the switches on the media bay module are set correctly For information about how to set the switches refer to Set Media Bay Module Dip Switches on page 322 In the case of FEM modules the switches activate the front ports Ensure that the switches accurately reflect the ports you require Refer to FEM switch settings on page 344 Select an open media bay With the face of the media bay module facing toward you insert the media bay module into the open bay Push the media bay module completely into the unit You will hear a click when the module is firmly seated in the media bay Repeat steps 2 to 4 for each media bay module you want to install Install a media bay module in the expansion unit Use this procedure to install a media bay module in the Business Communications Manager expansion unit chassis Install the media bay modules when the system is powered down 1 Ensure that the switches on the media bay module are set correctly For information about how to set the switches refer to Set Media Bay Module Dip Switches on page 322 In the case of FEM modules the switches activate the front ports Ensure that the switches accurately reflect the ports you require Refer to FEM switch settings on page 344 Select an open media bay With the face of the media bay module facing toward you insert the media bay module into the open bay Ensure that any cables at the rear of the module are clea
75. e maximum cable length 0 5 mm or 24 AWG of 1220 m 4000 ft P0993133 03 Chapter 2 Auxilliary Requirements and Installation Process Overview 97 System Equipment and Supplies Use the checklists in this section to ensure you have all the required equipment Basic hardware The Business Communications Manager system consists of some combination of the following hardware Business Communications Manager system Business Communications Manager expansion unit media bay modules telephones cabling for connections between hardware units You can place a maximum of two media bay modules in the BCM200 and four media bay modules in the BCM400 platform base chassis Install and use an expansion unit only with a BCM400 system if you require more than four media bay modules Optional equipment The following equipment can be added to the system to support specific requirements beyond the BCM platform base hardware Station auxiliary power supply SAPS Central answering position CAP or CAPN module to as many as five M7324 telephones in the system Business Communications Manager Analog Terminal Adapter 2 ATA 2 if connecting analog equipment to a digital media bay station module Uninterruptable power supply UPS as a standalone device Analog emergency telephone WAN card field replaceable unit FRU if the Business Communications Manager base system requires connection to a WAN There are two WAN card types available The Nor
76. end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface Remove the platform base chassis top cover see Remove the platform base chassis top cover on page 161 Remove the advanced function tray latch screws Place the screws in a safe location If the screws are already removed skip to the next step Move the advanced function tray latches to the unlocked position Position the advanced function tray in the correct platform base chassis slot Partially insert the advanced function tray into the platform base chassis see Figure 87 Connect the hard disk power cable connectors Use the first connector Tuck any excess cable under the hard disk Connect the IDE connector Push the advanced function tray completely into the chassis Be careful not to crimp the cables see Figure 87 Move the advanced function tray latches to the locked position Install the advanced function tray latch screws Install the platform base chassis top cover Refer to Install the Platform Base Chassis Top Cover on page 163 Restore the Business Communications Manager to operation See Restart the System after Maintenance on page 147 Observe the system status display LEDs to ensure the advanced function tray initializes correctly Installation and Maintenance Guide 160 Chapter 6 Prepare Hardware for Maintenance or Upgrades Figure 87 Install the advanced function tray a p od l Connect IDE c
77. hardware components The front of the chassis has three assemblies that house one base function tray and two media bay modules MBMs The rear of the chassis provides mount points for the fan and power supply The rear of the chassis also has a removeable panel to provide access to the hard disk The top cover has a removable section to allow access to the cables connectors power supply hard disk and cooling fan Rack mount brackets allow you to install the chassis in a server rack An optional wall mount bracket is avialable separately Rubber feet attach under the platform base chassis if you want to place the Business Communications Manager unit on a flat surface For further information on chassis bracket installation refer to Chapter 3 Install the Business Communications Manager amp Expansion Unit Platform Base Chassis P0993133 03 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware 45 The chassis interior contains the following hardware components e 1x Programed hard drive or field redundancy upgrade provides an additional hard disk and RAID controller card see Hard Disk on page 67 1x Auto sensing power supply standard see Platform Power Supply on page 65 e 1x System cooling fan see Cooling Fan on page 68 Figure 4 shows the location of the hardware components in the BCM200 platform base chassis Nortel Networks recommends that you know the location of the diffe
78. indicate the system functions correctly 6 This procedure is complete Remove a power supply module Use this procedure for any of the following conditions Remove a single failed power supply module A power supply module indicates a failure when the green LED located on the module is not lit Remove power supply modules before you install a new power supply cage in the BCM400 platform base chassis see Upgrade to a redundant power supply on page 203 Note It is not necessary to remove power from the BCM400 platform base or expansion unit to replace a single power supply module i Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a ground wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container Hazardous voltage levels are maintained for several seconds on removable modules Do not completely remove the module from the power supply cage for several seconds after disengaging the module from the power supply cage i Warning Risk of shock Unfasten the power supply module locking nut When the nut is fully unfastened the nut should move freely in the screw cage Swing the power supply module handle to a 90 degree angle to the power supply module Grasp the power supply module handle With your thumb compress the locking tab toward the handle Pull the power supply module out of the power supply cage see notes i
79. lines EMEA DTM 30 DTM Analog lines CTM 4 CTM North American systems only Analog lines CTM8 8 CTM North American systems only Analog lines 4X16 combination module 4 also requires a full CTM North American system only DS30 channel for the DNs BRI ISDN lines BRIM S T 4 ISDN loops BRIM S T P0993133 03 Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings 315 A Universal T1 MUX is a type of T1 digital line that contains a combination of digital telephone lines and data lines An example e If you require 24 T1 digital lines you need one DTM because a single DTM can handle 24 T1 lines North America e If you require two analog lines and 24 T1 digital lines you need one CTM and one DTM Note Although the DTM supports several types of digital lines you cannot connect different types of lines to the same DTM You can add a maximum of three DTMs or DDIMs to your Business Communications Manager system Tip The BCM400 platform base chassis holds a maximum of four media bay modules If you require more modules the Business Communications expansion unit supports a maximum of six additional modules 3 This procedure is complete Station media bay module selection The number and type of telephones and related equipment you have determines which station media bay modules you require Note If you are adding any extensions in the near future include them in your calculations 1 In Tab
80. loop start trunks Use this type of trunk when the local service provider does not support disconnect supervision for the digital loop start trunks By configuring lines as ground start the system can identify when a caller hangs up the telephone at the far end Ground start trunks are available only on a Digital Trunk Interface DTI Handsfree A feature used to make calls without using the telephone receiver Activate Full Handsfree under Capabilities in System DNs programming When activated the Business Communications Manager assigns a Handsfree Mute button to the telephone P0993133 03 Glossary 365 Handsfree HF Answerback This feature automatically turns on the microphone at a telephone that receives a Voice Call so that the person receiving the call can respond without lifting the receiver Activate Handsfree Answerback under Capabilities in System DNs programming Held Line Reminder A telephone rings and displays the message On hold LINENAM when you place an external call on hold for programmed period of time host name The name that identifies a computer on a network that provides services to other computers in the domain such as databases or other Business Communications Manager systems Hotline This feature automatically calls a pre assigned number when the user lifts the telephone receiver or presses the Handsfree Mute button Assign Hotline under Capabilities in System DNs programming Hypertex
81. modules in the DS30 hierarchy and determining and setting the DIP switch settings on the module Rules for Assigning DS30 Resources Media bay modules are assigned to DS30 buses in a specific hierarchical manner This section describes the preferred order of positioning for each type of module Notes about assigning modules The following are some general notes about assigning modules e The DIP switches on the DDIM module are used to set the DS30 designation for the DTM part of the module The module automatically assigns an additional DS30 for the data module part of the DDIM You cannot choose DS30 7 for the DDIM module because the data module would not be accessible The same applies to DS30 6 if your system is set to a 3 5 split Refer to DDIM switch settings on page DDIM switch settings on page 333 e If you chose a 3 5 channel split for your system DS30 7 cannot be used by any module For modules that require two buses this means that you cannot set the DIP switches to DS30 6 for those modules because the second level of lines would fall into DS30 7 which would not be accessible Refer to Figure 197 on page 325 Refer to Understanding DS30 numbers on page 84 for more information about 2 6 and 3 5 DS30 channel splits P0993133 03 Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings 323 e DSM 32 modules require two DS30 numbers When you assign the first DS30 number to a DSM 32 the module automatically adds the next DS30 num
82. next step of this procedure Disconnect the Business Communications Manager from the wall power outlet Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 6 Partially remove the base function tray from the platform base chassis Ensure you do not pinch stretch or damage any cables 7 Grasp the top edge of the PEC you want to remove and it pull out Place the PEC in a safe and static free container Refer to Figure 154 Installation and Maintenance Guide 232 Chapter 10 Replace Data Cards and Processing Hardware Figure 154 Remove the processor expansion card PEC III os Coe d Processor expansion card ff f f If ff ffl i Y M 8 This procedure is complete P0993133 03 Chapter 10 Replace Data Cards and Processing Hardware 233 Install a processor expansion card PEC When you replace or add PECs ensure you follow the directions for shutting down the system Ensure you have a current data backup of your system This procedure assumes the base function tray is partially removed from the platform base chassis A Warning Possible data loss Ensure that you do not touch the PEC casing to any of the components on the MSC This may cause shorting which can erase memory or cause a loss of telephony programming If this occurs complete
83. on on off on on 285 292 0 on on on off on on 349 356 6 1 on on off off on on 293 300 1 on on off off on on 357 364 2 lon off on off on on 441 448 2 on off on off on on 365 372 lon off off off on on 449 456 S on off off off on on 373 380 7 0 on on on off on off 301 308 0 on on on off on off 381 388 1 on on off off on off 309 316 1 on on off off on off 389 396 2 lon off on off on off 457 454 on off on off on off 397 404 3 lon off off off on off 455 472 3 on off off off on off 405 412 The extensions listed are based on a three digit DN with a Start DN of 221 If your system has longer DNsora different Start DN enter the range in the blank column f your system is configured with a 3 5 channel split DS30 7 is not available Available only on systems set to FDD Available only on systems set to FDD with a 2 6 DS30 split Installation and Maintenance Guide 338 Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings DSM switch settings There are two types of DSMs e DSM 16s have one connector which connects to 16 lines telephones These modules require a full DS30 number each single density or half a bus double density e DSM32s have two connectors each of which connects to 16 lines telephones These modules require two full consecutive DS30 numbers single density or one full bus double density This section includes
84. pair to power a base station connect the power pair to PWR 1 and PWR 1 If you use two pairs to power a base station connect one pair to PWR 1 and PWR 1 and the second pair to PWR 2 and PWR 2 Caution Ensure both pairs have the same polarity If you connect two power pairs with opposite polarities you can damage the base station and RPI Figure 166 Output connector pinout OBIXn RPI input connections Feed the TCM input pairs from the Business Communications Manager distribution frame through the top of the RPI and route them to the input connectors IBIX1 to IBIX4 Figure 167 shows how to route the input pairs The maximum number of input pairs in an RPI installation is 16 Table 28 lists the pinout and signal references P0993133 03 Chapter 12 Install Companion or DECT Systems 257 Figure 167 Input connector pinout Pin 7 Pin 5 Pin 3 Pin 1 v v v v A A A A 8 Pin 6 Pin 4 Pin 2 IBIXn Pin Table 28 Input wiring IBIX1 OBIX1 EE EH OBIX5 OBIX7 IBIX3 OBIX9 a ERE OBIX13 OBIX15 Installation and Maintenance Guide 258 Chapter 12 Install Companion or DECT Systems RPI 8 BIX wiring chart Table 29 lists the wiring chart for the RPI 8 BIX Table 29 RPI 8 BIX wiring chart White Blue Blue White White Green Green White White Slate Slate White Red Orange Orange Red Red Brown
85. power cord telephone cables and network cables before opening the computer Read and follow installation instructions carefully Caution Use only a Nortel Networks approved replacement Contact your account representative for the current list of approved replacement parts P0993133 03 Chapter 10 Replace Data Cards and Processing Hardware 231 Remove the processor expansion card PEC Use this procedure to remove PECs from a Business Communications Manager MSC i Warning Possible data loss Ensure that you do not touch the PEC casing to any of the components on the MSC This may cause shorting which can erase memory or cause a loss of telephony programming If this occurs complete the removal of the PEC and then restore the data from your backup medium upon re installation see Install a processor expansion card PEC on page 233 Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static N discharge Always wear a ground wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container 1 Ensure you have a current data backup of your system 2 Shut down the system using the Shutdown command For details refer to Shut down the system software on page 145 When complete continue to the next step of this procedure 3 Setup the server for maintenance as described in Shut down the system hardware on page 146 When complete continue to the
86. power supply connector Screw two 4 mm 8 screws into the wall 130 mm 5 1 4 in away from each other Leave 6 mm 1 4 in of the two screws showing Align the slots at the back of the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 unit over the screws Push the unit against the wall The line jack terminal jack and power supply connector must be at the top of the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 Refer to Figure 182 on page 282 Installation and Maintenance Guide 282 Chapter 13 Install Analog Terminal Adapters Figure 182 ATA 2 back view A o Q Mounting keyhole slots 5 This procedure is complete Determine the ATA 2 extension number Use this procedure to determine the extension number for every Business Communications Manager ATA 2 Perform this procedure before performing administration 1 Connect a single line telephone to the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 2 Lift the handset 3 If you do not hear dial tone press to access an intercom line y p Note appears as 4 on some telephones If you are using a telephone without a or button refer to the ATA 2 User Guide for details Some phones have a Flash button which is the equivalent to or 4 Dial the extension number of an Business Communications Manager telephone with a display If you hear a busy signal repeat steps 3 and 4 using a different extension
87. relocation the internal numbers autodial settings and personal speed dial codes remain with the telephone when you disconnect the telephone If you connect a different telephone to the jack before you reconnect the moved telephone the new telephone takes the programmed settings The Business Communications Manager system can no longer identify the old telephone After you plug a moved set into a new jack the Business Communications Manager system can take 45 seconds to identify the telephone Programming relocation takes three minutes to complete Wait for this to occur before you change any settings for the telephone in the system Warning If you disconnect a relocated telephone before the relocation programming is N complete the telephone can lose the programmed settings Note Automatic telephone relocation is disabled by default For IP telephones to retain DN specific features the Keep DN Alive setting for the telephone programming must be set to Yes P0993133 03 249 Chapter 12 Install Companion or DECT Systems This chapter describes the two radio based systems that can be added to the Business Communications Manager system to provide mobile communications Both systems require radio equipped base stations connected to specific types of media bay modules installed in the Business Communications Manager e The Companion requires a DSM module for the base stations to plug into Refer to The
88. screws that fasten the fan casing to the expansion unit back wall and remove them Refer to Figure 115 Remove the four screws or snap rivets that hold the fan to the expansion unit Lift the failed fan out of the expansion unit P0993133 03 Chapter 8 Install or Replace a Cooling Fan 189 Figure 115 Fan screws location in expansion unit 2 0 models Fan connector on hub board Figure 116 Fan screws location in expansion unit 2 5 redundancy models Fan connectors VA on hub board Load resistor module Screws attached to fan Installation and Maintenance Guide 190 Chapter 8 Install or Replace a Cooling Fan Install an expansion unit fan Use this procedure to install the fan in the Business Communications Manager expansion unit Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static N discharge Always wear a ground wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container Note Ensure the label of the new fan faces the back wall of the Business Communications Manager expansion unit chassis Airflow is out of the chassis as indicated by the arrows imprinted on the fan Place the fan in the expansion unit so that the label faces the back wall of the unit Align the screw holes in the fan with the screw holes in the expansion unit and attach the fan Connect the fan power supply cable to the hub board
89. settings for 4X16 on off off on off on Installation and Maintenance Guide 346 Media Bay Module Combinations Fully loaded Setup This section describes a system containing one DSM 32 32 one DSM 16 16 two ASM 8s and two DTMs This configuration uses all the DS30 channels with the exception of two offsets Table 69 demonstrates this combination including the switch settings for each module Table 69 DSM combined with 2 DTMs and 2 ASMs Each heavily outlined and shaded square represents one module Switch setting DS30 1 1 2 channel DSM 32 32 DSM 16 16 ASM 8s DTMs Offset 0 Offset 0 Offset 0 and 1 Offset 0 12 3 4 5 6 DSM 32 settings on on on on on on DSM 16 settings on on on on off on ASMB settings on on on on off off ASM8 settings on on off on off off P0993133 03 Media Bay Module Combinations 347 Table 70 demonstrates either a full double density system or a partial double density system because DS30 06 and 07 have trunk modules installed Double density only affects system modules Table 70 All station modules set for double density Each heavily outlined and shaded square represents one module Switch setting DS30 1 1 2 2 channel DSM 32 DSM 16 ASM 8s DTMs Offset 0 Offset 0 Offset 0 and 1 Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 DSM 32 settings
90. single O Card fan fan 1 ll Main Card 4 Mount the fan access panel to the platform base chassis see Figure 111 a Tip the top of the fan access panel toward you b Insert the bottom lip of the fan access panel in the platform base chassis C Align the screw holes in the fan access panel with the screw holes on the platform base chassis d Install and tighten the fan access panel screws Figure 111 Install the fan access panel to the platform base chassis f Fa Install fan access zd LX a A Install fan access V panel screws P0993133 03 Chapter 8 Install or Replace a Cooling Fan 185 5 Restore the Business Communications Manager system to operation For details refer to Restart the System after Maintenance on page 147 The Business Communications Manager system starts up when you connect the AC power cord The start up process takes several minutes to complete 6 Test the direction of the fan exhaust air flow to determine if the fan is correctly installed a Hold apiece of paper or your hand close to the fan exhaust A correctly installed fan blows air away from the platform base chassis If you are testin
91. supervision An auxiliary port beside Line 1 allows you to use an analog telephony device such as a modem fax or telephone to share the trunk Figure 44 shows a diagram of the 4X16 The 4X16 has one amphenol connector and five RJ11 connectors on the faceplate For details on the 4X16 wiring refer to Chapter 13 Install Analog Terminal Adapters on page 277 Installation and Maintenance Guide 80 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware Figure 44 Faceplate of 4X16 module LEDS connectors and jacks 4X16 Mo 1 O Power Status Analog station media bay module North American systems only The Analog Station media bay module ASM 8 connects to eight analog telecommunication devices These devices can be standard analog telephones cordless telephones FAX machines answering machines or modems The maximum speed for a modem connection is 28 8 kbit s Figure 45 shows a diagram of the ASM 8 The ASM 8 has one amphenol connector on the faceplate For details about wiring the ASM 8 refer to Chapter 13 Install Analog Terminal Adapters on page 277 Figure 45 ASM 8 front view Power Status Amphenol connector P0993133 03 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware 81 Specialized Media Bay Modules This section describes the modules that
92. the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis MBM bay see Figure 63 Figure 64 Place the media bay module in a clean safe and static free area Installation and Maintenance Guide Grasp the edge of the MBM ejector lever and pull outward 114 Chapter 4 Install remove or replace the Media Bay Modules Figure 63 Remove a BCM200 media bay module Figure 64 Remove a BCM400 media bay module Ml E Grasp the edge of the MBM ejector lever and pull outward 5 This procedure is complete P0993133 03 Chapter 4 Install remove or replace the Media Bay Modules 115 Remove a media bay module from the expansion unit Use this procedure to remove a media bay module from the Business Communications Manager expansion unit Remove the media bay modules after the system is powered down Remove any cabling from the media bay module faceplate 2 Pow the system on page 110 Figure 65 er down the Business Communications Manager expansion unit system see Shut down Remove the expansion unit front bezel Grasp the right edge of the MBM ejector lever Pull outward to eject the media bay module Refer to Figure 65 Remove the expansion unit front bezel Business Communications Manager expansion unit o oL LJ o od LI 000 000 go CU Jen
93. the installation of the PEC and then restore the data from your backup medium A Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static discharge Always wear a ground wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container Use this procedure to correctly install a PEC Disconnect the Business Communications Manager from the wall power outlet 2 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 3 Decide which slot you are going to install the PEC into on the MSC If you have more than one card holder BCM400 populate one card holder completely at a time Populate the bottom slot first then insert additional PEC on top Line the card up between the rails of the slot Ensure the card label is face up Carefully slide the PEC into the slot until it is firmly seated Note Do not force the card into its slot If the PEC does not slide in easily check the alignment Installation and Maintenance Guide 234 Chapter 10 Replace Data Cards and Processing Hardware Figure 155 Insert the processor expansion card PEC Ill VUE QE d LE x Ti Processor expansion card Pd A Completely insert the base function tray into the platform base chassis see Install the base function tray on page 151 Continue to the next step of this procedure when complete 7 Restore the unit to operation Refer
94. the module is flush with the casing You hear a click when the power supply module is properly seated b Secure each module with the power supply locking nut located on the right side of the module Refer to Figure 141 Figure 141 Install the power supply modules into the power supply cage Power supply modules slide into the power supply cage es P d i 1 ah 2 Fasten the power supply module locking nut d gt Pd Push the power supply module into the power supply cage a Rear view Power supply mounted in the BCM400 redundant feature option platform base chassis 4 Ifyou are installing the redundant power supply for the first time restore the Business Communications Manager to operation as described in Restart the System after Maintenance on page 147 The Business Communications Manager system starts up when you connect the AC power cord If the system does not start and the Red Power LED is on you may need to press the reset button on the base function tray panel to start the system Installation and Maintenance Guide 214 Chapter 9 Replace or Upgrade a Power Supply If you are replacing a faulty power supply module the Business Communications Manager is already in operation The power supply module powers up when fully and correctly inserted in the redundant power supply cage Verify the LEDs on the power supply module are lit Verify all LEDs on the base function tray
95. the rear of the advanced function J tray chassis i d 7 4 Lift hard disk cage tab 11 Remove the hard disk cage from the BCM400 advanced function tray chassis Place the hard disk cage on a flat clean and static free surface 12 This procedure is complete Remove a hard disk from the hard disk cage Use this procedure to remove the hard disk from the hard disk cage Use this procedure also to remove hard disks from a BCM200 or BCM400 RAID upgrade unit Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static discharge Always wear a ground wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container 1 Remove the hard disk cage from the chassis see Remove a Hard Disk on page 166 Continue to the next step in this procedure when complete 2 Unscrew the hard disk retainer screws from both sides of the hard disk cage Place the retainer screws in a safe location see Figure 95 3 Remove the hard disk from the hard disk cage Place the hard disk on a flat clean and static free surface Installation and Maintenance Guide 170 Chapter 7 Hard Disk Replacement Procedures Figure 95 Remove the hard disk from the hard disk cage Remove the hard disk retainer screws 9 youve Me hard disk 5 from the hard disk cage Figure 96 Remove the primary hard disk from the RAID hard disk cage 4 Disconnect the primary hard c o Remove t
96. these charts e DSM16 DSM 32 single density switch settings upgraded system on page 338 e DSMI6 and DSM 32 double density switch settings upgraded system on page 340 e DSM16 DSM 32 single density switch settings new 3 0 system on page 341 e DSM16 and DSM 32 double density switch settings new 3 0 system on page 342 DSM16 DSM 32 single density switch settings upgraded system The following table shows the switch settings for DSM modules deployed as single density on a system that has been upgraded from 2 5 to 3 0 For single density modules you set the first DS30 number on the DIP switches and the system assigns the next DS30 bus Note in Table 62 how the DSM32 module spans two DS30 bus numbers and that there are only five possible DS30 settings for the DIP switches Note DSM modules deployed with 2 5 systems are all single density and cannot be set to double density The DSM 16 and DSM32 modules can be set to either density Note that Companion sets can only be assigned on DS30 6 and 7 and the handsets have a different set of default DNs than the digital sets Also Companion can only be deployed on systems that remain at Part Double Density PDD the default condition of 3 0 systems P0993133 03 Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings 339 Table 62 DSM 16 DSM 16 and DSM 32 DSM32 single density switch settings for 2 5 systems upgraded to 3 0
97. this interface returned to digital encoded PCM is 22 dBm0 for a 0 25 V rms input signal e The input is limited so that the encoded analog content at the digital interface to the network does not exceed 12 dBm when averaged over any three second interval e The maximum non clipped input level is 1 V rms e The interface is protected against ringing cross Installation and Maintenance Guide 290 Chapter 14 Install Optional Telephony Equipment 1 Connect the miniature jack of the music source output to the music on hold input on the MSC Refer to Figure 187 Figure 187 Music on hold jack Music jack Ring MSC Faceplate Music on hold input Tip Lloooo Sleeve Tip Music signal Ring No connection Sleeve Ground 2 Adjust the volume of the music source to a good level by activating Background Music and adjusting the volume at the music source TIP You can adjust the Background Music volume at every telephone 3 Enable Music for callers on Hold and for Background Music through programming Refer to the Business Communications Manager 3 0 Programming Operations Guide for more details 4 This procedure is complete P0993133 03 291 Chapter 15 Troubleshooting This chapter describes troubleshooting options to determine the cause of malfunctions or failure of the Business Communications Manager hardware To analyze a Business Communications Manager problem you must d
98. to Restart the System after Maintenance on page 147 8 This procedure is complete P0993133 03 Chapter 10 Replace Data Cards and Processing Hardware 235 Replace Memory The Business communication manager is equipped with 256 MB of Random Access Memory RAM The memory resides on a Dual In line Memory Module DIMM on the main card The main card contains space to add a second DIMM or you can upgrade the existing DIMM Figure 156 provides an overview of the process for replacing or adding memory chips Figure 156 Memory replacement overview Do a software shutdown Set up unit for Install a new maintenance DIMM Restore unit to operation Test system Remove the BFT Pull DIMM off motherboard Disconnect the power cord telephone cables and network cables before opening the computer Read and follow installation instructions carefully j Danger Risk of shock Caution Use only a Nortel Networks approved replacement Contact your account representative for the current list of approved replacement parts Remove the dual in line memory module DIMM card Use this procedure to remove a DIMM when the circuit fails or when you want to increase the amount of RAM in the Business Communications Manager Note There must be at least one DIMM installed in the Business Communications Manager in order for the system to function
99. to Figure 170 on page 266 Use 8 12 mm to 50 mm V in to 2 in screws to install the antenna bracket and lightning surge protector bracket to the wall Ensure the antenna is clear of any adjacent obstruction or metal objects If you use more than one external antenna at a cell center separate the antennas at by least 1 m 40 in to avoid radio interference problems When running the coaxial cable inside or outside be careful not to damage the cable Cable damage affects performance The minimum recommended bending radius is 200 mm 8 in The coaxial cable length must not exceed 10 m 33 ft Use RG 58AU coaxial cables to connect the antennas to the base stations You can attach a proprietary extension cable between the lightning surge protector and the antenna or between the lightning surge protector and the base station Make sure you keep the total cable length as short as possible and use only the recommended extension cable when necessary Install a lightning surge protector for each external antenna i Warning FCC requirements In the United States the FCC requires that you connect only approved antennas to Companion base stations Caution Do not install the outdoor antenna or the lightning surge protector during an electrical storm Always turn off the base station power before connecting the coaxial cable of an outdoor antenna Always install the lightning surge protector at the cable entry point into th
100. to accept the DECT profile The module connects to radio base stations which receive and transmit signals to the handsets Refer to Mobility Services by Region on page 303 to determine the profiles that can use the DECT protocol Figure 46 shows a front view of the module The DECT media bay module has eight RJ45 jacks that connect to base stations deployed around the coverage area Each DECT module supports four ISDN lines and allows a maximum of eight simultaneous call paths back to the Business Communications Manager The DECT module LEDs indicate module power status run state and base station power state The figure also shows the location of the DIP switches on the DECT module Refer to DECT switch settings on page 343 for the switch settings required for the module Installation and Maintenance Guide 82 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware Figure 46 DECT faceplate with eight RJ45 connectors f Power Status Each RJ45 jack can connect to one base station Power uir e Status Base station power DIP switches Rear view Fiber expansion media bay module FEM The Fiber Expansion media bay module FEM connects a maximum of six Norstar expansion modules to the Business Communications Manager system These connections provide a quick way to upgrade a Norstar system to a Business Communi
101. 000 eem oD0t 3522532 Redor Green Green Green Blink Redor Redor Green Flash Blink Green Green NORTEL E NETWORKS Business Communications Manager Media services card MSC The Media Services Card MSC a PCI card performs call processing and media processing of the voice channels for the Business Communications Manager system including the VoIP trunks This card also offers connections for auxiliary features including external customer supplied hardware for paging and music on hold Figure 18 shows the MSC components for the BCM200 platform Figure 19 shows the MSC components for the BCM400 platform Installation and Maintenance Guide 58 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware Figure 18 BCM200 Media services card 1x PEC III Chassis 2 slots mounting screws DS30 connectors oes rd PCI connector Bracket P press plate Ae NN Z 9 Auxiliary ringer Page relay Page output Music on hold input Figure 19 BCM400 Media services card Chassis 2xPECII Ea 4 x slots ads DS30 connectors PCI connector Bracket VES NM press plate Z DS256 to expansion unit Auxiliary ringer Page relay Page output Music on hold input Warning External equipment connected to the auxiliary ringer pa
102. 1 Figure 105 Remove the BCM400 fan access panel wee e PRI Remove fan access he 1 _ panel screws Ta Remove fan access _ panel 6 Disconnect the I O card fan cable s see Figure 106 For the BCM400 RFO configuration disconnect both fan cables from the I O card Figure 106 Disconnect the fan cable from the I O card ll F Disconnect from Je redundant fan fan 2 C Disconnect from p I O Card single fan fan 1 en o __ 1 o ns 0 Main Card 7 Remove the snap rivets that hold the fan to the fan access panel The snap rivet has two parts a center pin and a collar Gently separate the plastic rivet pin with your fingernails from the center of the rivet collar Remove the rivet pin and collar from the fan access panel Place the rivet pin and collar in a safe location Installation and Maintenance Guide 182 Chapter 8 Install or Replace a Cooling Fan Figure 107 Remove the snap rivets from the BCM400 fan access panel s Remove the rivet pin from Fan exhaust _ the rivet collar pm fan
103. 130 Base function tray data cards 0 000 cee eee 132 SerialipiNQut scenes oe eee ea Mee toe RR RR 138 Main Ment sid nib S02 uniset dis oop baad dade esl UA peg and 139 Ethernet crossover cable 00 00 nananana eee 141 Prepare for maintenance overview 0 00 naaar uaran 144 Base function tray replacement overview eee eae 149 Remove the base function tray 0 eee ee 151 P0993133 03 Figures 27 Figure 81 Install the base function tray 0 0 0 0 0022 eee 152 Figure 82 Remove the base function tray bezel 0 0 e eee eee 154 Figure 83 Install the base function tray bezel 0 0 eee 155 Figure 84 Advanced function tray 00 cee eee 156 Figure 85 Advanced function tray replacement overview 000 157 Figure 86 Remove the advanced function tray llle 158 Figure 87 Install the advanced function tray 0 0 00 cee eee 160 Figure 88 Remove the BCM200 top cover 0 c eee eee eee 162 Figure 89 Remove the BCM400 top cover 0 0 cece eee 162 Figure 90 Install the BCM200 top cover 0 0 0 0 cece A 163 Figure 91 Install the BCM400 top cover 0 0 eee eee eee eee 164 Figure 92 Hard disk replacement overview 000 eee eee 166 Figure 93 Detach the hard disk cage from the BCM200 platform base chassis iliis 167 Figure 94 Detach the hard disk cage from the BCM400
104. 219 Continue to the next step of this procedure when complete Disconnect the DS30 cables from the MSC Do not crimp stretch or damage cables or connectors Completely remove the base function tray from the platform base chassis See Remove the base function tray on page 150 Continue to the next step of this procedure when complete Remove the media services card see Remove the media services card MSC on page 225 Continue to the next step of this procedure when complete Use your finger to carefully lift the battery out of the socket For the location of the battery socket refer to Figure 159 Caution Do not use any type of tool to remove the battery Installation and Maintenance Guide 240 Chapter 10 Replace Data Cards and Processing Hardware Figure 159 Removing the clock calendar battery The battery is located B function tray fron eee vUneion AY Aroni under the edge of the power supply CMOS gt gt battery oe EEDU OELE Poo O oa 13 This procedure is complete Install a new clock calendar battery Use this procedure to insert a clock calendar battery into the base function tray Warning There is a danger of explosion if you do not replace the battery correctly N You must replace the battery with a CR2032 3v Maxell coin cell battery The positive side of the battery must face up The battery must sit securely in the battery socket
105. 235 238 0 on on on on on off 181 184 3 1 on on off on on off 189 192 DS30 4 2 on off on on on off 197 200 253 268 3 on off on on off 205 208 0 on on on on off on 151 154 4 1 on on off on off on 159 162 DS30 5 2 on off on on off on 167 170 269 284 3 on off off on off on 175 178 0 on on on on off off 121 124 1 on on off on off off 129 132 DS30 6 i 2 on off on on off off 137 140 285 300 3 on off off on off off 145 148 0 on on on off on on 91 94 6 1 on on off off on on 99 102 DS30 7 2 on off on off on on 107 110 301 316 3 on off off off on on 115 118 on on on off on off on on off off on off a on off on off on off nptetpponed on off off off on off The extensions listed are based on a three digit DN with a Start DN of 221 If your system has longer DNs or a different Start DN enter the range in the blank column If your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 channel split you cannot configure this module for DS30 6 since DS30 7 is not available for the second level P0993133 03 Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings 337 ASM 8 switch settings In a single density configuration such as for DS30 6 or 7 when they are set to the default PDD only offset 1 and 2 are available to ASMSs In a double density configuration you can install four ASMSS per DS30 bus Table 61 shows the switch settings for each DS30 number and the dialing numbers DNs assigned to each DS30 number Tab
106. 25 13 Clear To Send B 12 Installation and Maintenance Guide 136 Chapter 5 Business Communications Manager System Startup Install the cards Refer to Chapter 10 Replace Data Cards and Processing Hardware on page 217 for the removal and installation process for these cards Initialize the System After starting the Business Communications Manager system you are ready to set the initial configuration parameters The initial configuration defines your Business Communications Manager to the network It also gives the system a unique identity and initial parameters From that point you can continue with the specific configurations for your system which are described in Business Communications Manager 3 0 Programming Operations Guide and the other user guides for each optional application you choose to add to your system Data parameter requirements Obtain the following parameter values from an Internet Service Provider ISP or corporate network administrator initial IP address and netmask for each network interface primary and optional secondary DNS servers default next hop router fractional T1 channel numbers if you are using fractional TI system name WAN link protocol frame relay DLCI CIR if applicable V 90 modem settings North America only Default IP settings All Business Communications Manager systems are shipped with this default address IP 10 10 10 1 Subnet
107. 255 255 255 0 i Warning Before using this address on your network check with your system administrator If this address conflicts with the LAN settings you can cause network damage if you connect the network without changing the IP address P0993133 03 Chapter 5 Business Communications Manager System Startup 137 If you can use the default IP address you can connect the Business Communications Manager server to the LAN This allows you to configure to the Business Communications Manager system from your PC through the Unified Manager Connecting when there is an IP address conflict If you cannot use the default IP address you must change the IP address of the Business Communications Manager system through one of these connections e aterminal and a null modem cable Refer to Use of a null modem serial cable on page 137 e acomputer and an Ethernet crossover cable Refer to Ethernet crossover cable usage on page 140 After you set the initial parameters you can connect to the Unified Manager through the network to complete the system setup using the Quick Start Wizard If you do not have a network connection you can also access a Quick Start Wizard through a serial link For detailed information about configuring the Business Communications Manager system refer to the Business Communications Manager 3 0 Programming Operations Guide Use of a null modem serial cable You must use a null modem cable conn
108. 3133 03 Appendix C Media Bay Module Combinations This section describes some combinations of trunk and station modules to demonstrate how to fit the modules into the DS30 channel resources These configurations are meant to help demonstrate how your system can be configured using the information in this guide and do not necessarily reflect real life configurations Combining CTMs and 4X16s The 4X16 combination media bay module is a combination of a CTM and a DSM A maximum of four CTMs can fit into a DS30 channel when each is given a different offset Therefore you can combine a maximum of three CTMs with a 4X16 combination module This configuration would occupy two full DS30 channels You can install a maximum of three of the above combinations in a Business Communications Manager system with an extension unit added to it Table 68 demonstrates this configuration of CTMs and 4X16 modules including the switch settings for each module Table 68 CTMs combined with 4X16 modules Each heavily outlined and shaded square represents one module Switch setting 2 4 1 DS30 4x16s CTMs CTM8 channel Offset 3 Offset 0 1 and 2 Offset 2 12 3 4 5 6 lO STM settings on on on on on on SCT settings on on off on on on Switch settings for 4X16 CTM settings on off on on on on on off off on on on on on on on off on on on off on off on on off on on off on 3 Switch
109. 40 3 on on on on on Off 181 210 4 on on on on off on 151 180 Select Enter these switch settings 5 DS30 assign fe 3 12 3 24 s e these lines 6 Aer 2 on on on on off off on on on off on on on on on off on off If your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 channel split DS30 channel 7 is not available To 121 150 91 120 61 90 DDIM switch settings The DDIM module combines a DTM and a Data Module The switch setting you choose determines the DS30 channel assigned to the DTM portion of the DDIM The Data Module is automatically assigned the next DS30 channel number The D S30 channel you assign to the DDIM determines the line numbers of the T1 line connected to the DDIM Table 54 shows the switch settings for each DS30 channel and the resulting line assignments Table 57 DDIM switch settings Enter these switch To Select settings assign DS30 these bus 1 2 3 4 56 lines 2 on on on on on on 211 234 3 on on on on on off 181 204 4 on on on on off on 151 174 Data Module DS30 channel Enter these switch To Data Select settings assign Module DS30 these DS30 bus 1 2 3456 lines channel 5 on on on on off off 121 144 6 6 on on on off on on 91 114 7 7 f your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 channel split you cannot use
110. 5 15 31 41 Yellow Blue X16 16 32 16 Blue Yellow X16 16 32 42 40 no connections 17 25 P0993133 03 Chapter 4 Install remove or replace the Media Bay Modules 123 Table 14 and Figure 72 provide the wiring scheme for the eight pairs that connect to the ASM Table 14 ASM wiring chart Pin Wire color Port Set Figure 72 Wiring for an ASM 8 26 White Blue X01 1 1 Blue White X01 1 27 White Orange X02 2 2 Orange White X02 2 25 pair female 28 White Green X03 3 ante 3 Green White X03 3 29 White Brown X04 4 4 Brown White X04 4 30 White Slate X05 5 5 Slate White X05 5 31 Red Blue X06 6 6 Blue Red X06 6 32 Red Orange X07 7 7 Orange Red X07 7 33 Red Green X08 8 8 Green Red X08 8 34 50 no connection 9 25 Note Refer to Line and extension numbers for specific modules on page 332 to see the relationship between the DS30 channel number and the DNs Configuration information is included in the chapters on setting up modules and DNs in the Business Communications Manager 3 0 Programming Operations Guide 2 Install the telephones and peripheral equipment if a new system a b Attach the cables for the telephones to the connecting blocks BIX Install the telephones Refer to Chapter 14 Install Optional Telephony Equipment on page 287 Plug the female amphenol connector into the interface on the front of the module Set up any mobile system you are using En
111. 5 238 Not supported Not supported 181 184 189 192 189 192 197 200 197 200 205 208 Not supported Not supported 151 154 159 162 159 162 167 170 167 170 175 178 Not supported Not supported 121 124 129 132 129 132 137 140 137 140 145 148 Not supported Not supported 91 94 99 102 99 102 107 110 107 110 115 118 Not supported Not supported 61 64 69 72 69 72 71 80 77 80 85 88 Not supported Not supported If your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 channel split DS30 channel 7 is not available Installation and Maintenance Guide 336 Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings 4X16 switch settings The 4X16 module combines a CTM and a DSM 16 The CTM only requires four lines on the DS30 bus Therefore it can be assigned any of the four offsets in a DS30 bus The DSM module then automatically assigns the next DS30 number and all the assigned DNs This module can be combined with three other CTMs or one CTMS on the same DS30 bus Table 60 shows the switch settings for each DS30 bus and the assigned lines and dialing numbers DNs for each DS30 bus Table 60 4X16 switch settings Select Select Enter these switch settings Toassign And this Custom DN DS30 offset 1 2 3 4 5 6 these DS30 and range bus lines DNs 0 on on on on on on 211 214 2 1 on on off on on on 219 222 DS30 3 2 on off on on on on 227 230 237 252 3 on off off on on on
112. 51 Ensure you do not pinch or damage any cables When complete continue to the next step of this procedure Restore the Business Communications Manager to operation For details refer to Restart the System after Maintenance on page 147 When complete continue to the next step of this procedure This procedure is complete Installation and Maintenance Guide 230 Chapter 10 Replace Data Cards and Processing Hardware Replace the Processor Expansion Card PEC The BCM200 is equipped with one Processor expansion card PEC III mounted on the Media services card MSC The BCM400 is equipped with two Processor expansion cards PEC III mounted on the Media services card MSC The PECs provide signal processing capabilities for such applications as voice mail and IP telephony applications This section describes the processes to remove and replace a PEC module Figure 153 provides an overview of the process for replacing the PEC Figure 153 PEC replacement overview Ensure you have a current j Warning Incorrect handling kup cu RER of the PEC during installation could result in loss of Doa software shutdown telephony programming Set up unit for Install the maintenance PEC Remove the top Restore unit to cover operation Test system If required r remove PEC module from MSC Danger Electrical shock warning AN Disconnect the
113. 6 Figure 113 Remove the snap rivets from the BCM200 platform base chassis 186 Figure 114 Insert the snap rivets into the BCM200 platform base chassis 187 Figure 115 Fan screws location in expansion unit 2 0 models 189 Figure 116 Fan screws location in expansion unit 2 5 redundancy models 189 Figure 117 Standard power supply replacement overview 5 192 Figure 118 Remove the BCM200 MSC guide bracket 20005 193 Figure 119 Remove the I O card from the BCM200 platform base chassis 194 Figure 120 Remove the BCM200 power supply chassis screws 194 Installation and Maintenance Guide 28 Figures Figure 121 Figure 122 Figure 123 Figure 124 Figure 125 Figure 126 Figure 127 Figure 128 Figure 129 Figure 130 Figure 131 Figure 132 Figure 133 Figure 134 Figure 135 Figure 136 Figure 137 Figure 138 Figure 139 Figure 140 Figure 141 Figure 142 Figure 143 Figure 144 Figure 145 Figure 146 Figure 147 Figure 148 Figure 149 Figure 150 Figure 151 Figure 152 Figure 153 Figure 154 Figure 155 Figure 156 Figure 157 Figure 158 Figure 159 Figure 160 Figure 161 Install the BCM200 power supply chassis screws 195 Power and hard disk cable routing 0 e eee ee 196 Install the I O card in the BCM200 platform base chassis 196 Install the BCM200 MSC guide bracket 0 00000000 197 Tie wrap excess
114. 87654321 ge 5 RX 3 Insert the connector into the jack on the module Refer to the Business Communications Manager 3 0 Programming Operations Guide for steps about changing the default settings for each line loop 4 You can now use the Unified Manager to configure the lines or sets associated with the module Refer to the Business Communications Manager 3 0 Programming Operations Guide P0993133 03 Chapter 4 Install remove or replace the Media Bay Modules 121 Wire Media Bay Modules to Internal Connections After you have the trunk modules wired you can install the wiring to the station modules These are the modules which connect to the internal telephone sets All station module wiring uses 25 pair cable with a female amphenol connector at the module end Note DSM 32 modules require two 25 pair cables gt Follow these steps to connect the wiring for the DSM 16 DSM 32 ASM 8 or 4X16 modules 1 Wire 16 wire pairs from the amphenol connector to the local connecting blocks BIX so they connect to the 16 station sets you want connected to this module Use Table 13 and Figure 71 on page 122 Note Use 16 wire pairs from each connector for the DSM 32 gt Note If you are connecting an DSM 16 4X16 or DSM 32 use Table 13 on page 122 If you are connecting an ASM 8 use the Table 14 on page 123 For an overview of BIX wiring conventions refer to the Business Communications Manager 3
115. AN cable into the RJ48C jack on the WAN card For information about the location of the WAN card refer to Figure 74 on page 132 DB26 connec pag tor female To connect the WAN card using the DB26 connector use an adapter cable to connect the wide area network WAN cable to the DB26 connector on the WAN card These adapter cables are available from your Business Communications Manager supplier Note Not all systems are equipped with a WAN card Table 18 shows the wire connections for a DB25 adapter cable Table 18 DB25 adapter cable 1 Chassis Ground 1 14 14 2 Transmit Data 2 15 Transmit Clock 15 3 Receive Data 3 16 16 4 Request to Send 4 17 Receive Clock 17 5 Clear to Send 5 18 18 6 Data Set Ready 6 19 19 7 Signal Ground 7 20 Data Terminal Ready 20 Common Return 8 Data Carrier Detect 8 21 21 9 9 22 22 10 10 23 23 11 11 24 External Clock 24 12 12 25 25 13 13 26 Installation and Maintenance Guide 134 Chapter 5 Business Communications Manager System Startup Connect wiring to the modem Ensure the system is powered up before connecting this cable To connect the modem insert a PSTN line into the Line jack on the base function tray modem interface For information about the location of the modem interface refer to Figure 74 on page 132 Note Not all systems are equipped with a modem Table 19 shows t
116. CT to the Business Communications Manager system basic rate interface BRI An ISDN interface that uses two B channels and a D channel 2B D ETSI BRI is the European Telecommunications Standards Institute specification for BRI ISDN service baud rate A unit of measurement of data transmission speed Baud rate is approximately equivalent to Bits Per Second BPS Typical baud rates are 300 1200 2400 4800 and 9600 BIOS basic input output system A program contained in Read Only Memory ROM that acts as the interface between software programs and the computer hardware bit A bit is the smallest unit of information identified by the computer A bit has one of two values 0 or 1 to indicate off or on Bus A collection of communication lines that carry electronic signals between components in the system Call Forward A feature that forwards all the calls arriving at a telephone to another telephone in the system To have calls forwarded outside the system use Line Redirection Call Forward No Answer A feature that forwards all calls arriving at a telephone to another selected telephone in the system The system transfers the calls after a specific number of rings Assign Call Forward No Answer under Capabilities in System DNs programming Call Forward On Busy A feature that forwards all calls at a telephone to another selected telephone if the original telephone is busy Assign this feature under Capabilities in S
117. CallPilot Unified Messaging Installation and Maintenance Guide Call Center Set Up and Operation Guide Call Center Agent User Guide Call Center Supervisor User Guide Call Center Reporting Set Up and Operation Guide Multimedia Call Center Setup and Operation Guide Multimedia Call Center Web Developers Guide Personal Call Manager User Guide Attendant Console Setup and Operation Guide Attendant Console User Guide Call Detail Recording System Administration Guide LAN CTE Configuration Guide IP Telephony Configuration Guide CPC code P0919415 P0919417 P0919426 P0919427 P0919429 P0919430 P0941757 P0945074 P0919436 P0919437 P0919438 P0919439 P0935737 P0935740 P0936569 P0936570 P0936571 P0993139 P0993138 P0993474 Business Communication Manager 3 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 38 Preface How to Get Help Your local distributor provides technical support for your Business Communications Manager system or has access to that information through a Technical Service Center TSC If you require non technical support contact 1 800 4NORTEL 1 800 466 7835 choose option 3 Sales or Pre Sales Support P0993133 03 39 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware The Nortel Networks Business Communications Manager BCM system provides private network and telephony management capability to small and medium sized businesses The Business Communications Manager inte
118. Card MSC in the Business Communications Manager Installation and Maintenance Guide 314 Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings Trunk media bay module selection The number and type of lines coming into your system determine which trunk media bay modules and how many modules you require to support your needs Trunk lines come from either the public network PSTN or they support connections in a private network If you are setting up an entirely new system a site survey must be done to determine your current and future needs Nortel Networks recommend that you do the survey before you order any modules Note If you plan to add any lines in the near future include them in your initial estimates gt To select the trunk media bay modules 1 Record the number of each type of line you have in Table 48 If you do not know the number or type of lines you have contact your service provider 2 Usethe number of lines and the number of lines per module to determine how many modules you need Table 48 Determining trunk module requirements Number of Number Type of media bay Number of lines modules Type of lines of lines module per module required T1 digital lines DTM 24 DTM Universal T1 MUX digital DDIM 24 DDIM lines also requires a full DS30 channel for the Data Module PRI digital lines NA DTM 23 DTM required for Companion wireless E1 digital lines DTM 30 DTM PRI digital
119. Communications Manager system depending on the available channels Caller ID trunk media bay module North American systems only e The Caller ID Trunk media bay module CTM connects a maximum of four analog calling line ID CLID interfaces to the Business Communications Manager system via four RJ11 jacks on the module face These jacks are labeled Line 1 Auxiliary Line 2 Line 3 and Line 4 The auxiliary jack connects to Line 1 e The CTM8 provides eight analog CLID interfaces to the Business Communications Manager via eight RJ11 jacks on the module face Each jacks also supports disconnect supervision There are also two auxiliary jacks on this module which connect to Line 1 and Line 5 The auxiliary ports permit connection of a V 90 modem FAX machine or single line analog telephone When the auxiliary device is active the Business Communications Manager system blocks the associated line Conversely when the line is active the auxiliary port line is blocked When you connect a single line analog telephone to the auxiliary port you can use it as an emergency telephone because this line remains active if a power outage occurs Figure 41 shows a view of the front of the CTM and CTM8 P0993133 03 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware 77 Figure 41 CTM and CTM8 LEDS and jacks m Front Vi
120. Companding Law mu law a law EBI a law EBI Race Integration disabled disabled disabled OLI digits fixed 10 digits fixed 10 digits variable length a maximum of 8 Dial Tone Detection enabled enabled enabled Hunt Groups Show in second disabled disabled disabled Default delay 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles Queue timeout 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec If busy busy tone busy tone busy tone Mode broadcast broadcast sequential Target line if busy setting prime prime busy tone M7000 set disabled enabled enabled Fax switch enabled enabled enabled Service Schedule time Night start 23 00 start 23 00 start 23 00 end 07 00 end 07 00 end 07 00 Evening start 17 00 start 17 00 start 17 00 end 23 00 end 23 00 end 23 00 Lunch start 12 00 start 12 00 start 12 00 end 13 00 end 13 00 end 13 00 Service 4 start 00 00 start 00 00 start 00 00 end 00 00 end 00 00 end 00 00 Service 5 start 00 00 start 00 00 start 00 00 end 00 00 end 00 00 end 00 00 Service 6 start 00 00 start 00 00 start 00 00 end 00 00 end 00 00 end 00 00 Call Forward Delay Show in second disabled disabled disabled Default 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 2 ring cycles Options 2ring cycles e 2ring cycles e 2ring cycles 3ring cycles 4ring cycles 6ring cycles e 10 ring cycles e Qring cycles e 4ring cycles e 6 ring cycles e 10 ring cycles e 3 ring cycles e 4ring cycles 6ring cycles e 10 ring cycles Installat
121. DS30 channel 6 for the DDIM When you use a 3 5 split DS30 channel 7 is not available for the data module portion of the DDIM You cannot use DS30 channel 7 for the DDIM If you assign DS30 channel 7 there is no DS30 channel available for the data module portion of the DDIM Installation and Maintenance Guide 334 Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings BRI switch settings You can install a maximum of three BRI modules per DS30 bus on the offsets indicated below Table 58 shows the switch settings for each DS30 number and the resulting line assignments Table 58 BRIM S T switch settings Select DS30 Select Enter these switch settings To assign b offset these us 1 23 4 5 6 lines 2 o on on on on on on 211 218 4 on on off on on on 219 226 2 on off on on on on 997 934 3 Q on on on on on off 181 188 1 jon on off on on off 189 196 2 on off on on on off 197 204 4 Q on on on on off on 151 158 1 jon on off on off on 159 166 2 on off on on off on 167 174 Select DS30 Select Enter these switch settings b offset li DS 1 2 3 4 5 6 nes 5 0 on on on on off off 121 128 1 on on off on off off 129 136 2 on off on on off off 137 144 6 0 on on on off on on 91 98 1 on on off off on on 99 106 2 on off on off on on 107 114 4947 0 on on on off on off 61 68 1 on on off off on off 69 76 2 on off on off o
122. E Initialize Menu CESS mcm m m IE E SSS GE EIE GE GE IE IE GE IE IE GE GE iz ncm 1 Initialize Universal Profile 2 Set service startup to Auto 3 Set service startup to Manual 4 Clear all event logs 5 Display active partition information 6 Display inactive partition information 7 Display Manufacturing Release Note 8 Platform Initialization Menu H Return to Main Menu Product Version BCHh488 Release 3 8 Version RC 2 8 Issue 1 Initialization Complete Configuration Valid Service startup Auto Cea eo ete eee eee eee Motherboard SH815 PCI Cards MSC ZX Empty LAN LAN MSCUersion 38CJB19 R Make a selection 1 2 3 5 5 6 7 8 H l 7 From the Initialize menu select option 1 Initialize Universal Profile The Business Communications Manager performs a shutdown and reboot to enable the WAN card 8 This procedure is complete P0993133 03 Chapter 10 Replace Data Cards and Processing Hardware 225 Remove the media services card MSC Use this procedure to remove the media services card from the base function tray Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static discharge Always wear a ground wrist strap before you handle components Always place
123. European Safety requirements EN 60950 and EMC requirements EN 55022 Class A and EN 55024 These EMC limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial and light industrial environment WARNING This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures The above warning is inserted for regulatory reasons If any customer believes that they have an interference problem either because their Nortel Networks product seems to cause interference or suffers from interference they should contact their distributor immediately The distributor will assist with a remedy for any problems and if necessary will have full support from Nortel Networks Installation and Maintenance Guide 12 Safety WARNING Only qualified service personnel may install this equipment The instructions in this manual are intended for use by qualified service personnel only Risk of shock Ensure the Business Communications Manager is unplugged from the power socket and that any telephone or network cables are unplugged before opening the Business Communications Manager Read and follow installation instructions carefully ee Only qualified persons should service the system The installation and service of this hardware is to be performed only by service person
124. HS HS HS HS SS HS HS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS HS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SSS SS EE Nortel Networks Business Communications Manager 3 8 MSS SSS HS HHS HS HS HS HS HS HS HS HS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS HS SS SS HS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS HE Main Menu He SS SS SSS SSS SS SSS SS SS SS SS SSS 1 Platform Initialization Menu 2 System Configuration 3 Configuration Wizard 4 Media Services Card System ID 5 Diagnostics 6 System Status Monitor 7 Command line 8 Restart the system X Exit 4 Product Version BCH400 Release 3 8 Version RC 2 8 Issue 1 R Initialization Complete Configuration Ualid Service startup fiuto 4 Motherboard TBD PCI Cards MSC Empty Modem LAN LAN HSCUersion 4 Make a selection 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 7 If the hard disk requires initialization the Platform Initialization Menu appears Refer to Figure 103 Figure 103 Platform Initialization Menu screen of Telnet 10 10 10 1 mm E Connect Edit Terminal Help A Nortel Networks Business Communications Manager 3 6 Gemmmmmmmmmm
125. I QSIG 300 239 DPNSS MCDN ETSI QSIG 300 239 ISDN ETSI 300 102 United Kingdom ETSI QSIG 300 239 ISDN ETSI 300 102 DASS2 ISDN ETSI 300 403 DPNSS MCDN ETSI QSIG 300 239 ISDN ETSI 300 403 BRI and PRI line types Table 45 provides a description of the types of lines that BRI and PRI trunks can provide These are set under Resources Media Bay Modules Bus XX Module X on the Unified Manager Note that some of these line types are only available when specific regions are chosen Table 45 BRI and PRI line types DTM and BRI modules Digital trunk types Description T1 digital line that carries data on 24 channels at 1 544 Mbps North American 30 channels at 2 048 Mbps Europe Loop E amp M DID and ground start lines are also versions of T1 lines You can program auto answer T1 loop start T1 E amp M trunks T1 DID T1 ground start trunks PRI and IP trunks to map to target lines to provide for attendant bypass calling directly to a department or individual and line concentration one trunk can map onto several target lines DID This is a type of T1 trunk line that allows an outside caller to dial directly into a line on the Business Communications Manager 2 5 Loop This is a type of T1 line This type of line is used on systems where the service provider supports disconnect supervision for the digital loop start trunks These trunks provide remote access to the Business Communic
126. I Riser card connectors Modem card sa SSM Main card 2 connector Po TE BIOS Ji battery connector z e DIMM connector Main card Figure 189 shows what the LEDs look like on the outside of the base function tray The labels in the illustration indicate which part of the hardware each LED supports P0993133 03 Chapter 15 Troubleshooting 293 Figure 189 LED locations on the face of the base function tray WAN LAN 1 Red or Green Power Disk Status MSC uud LAN2 Temp Fan Reset E cuc a 2 A 070 a a De ee ee De ee E 0808 12 A7 p gm Business Communications Manager f 1 202000090 ais E 1 2 3 4 D 6 ye e The Business Communications Manager System Status Monitor allows you to view the status of the system LEDs on your PC This status display allows you to make preliminary decisions regarding the type of intervention required without necessarily having to inspect the Business Communications Manager hardware Use this procedure to access the System Status Monitor through the Unified Manager 1 Open the Unified Manager 2 Under Diagnostics click on System Status Monitor The LED Display screen appears Installation and Maintenance Guide 294 Chapter 15 Troubleshooting Figure 190 System Status Monit
127. If you change this information on an existing system the telephony programming is erased and the telephony system is disabled for a period of time The Business Communications Manager also performs a cold start Enter the software keycodes If you have purchased any of the optional Business Communications Manager applications that require keycode activation refer to Business Communications Manager 3 0 Software Keycode Installation Guide The guide provides information about how to obtain the keycodes from the Nortel Networks Keycode Retrieval System KRS and how to enter them into the Unified Manager These codes can be entered after basic system configuration is complete Regenerating keycodes after system replacement If you replace your media services card MSC you need to regenerate all your keycodes to reflect the new system identification Enter the keycodes after you perform your system data restore Access the Nortel Networks Keycode Retrieval System KRS website for information on how to regenerate keycodes P0993133 03 143 Chapter 6 Prepare Hardware for Maintenance or Upgrades This chapter describes how to prepare the Business Communications Manager system for maintenance activities The following topics are covered in this chapter e Precautions e Tools e System shutdown and startup e Platform base chassis maintenance procedures remove amp install the Base function tray Advanced function tray chassis
128. If you enable all six jacks of the FEM module the FEM module is the only module you can install on your Business Communications Manager system because each port requires one DS30 channel Refer to FEM switch settings on page 344 P0993133 03 Chapter 4 Install remove or replace the Media Bay Modules 125 Connect the fiber cables Follow these steps to connect your Norstar expansion modules to a FEM module installed into a Business Communications Manager 1 Ensure the Business Communications Manager is powered up and functional 2 Connect the fiber cables from the Norstar expansion modules to the jacks on the FEM module Note The DIP switch settings you chose determines which FEM ports are available There are only six ports available Refer to FEM switch settings on page 344 a Connect the Norstar Line Modules to the FEM beginning at fiber port 1 b Connect Norstar Extension Modules to the FEM beginning at fiber port 6 3 Change the DN records in the Unified Manager or change the set wiring as required to match your system Warning When you connect a Norstar station module to an FEM the extension numbers N of the telephones connected to the station module may change To keep the same extension numbers you will have to change the DNs of the telephones or change the telephone wiring to correspond with the required DNs Note If you connect a Norstar station module amphenol cable directly to a DSM y
129. N A collection of computers or Business Communications Managers connected or networked to each other over long distances normally using common carrier facilities Installation and Maintenance Guide 374 Glossary P0993133 03
130. N 311 Blue Black Port 211 Port 311 Port 411 Port 511 Port 611 Port 711 38 Black Green DN 233 DN 249 DN 265 DN 281 DN 297 DN 313 13 Green Black Port 213 Port 313 Port 413 Port 513 Port 613 Port 713 40 Black Slate DN 235 DN 251 DN 267 DN 283 DN 299 DN 315 15 Slate Black Port 215 Port 315 Port 415 Port 515 Port 615 Port 715 Emergency Telephone Installation You can use the emergency telephone to make calls when there is no power to the Business Communications Manager system To install an emergency telephone on the Business Communications Manager system connect a single line analog telephone to the auxiliary port on the CTM When you make a call from the emergency telephone the auxiliary port uses the telephone line connected to the Line 1 port of the CTM TIP You can connect an emergency telephone to every CTM installed on your Business gt Communications Manager system Use the following steps to install the emergency telephone 1 Connect a single line analog telephone to the auxiliary port on the CTM 2 Connect an analog PSTN line cable to the Line 1 port of the CTM Installation and Maintenance Guide 246 Chapter 11 Install Telephones and Peripherals Install IP Telephones The Business Communications Manager emobility strategy includes support for the Nortel Networks i2004 and i2002 IP telephones the Nortel Networks i2050 Software Phone and the
131. Networks does not recommended use of the rack mount brackets for wall mount applications 1 Mark the location of the plywood backboard on the wall using a pencil Use a ruler and bubble level to check that the plywood backboard is level with respect to the wall Mount the plywood backboard securely to the wall Mark the location of the wall mount bracket holes on the plywood backboard a Usethe wall mount bracket as a template b Use a bubble level to check that the wall mount bracket is level with respect to the plywood backboard 4 Install four 10 x 2 5 cm 10 x 1 in round head wood screws in the backboard supplied a Donottighten the screws heads against the backboard Leave approximately 0 5 cm 0 25 in of the screw exposed from the backboard b Perform a trial installation of the wall mount bracket on the plywood backboard Ensure the wood screw heads seat in the wall mount bracket slots If the wood screws are too tight loosen until the screw heads fit fully in the slots C Ensure that the wall mount bracket is level with respect to the plywood backboard d Remove the wall mount bracket 5 Align the screw holes on one side of the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis with the wall mounting bracket Note The bracket suspends the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis on the wall Consider the direction you want the media bay modules to face left or right when you choose the side to in
132. P switch setting DS30 bus 1 2 3 4 5 6 Off set 4x16 TM CTM8 BRI offset DS30 ch on on on on on on 0 4 5 7 on on on off on off 3 on on off off on off 1 4 on off on off on off 5 Y on off off off on off 3h 3 Choose the DS30 numbers to 5 Make a note of the DIP switch settings for the DS30 offset numbers assign to the modules DIP switch setting for offset Example Position your DSM 32 module step 1 which requires two full DS30 buses step 2 in DS30 2 and 3 step 3 Moving across note that the offset is 0 step 4 Set the DIP switches on the module to match the DIP switch settings indicated for that offset step 5 Installation and Maintenance Guide 328 Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings Table 52 shows possible DS30 and offset configurations for each type of trunk module and the corresponding switch settings For DECT and FEM settings refer to DECT switch settings on page 343 and FEM switch settings on page 344 Table 52 Possible trunk media bay module DIP switch settings Media bay module positioning trunk modules DIP switch settings DS30 bus 4x16 DDIM DTM BRI Offsets 0 1 2 3 Offsets Offset Offsets 2 3 45 6 Line Exten 0 s0 0 1 2 3 offset DS30 ch E Picks Picks up up ch 3 2 ch 3 Picks up ch 4 i
133. Part No P0993133 03 Business Communications Manager BCM200 400 Installation and Maintenance Guide RTEL NETWORKS 2 Copyright 2002 Nortel Networks All rights reserved November 2002 The information in this document is subject to change without notice The statements configurations technical data and recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable but are presented without express or implied warranty Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document The information in this document is proprietary to Nortel Networks NA Inc Trademarks NORTEL NETWORKS and Business Communications Manager are trademarks of Nortel Networks NA Inc Microsoft MS MS DOS Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Symbol Spectrum24 and NetVision are registered trademarks of Symbol Technologies Inc All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners North American Regulatory Information Safety Business Communications Manager equipment meets all applicable requirements of both the CSA C22 2 No 950 95 and UL 1950 Edition 3 Danger Risk of shock Read and follow installation instructions carefully Ensure the Business Communications Manager and Business Communications Manager expansion unit are unplugged from the power socket and that any telephone or network cables are unplug
134. Platform Hardware e PCI device monitoring LED 4 8 These LEDs monitor the peripheral components 2 x NICs 1 x WAN 1 x Modem 1 x MSC A steady green LED indicates the device is detected and operationally normal A flashing green LED indicates that software detects the hardware but there is no device driver No color indicates the device is defective or missing LED 4 Monitors the MSC LED 5 Monitors the WAN if installed LED 6 Monitors the modem if installed LED 7 Monitors the NIC 1 LED 8 Monitors the NIC 2 e Chassis CPU temperature LED 9 Green indicates a normal operational temperature range for the chassis Red indicates either a sensor is not operational or the chassis temperature is out of range e Fan activity LED 10 Green indicates that all fans are operational Red indicates that one or more fan is not operating correctly e Reset button The reset button when depressed restarts the system The reset button is recessed to prevent an accidental reboot Note The system status LEDs correspond to the devices not to the PCI slots gt P0993133 03 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware 57 Figure 17 Business communication manager base function tray system status display LEDs WAN LAN 1 Power Disk Status MSC ould LAN2 Temp Fan Reset ua D o vA 90 O O 0 BCM400 2 OQ PR Red or Green q 2202020
135. S Federal Commission FCC Part 68 and has been registered under files Industry Canada 332D 5980A and FCC US AB6KF15B20705 key system US AB6MF15B20706 hybrid system and US AB6PF15B23740 PBX system Connection of the Business Communications Manager telephone system to the nationwide telecommunications network is made through a standard network interface jack that you can order from your local telecommunications company This type of customer provided equipment cannot be used on party lines or coin lines Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas Caution Users should not attempt to mak
136. SC for BRI n a n a 141 VSC for PRI n a n a 141 State for BRI PRI n a n a send feature code Default CO lines 2 2 4 UTAM enabled disabled disabled Portable credits 0 defined in the n a application max Release reason Release text none none detail Release code disabled disabled disabled Display duration 3 sec 3 sec 3 sec Overlap Receiving disabled enabled disabled Local Number length for 8 8 8 P0993133 03 System Region Attributes 311 Table 47 Region defaults Continued Functionality Attribute North American Global United Kingdom Tandem alerting disabled disabled disabled TON NPI national E 164 national E 164 unknown unknown National number length 10 10 0 national number prepend n a n a 0 Provide tone on PRI enabled n a disabled Installation and Maintenance Guide 312 System Region Attributes P0993133 03 313 Appendix B Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings Media Bay Module System Selection The media bay modules are the devices in the Business Communications Manager system that permit you to connect your extensions and the public switched telephone network PSTN lines to the call processing capabilities of the Business Communications Manager system A special media bay module called a Fiber expansion module FEM allows you to update from a Norstar system to a Business Communications Manager by reusing the Norstar expansion modules and the fiber c
137. Smooth Images See Figure 1 to review Acrobat Reader version 5 0 display selections Business Communication Manager 3 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 34 Preface Figure 1 Acrobat Reader display setup selections Preferences E Accessibility Batch Processing Color Management Comments Digital Signatures Display Extract Images Forms Full Screen Identity JavaScript Layout Grid Online Comments Options Search Self Sign Security Spelling TouchUp Update Web Buy X Display Default Page Layout Continuous x Page Units finches x Application Language English Use Greek Text Below 6 Pixels Display Page To Edge Display Transparency Grid Smooth qg IV Smooth Text v Smooth Line Art v Smooth Images Use CoolType Recommended for laptop LCD screens r Magnification Default Zoom Fit Width X Max Fit visible Zoom 800 Symbols used in this guide This guide uses the following symbols to draw your attention to important information Caution Caution Symbol Alerts you to conditions where you can damage the equipment Danger Electrical Shock Hazard Symbol Alerts you to conditions where you can get an electrical shock gt Warning Warning Symbol Alerts you to conditions where you can cause the system to work improperly or to fail 4 Note Note Symbol Alerts you to important i
138. Unit The RPI provides remote power for base station support There are two types of RPIs RPI 8 that supports a maximum of eight base stations and RPI 16 that supports a maximum of 16 base stations Installation and Maintenance Guide 88 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware DECT System Components The DECT system allows the user to access calls and call features while away from their stationary telephone The following components combine with the DECT media bay module to provide this service e Radio base station provides the radio link between the Business Communications Manager through the DECT module to the portable handsets e Portable handsets communicate through radio base stations connected to the DECT module Note The DECT cordless handset can be configured to act as a separate set either providing a point for target line calls or with full call and receive capability although some of the features are not available The handset can also be twinned with desk sets to provide mobile coverage of one or more stationary sets DECT system installation and configuration information is contained in the Business Communications Manager 3 0 DECT Installation and Maintenance Guide T7406 system components The T7406 wireless system allows the user to access calls and call features while away from their desk The following components provide this service e Radio
139. a networking components of the Business Communications Manager system provide network connection to your local area network LAN and or your wide area network WAN For instructions about how to install the data networking components refer to Connect the Data Networking Hardware on page 131 Systems are shipped with a default IP and subnet mask You must change these settings to suit your system Refer to Initialize the System on page 136 which also describes how to set up your computer to access the Quick Start Wizard which you use to perform system configuration Refer to the Business Communications Manager 3 0 Programming Operations Guide for details about the Quick Start Wizard The telephony components of the Business Communications Manager system provide call processing and connection to the public telephone system For instructions about how to install telephones and components refer to Chapter 13 Install Analog Terminal Adapters on page 277 and Chapter 14 Install Optional Telephony Equipment on page 287 The Companion system provides wireless service between mobile sets and stationary sets within the Business Communications Manager system The DECT module provides system connection for cordless handsets that can act as mobile sets or as standalone sets These applications are region based Refer to Mobility Services by Region on page 303 For instructions about installing a Companion system refe
140. able to I O card 3j lt Connect power cables to the ene _ gt hard disk or RAID card a d Z Move advanced function tray latches du A4 J to the locked position m Insert advanced function tray partially into the platform base chassis N function tray latch Screws Uy y 16 This procedure is complete P0993133 03 Chapter 6 Prepare Hardware for Maintenance or Upgrades 161 Remove and Install the Platform Base Chassis Top Cover Use the procedures in this section to either remove or install the top cover of the platform base chassis You must remove the top cover to access the cabling or hardware components such as standard power supply I O card or backplanes Remove the platform base chassis top cover Use this procedure to remove the top cover of the BCM200 or BCM400 platform base chassis This procedure assumes that you intend to perform maintenance activities Do not operate the Business Communications Manager with the top cover removed Do not leave the top cover removed for extended periods of time Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static discharge Always wear a ground wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container or work area 1 If you still have access to the Unified Manager shut down the system using the Shutdown command For details refer to Shut down the system softwa
141. ables to the modules When you order your Business Communications Manager system there are no media bay modules installed in the Business Communications Manager base platform chassis or Business Communications Manager expansion unit You are able to select the number and type of media bay modules that best suit your business requirements If you have a large Business Communications Manager system there are some configuration restrictions that can apply to your system For information about these restrictions refer to Rules for assigning DS30 resources on page 322 Figure 192 Process for determining modules Determine trunk Determine which and extension DS30 buses are requirements available Determine DS30 Set DIP switches on requirements for modules each module Determine if any Install modules into the offsets can Be used BCM or expansion unit The first step in selecting the media bay modules is to establish the number of extensions internal lines and PSTN lines trunk lines you have or need This determines the number and type of media bay modules you require The following sections describe how to determine which modules and how many you require for your system After you determine the modules types required calculate how they use the available system resources These sections describe how the modules work within the available channels on the Media Services
142. ach terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENSs of all the devices does not exceed 5 This Class A device complies with Part 68 amp Part 15 of the FCC Rules and ICES 003 Class A Canadian EMI requirements Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Do not attempt to repair this equipment If you experience trouble write for warranty and repair information Nortel Networks 30 Norelco Drive Weston Ontario MOL 2X6 Canada US Regulations please read carefully Federal Communications Commission FCC Notice FCC registration number This telephone equipment complies with Part 68 Rules and Regulations of the FCC for direct connection to the Public Switched Telephone Network The FCC registration number appears on a sticker affixed to the bottom of the telephone Your connection to the telephone line must comply with these FCC rules e An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network premises wiring using a compatible modular jack which is Part 68 compliant
143. ack The base function tray uses the Music on hold input to connect an external music source that supplies a signal to held lines music on hold or telephone speakers background music The input source can be any available radio or music source approved for connection to the network For directions on setting up these features refer to Media Service Card Connections on page 287 MSC IP call processing hardware If your system requires a high volume of IP telephones and or more IP trunks than the standard eight trunks you have the option to switch a DS30 bus setting on the MSC from providing service for a media bay module to providing digital processing service for additional IP telephones and or trunks To ensure adequate data flow from the system you can increase the number of PEC III cards BCM200 has a maximum of 2 cards BCM400 has a maximum of 4 DS30 channels are internal communication paths Each DS30 bus provides a possible 32 signaling channels and 32 media channels two DS30 buses are exclusively dedicated to MSC data resources Five paths within these channels have hard coded applications The other paths can be assigned to various data applications such as voice mail dialup ISDN WAN VoIP trunks or IP telephony five DS30 channels are exclusively reserved for the media bay modules The sixth DS30 bus can be switched to accommodate media bay modules or more channels for IP telephones or VoIP trunks You
144. acket a mount P0993133 03 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware 49 BCM400 platform redundant feature option RFO configuration Figure 7 shows the location of the hardware components in the RFO configuration platform base chassis e 1x Media services card MSC with 2 processor expansion cards 2 additional cards can be added e 2x hard disks and RAID controller card e 2x System cooling fans e 2x Redundant hot swappable power supply modules Figure 7 BCM400 platform base chassis RFO configuration P d Removable cover Front view Power supply 2 x hard disks amp Advanced function tr 9o V unction tray D EE PSE CRN SOS Base function tray Media bay module backplane Of JR Rear view S E Fan access d Power supply panel TWO support bracket mount Installation and Maintenance Guide 50 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware BCM400 advanced function tray AFT The advanced function tray AFT houses the hard disk and an extra unpopulated bay The standard configuration contains a single hard disk and has no RAID LED display The AFT in the RFO configuration contains two hard disks a RAID controller card and has an LED display to monitor RAID status The extra unpopulated bay is reserved for future development The advanced function tray mounts in th
145. advanced function tray chassis liliis 169 Figure 95 Remove the hard disk from the hard disk cage Ls 170 Figure 96 Remove the primary hard disk from the RAID hard disk cage 170 Figure 97 Install a BCM200 hard disk in the hard disk cage 172 Figure 98 Install a BCM400 hard disk in the hard disk cage 172 Figure 99 Install the programmed hard disk into the RAID hard disk cage 173 Figure 100 Insert the hard disk cage into the BCM200 platform base chassis 174 Figure 101 Insert the hard disk cage to the BCM400 advanced function tray chassis lille 175 Figure 102 Main Menu screen Ered o kr nes 177 Figure 103 Platform Initialization Menu screen leeren 177 Figure 104 Chassis cooling fan replacement overview lesus 179 Figure 105 Remove the BCM400 fan access panel 00000eeeeue 181 Figure 106 Disconnect the fan cable from the I O card 20 0005 181 Figure 107 Remove the snap rivets from the BCM400 fan access panel 182 Figure 108 Fan chassis mounting holes llli elles 183 Figure 109 Insert the snap rivets into the BCM400 fan access panel 183 Figure 110 Connect the fan cable s to the I O card 00220 eae eee 184 Figure 111 Install the fan access panel to the platform base chassis 184 Figure 112 Disconnect the BCM200 fan cable from the I O card 18
146. age from electro static N discharge Always wear a ground wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container 1 Position and correctly align the new DIMM edge connectors first into the connector Note The DIMM has two notches on the edge connector Position the DIMM so that one of the notches is on the side of the slot nearest to the Business Communications Manager cards 2 Carefully and firmly press down on the top of the DIMM card with your thumbs At the same time use your index fingers to move the fastening tabs inward toward the card When the card is completely inserted in the connector the fastening tabs clip to the side of the DIMM card Note Do not force the DIMM into its slot If the DIMM does not slide in easily check the alignment of the DIMM 3 Install the media services card see Install the media services card MSC on page 226 Continue to the next step of this procedure when complete Partially install the base function tray in the platform base chassis Install the WAN card if applicable See Install the WAN card on page 221 Continue to the next step of this procedure when complete Connect the DS30 connectors to the MSC Completely install the base function tray in the platform base chassis see Install the base function tray on page 151 Ensure you do not pinch or damage any cables 8 Install the base function tray bezel See Install the b
147. age to products resulting from improper installation or operation alteration accident neglect abuse misuse fire or natural causes such as storms or floods after the telephone is in your possession Nortel Networks shall not be liable for any incidental or consequential damages including but not limited to loss damage or expense directly or indirectly arising from the customers use of or inability to use this telephone either separately or in combination with other equipment This paragraph however shall not apply to consequential damages for injury to the person in the case of telephones used or bought for use primarily for personal family or household purposes This warranty sets forth the entire liability and obligations of Nortel Networks with respect to breach of warranty and the warranties set forth or limited herein are the sole warranties and are in lieu of all other warranties expressed or implied including warranties or fitness for particular purpose and merchantability Warranty Repair Services Should the set fail during the warranty period In North America please call 1 800 574 1611 for further information Outside North America contact your sales representative for return instructions You will be responsible for shipping charges if any When you return this telephone for warranty service you must present proof of purchase Installation and Maintenance Guide After Warranty Service Nortel Networks offe
148. aintenance Guide Desktop Message Networking requires keycode provides a multimedia messaging application that works with an e mail client to provide a single graphical user interface CallPilot voice fax and text messages as well as e mail messages DECT Installation and Maintenance Guide region specific The DECT radio based system allows you to configure up to 32 cordless handsets that communicate through radio base stations deployed around a site The handsets can be configured as stand alone sets or they can be twinned with stationary sets IP Telephony Configuration Guide i2002 and i2004 IP telephones and the NetVision and NetVision Data telephones require a combination of data and telephony settings to work with the Business Communications Manager These telephones can make or receive calls through either VoIP or PBX lines Nortel Networks 12050 Software Phone turns your PC into a telephone interface which provides standard telephony operating features such as Voice Mail Caller ID and multiple telephone lines or line appearances This application requires Windows 2000 a full duplex sound card and a computer telephony headset This document describes what settings are required to use this application with the Business Communications Manager The i2050 Software Phone Installation Guide provides specific installation information VolP Gateway requires keycode converts the voice in a call into a packet format and send
149. all the Platform Base Chassis on the Wall lille eee eee eee 102 Install the Platform Base Chassis on a Flat Surface 000000 ee eeee 104 Install the Expansion Unit into a Rack llle 104 Attach the mounting brackets to the Expansion Unit 104 Installation and Maintenance Guide 18 Contents Mount the Expansion Unit to the rack liliis 105 Install the Expansion Unit on a Flat Surface 00 00 e eee 106 Connect the Expansion Unit to the Business Communications Manager 106 Chapter 4 Install remove or replace the Media Bay Modules 109 Install a Media Bay Module 0 00 cc een 109 Shut down the system 0 0 00 c eects 110 Install a media bay module in the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis esaii are na e e ees 111 Install a media bay module in the expansion unit 200 eae 111 Reconnect the equipment uaussaaauaaaaua naaar nanea eee 112 Remove a media bay module 0 0 eae 112 Remove a media bay module from the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis err i same eri Ree ea es REX WE ead 113 Remove a media bay module from the expansion unit 2 4 115 Replace a Media Bay Module uasusuauauaunaauaananannaa eens 115 Wire the Media Bay Modules 0 0 00 cee eee 117 Module Wiring Warnings ree rere EE REAREA eee 118 Connect the Media Bay Modul
150. alling the Business Communications Manager expansion unit in a rack do not stack units directly on top of one another Fasten each unit to the rack with the separate mounting brackets Attach the mounting brackets to the Expansion Unit You must install two rack brackets on the expansion unit to allow you to install the unit into the equipment rack These brackets are supplied with the expansion unit 1 Place the Business Communications Manager expansion unit on a table P0993133 03 Chapter 3 Install the Business Communications Manager amp Expansion Unit Platform Base Chassis 105 2 Align the screw holes between the expansion unit and the right rack mounting bracket Refer to Figure 57 Figure 57 Attach the rack mounting bracket to the expansion unit 3 Fasten the bracket to the expansion unit using four screws 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 on the other side with second bracket Caution Use only the screws that came with the bracket Using other screws can damage the equipment Note Rack mount bracket The expansion unit rack mount bracket has an additional set of holes that allows you to install the brackets so that the expansion unit sits flush with the Business Communications Manager chassis in an equipment rack Mount the Expansion Unit to the rack The mounting brackets you attached to the expansion unit correspond with mounting holes located on the equipment rack Note Yo
151. amp cloth for cleaning Do not use this product near water for example near a bath tub wash bowl kitchen sink or laundry tub in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Do not place this product on an unstable cart stand or table The product may fall causing serious damage to the product This product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register This product should not be placed in a built in installation unless proper ventilation is provided Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord Do not locate this product where the cord will be abused by persons walking on it Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of fire or electric shock Never spill liquid of any kind on the product To reduce the risk of electric shock do not disassemble this product but have it sent to a qualified service person when some service or repair work is required Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions a When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed b Ifthe product has been exposed to rain water or liquid has been spilled on the product disconnect and allow the product to dry out to see if it still operates but do not open up the product C If the product housing has been damaged d If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance Avoid using a telephone during an electrical s
152. an assistant hold the platform base chassis Align the holes in the rack mounting bracket with the holes in the equipment rack rails A O N 2 Fasten the rack mounting brackets to the rack using four screws supplied Refer to Figure 53 P0993133 03 Chapter 3 Install the Business Communications Manager amp Expansion Unit Platform Base Chassis 101 Figure 53 Fasten the BCM200 platform base chassis to an equipment rack 7 a 5 x A NO OO OMe Hi z z N N Y aw Us M yy L OR xc e e m Pd p o 0 pu A we 5 This procedure is complete Business Communication Manager 3 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 102 Chapter 3 Install the Business Communications Manager amp Expansion Unit Platform Base Chassis Install the Platform Base Chassis on the Wall This procedure describes how to mount the BCM200 or BCM400 platform base chassis to a wall To mount the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis on the wall you need awall mount bracket kit NTAB3422 e four 10 x 2 5 cm 10 x 1 in round head wood screws aplywood backboard 2 cm 3 4 in thick Caution Refer to Environment Checklist on page 95 for acceptable environmental conditions before selecting a location for the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis Note Nortel
153. and how to configure the system to the Business Communications Manager Installation and Maintenance Guide 248 Chapter 11 Install Telephones and Peripherals T7406 cordless systems The T7406 cordless system consists of a base station that connects to three ports on a Business Communications Manager digital station module providing a radio interface for three cordless handsets The cordless handsets register to the base station which transfers the call over the telephone lines connected to the system The handsets are configured to emulate the T7316 M7310 telephone features This system is most suited to small to medium office environments set up in an open fashion T7406 cordless telephones use the DNs for the ports on the station module that the base station is connected to They are digital sets and use M7310 T7316 as an operational model The 77406 Cordless Telephone Installation Guide provides e deployment parameters adescription of the handset features e instructions for installing the base station e instructions on how to correctly charge the handset battery e general operational directions including describing special operational features of the handset Moving Telephones You can move an Business Communications Manager digital telephone to a new location within the system without losing its programmed settings if the telephone has been enabled with Set relocation When you enable Set relocation automatic telephone
154. anner b Tie wrap the power cable to the hard disk cable Position the tie wrap 1 2 inch from the hard disk cable sheathing Installation and Maintenance Guide 196 Chapter 9 Replace or Upgrade a Power Supply C Ensure the remainder of the power cable does not interfere with internal components Figure 122 Power and hard disk cable routing Media bay module backplane Tie wrap location P4 P5 P6 i hard disk cable 1 2 from MSC hard disk cable sheathing e lO card 53 1 2 standoffs y i P4 P5 P6 power IDE hard cable MSC disk cable bracket _ Power suppl Sandon Hard disk pply 9 ard dis e l Ocard standoffs al 5 Install the I O card See Figure 123 The I O card installs on top of the power supply and IDE cables Ensure the cables maintain their position as shown in the previous step Figure 123 Install the I O card in the BCM200 platform base chassis 6 Install the BCM200 MSC bracket see Figure 124 P0993133 03 Chapter 9 Replace or Upgrade a Power Supply 197 Figure 124 Install the BCM200 MSC guide bracket Fasten BCM200 B MSC guide bracket BCM200 MSC guide bracket mounting screws e x Pa a 2 7 Install a Pl power cable to the media bay backplane connector Tie wrap the exc
155. apter 12 Install Companion or DECT Systems Tip Wiring information The recommended wire gauge is 6 AWG Connect the ground lead to the building ground Do not connect to a ground rod or series of ground rods If you cannot connect the ground lead to the building ground connect the ground lead to the metal frame of the building The connection must be no more than six to 10 ft You can connect the ground lead to the 120 V ac conduit which is connected to the building ground However using the ac conduit is not the preferred method of installation The connector between the antenna and the lightning surge protector and between the lightning surge protector and the base station is a proprietary BNC connector You must align the BNC connectors before you can make the connection Figure 172 Lightning surge protector and bracket USA 4 This procedure is complete P0993133 03 Chapter 12 Install Companion or DECT Systems 269 Install an antenna Canada There are three types of external antennas available in Canada e indoor directional antenna e indoor omnidirectional antenna e outdoor omnidirectional antenna Each type of installation requires a specific installation technique As well you must install a lightning surge protector for every outdoor antenna installed Outdoor requirements Before you install the antenna ensure that your plan meets the following requirements
156. ar of the hard disk cage Lift firmly on the tab At the same time slide the hard disk cage in the direction shown in Figure 93 until the unit detaches from the mounting points on the chassis 8 Disconnect the hard disk from the system a Disconnect the power supply connector from the hard disk b Disconnect the hard disk connector at the I O card Figure 93 Detach the hard disk cage from the BCM200 platform base chassis Q Slide the hard disk _ cage toward the rear of a ET V E DES jp lt N oS 7 1 Remove access panel 7 E ba d 2 Lift hard disk cage tab 9 Remove the hard disk cage from the BCM200 platform base chassis Place the hard disk cage on a flat clean and static free surface 10 This procedure is complete Installation and Maintenance Guide 168 Chapter 7 Hard Disk Replacement Procedures Remove a hard disk cage from a BCM400 platform base chassis Use this procedure to remove the hard disk cage from the BCM400 advanced function tray Use this procedure to remove a BCM400 RAID upgrade kit Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static discharge Always wear a ground wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container If you still have access to the Unified Manager shut down the system by following the instructions in Shut down the system software on page 145 Otherwise skip to step 2 Set up the server for maint
157. ard disk cage lift tab see Figure 98 2 Align the hard disk and hard disk cage retaining screw holes Fasten the hard disk cage retainer screws into both sides of the hard disk cage see Figure 97 or Figure 98 Note For a RAID upgrade kit the mirror disk and primary disk ribbon cables are pre installed If applicable install the programmed hard disk from your single disk system into the RAID hard disk cage see Figure 98 Installation and Maintenance Guide 172 Chapter 7 Hard Disk Replacement Procedures Figure 97 Install a BCM200 hard disk in the hard disk cage 4 Insert the hard disk into the hard disk cage Rear view Front view i Align and install the Male is 9 hard disk retainer cage lift Kee IDE tab Se SENS connector Power supply connector Figure 98 Install a BCM400 hard disk in the hard disk cage 4 gt Insert the hard disk into _ the hard disk cage Coy c e Power supply connector Align and install the hard A Hard disk So disk retainer screws cage lift i tab IDE connector P0993133 03 Chapter 7 Hard Disk Replacement Procedures 173 Figure 99 Install the programmed hard disk into the RAID hard disk cage 4 naa Ine programmed prar hare 2 Install the hard disk retaining screws AS disk into the hard disk cage m Rear view Rear view Primary hard disk ribbon cable ee 4
158. arefully Caution Use only a Nortel Networks approved replacement Contact your account representative for the current list of approved replacement parts Warning Use care when removing or inserting the advanced function tray Do not N forcefully remove or insert the advanced function tray You could damage or stretch the cables Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static N discharge Always wear a ground wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container or work area P0993133 03 Chapter 6 Prepare Hardware for Maintenance or Upgrades 157 Use the flow chart shown in Figure 85 as a summary guide to maintain the advanced function tray Figure 85 Advanced function tray replacement overview If possible do a software b Perform BCM Insert the maintenance advanced function setup tray Remove the advanced function Restore unit to tray operation Remove hard disk Check LEDs Install new hard disk in replacement AFT END Remove the advanced function tray Use this procedure to remove the advanced function tray from the BCM400 platform base chassis Warning Use care when removing or inserting the advanced function tray Do not forcefully remove or insert the advanced function tray You could damage or stretch the cables
159. around the site the number and type of RPIs depend on where you place and how you power the base stations Use Table 26 to determine how many base stations and how many PSUS you need for the number of base stations Table 26 RPI Requirements 1 8 1 RPI 8 1 PSU 9 16 1 RPI 16 2 PSUs 17 24 1 RPI 16 and 1 RPI 8 3 PSUs 25 32 2 RPI 16 4 PSUs Mount the RPI unit Use the following guidelines to mount the RPI unit e Provide adequate ventilation to prevent overheating Leave a clearance of a minimum of 125 mm 5 in around the RPI e To install two RPIs one above the other leave a clearance of a minimum of 300 mm 12 in between them to provide acceptable ventilation and to prevent overheating Install RPIs a minimum of 300 mm 12 in from the ceiling P0993133 03 Chapter 12 Install Companion or DECT Systems 253 Use this procedure to mount the RPI unit 1 Partially install two 10 50 mm 2 in screws using the dimensions shown in Figure 162 Figure 162 RPI mounting holes 25 mm 325 mm 1 in moss 13 in J fF A K 300 mm 12 in S 2 Open the cover with a screwdriver Push the screwdriver in and then down to release the latch on the right side Remove the cover by lifting it up Refer to Figure 163 Figure 163 Open the RPI cover oOooooooo 3 Hang the RPI on the two screws Tighten the scre
160. ary sets This allows you to accommodate users who are mobile within the range of the system Companion handsets communication through base stations that are connected to DSMs on the Business Communications Manager You can install a maximum of 32 handsets per DSM since the handsets can use either of the B channels Mobility Services by Region on page 303 lists the region profiles that can accommodate the Companion system Companion sets default to DNs in the 565 to 596 DN range and use the DN type Companion P0993133 03 Chapter 11 Install Telephones and Peripherals 247 The following documentation is available for this system e A site survey is required before you can install this system When you purchase the Companion system you are provided with deployment documentation that will assist you in planning base station locations e Refer to Chapter 12 Install Companion or DECT Systems on page 249 for installation instructions e The handset vendors provide a user guide with each set that describes the handset features DECT Systems A DECT media bay module provides a pathway for a maximum of 32 cordless handsets to access the Business Communications Manager The handsets can either be twinned with stationary sets or they can act as independent sets Up to eight base stations can be deployed around a site Each base station connects to a port on the DECT media bay module which provides both trunk BRI and station m
161. ase function tray bezel on page 154 Continue to the next step of this procedure when complete 9 Insert all connectors in the correct locations on the base function tray face 10 Restore the Business Communications Manager to operation Refer to Restart the System after Maintenance on page 147 for details Continue to the next step of this procedure when complete 11 This procedure is complete Installation and Maintenance Guide 238 Chapter 10 Replace Data Cards and Processing Hardware Replace the Clock Calendar Battery The clock calendar battery supplies the power required to keep the CMOS information current if there is a power failure Figure 153 provides an overview of the process of replacing this component Warning You must replace the battery with a CR2032 3v Maxell coin cell battery Do N not use any other manufacturer because this may invalidate the safety approval of the Business Communications Manager and possibly cause a fire or explosion Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static discharge Always wear a ground wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container Figure 158 Battery replacement overview Do a software shutdown Set up unit for Install maintenance new battery WARNING facesu CAREFULLY p lift battery off motherboard Restore unit to operation
162. ations Manager from the public network This trunk must have disconnect supervision to allow the trunk to be set to auto answer which provides the remote access portal Ground T1 groundstart trunk These lines offer the same features as loop start trunks but are used when the local service provider does not support disconnect supervision for digital loop start trunks Ground start trunks work with T1 only By configuring lines as ground start the system will be able to recognize when a call is released at the far end E amp M T1 and E amp M This type of trunk line is used to create simple network connections to other phone systems This trunk always operates in a disconnected supervised mode P0993133 03 System Region Attributes 307 Table 45 BRI and PRI line types DTM and BRI modules Continued Digital trunk types Description PRI ISDN interface with 23 B channels and 1 D channel at 1 544 MBps in Europe 30 B channels and 2 D channels at 2 048 Mbps This is the module that controls system timing These lines give you incoming and outgoing access to an ISDN network and are auto answer trunks by default These lines provide a fast accurate and reliable means of sending and receiving data images text and voice information using PRI lines allows for faster transmission speeds and the addition of a variety of powerful business applications including remote LAN access video confere
163. ay modules MBMs The MBMs connect with external devices to implement various types of voice trunks and stations Install the MBMs in the media bay module bays in the BCM200 BCM400 base platforms and the expansion unit There are three types of media bay modules Twelve media bay modules available as optional equipment as shown in Table 8 Installation and Maintenance Guide 72 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware Table 8 Media bay module list Faceplate Module type Media bay module name acronym Reference Trunk media bay Digital trunk interface DTM Digital trunk media bay module module on page 75 Caller ID trunk CLID 4 line trunk CTM 4 Caller ID trunk media bay module on page 76 Caller ID trunk CLID 8 line trunk CTM 8 Caller ID trunk media bay module on page 76 ISDN BRI S T Interface ISDN BRI Basic rate interface media bay module on page 77 Station media bay 16 digital station interface DSI double DSM 16 Digital station media bay module density module DSM on page 78 32 digital station interface DSI double DSM 32 Digital station media bay density module DSM on page 78 Combination CTM4 x DSM16 4X16 4X16 Media Bay Module on page 79 Analog Station Interface ASM 8 Analog station media bay module on page 80 Specialized media DECT Base Station Module DECT8 Digital enhanced cordless bay module telecommunications DECT media bay module on page 81 DECT Base Stat
164. base station provides the radio link between the Business Communications Manager through a station media bay module to the portable handsets three handsets per base station e Portable handsets based on T7316 M7310 functionality including six line buttons and a two line display NetVision system components The NetVision and NetVision Data telephones provide an internet telephone connection to the Business Communications Manager These eMobility wireless telephones are based on an enhanced implementation of H 323 referred to as H 323 and IEEE 802 11 protocol for wireless LANs The NetVision system consists of the following components e Access point provides the radio link between the NetVision telephones and an internet connection This hardware is ordered separately and comes with complete installation instructions This component is not specific to Business Communications Manager P0993133 03 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware 89 e Portable handset communicates through the internet to the Business Communications Manager This handset is wireless However the access point through which it communications connects to the internet therefore the handset appears as an IP telephone to the Business Communications Manager Handset administration A Business Communications Manager running version 2 5 Feature Pack 1 or newer software provides a link to the NetVi
165. before handling modules or any components that are part of the Business Communications Manager hardware This section describes the recommended procedure for shutting down the Business Communications Manager prior to installing new media bay modules 1 Ifyou are adding or replacing a module in an active system follow these steps first Access the Unified Manager b Choose System C Click the Logoff menu and then click Shutdown d Click the Yes button e Wait until the Status changes to Complete It is safe to turn off the system f Click the Done button g Exit the Unified Manager 2 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 3 Ensure the cables connected to the front of the Business Communications Manager and the expansion unit are clearly marked as to how they are connected 4 Remove the cables from all the media bay modules and the MSC on the Business Communications Manager base function tray and the expansion unit if attached 5 Disconnect the Business Communications Manager and expansion unit power cords from the ac outlet P0993133 03 Chapter 4 Install remove or replace the Media Bay Modules 111 Install a media bay module in the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis Use this procedure to install a media bay module in the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis Only install the media bay modules when the system is powered
166. ber For example if you assign DS30 2 to an DSM 32 it uses DS30 2 and 3 However you cannot choose DS30 7 for the DSM32 module because the second level of DSM lines would not be accessible The same applies to DS30 6 if your system is set to a 3 5 split Refer to DSM switch settings on page 338 DSM 32 modules can be set to either single or double density When they are set to double density the module only requires one DS30 bus The DIP switches on the 4X16 module are used to set the DS30 designation and offset for the CTM part of the module The module automatically assigns an additional DS30 for the 16 DSM lines However you cannot choose DS30 7 for the 4X16 module because the DSM lines would not be accessible The same applies to DS30 6 if your system is set to a 3 5 split Refer to 4X16 switch settings on page 336 Companion configure the DSM or DSMs handling Business Communications Manager Companion to DS30 DS30 6 or 7 You must change the module number of any trunk media bay modules configured to module 6 or 7 to an unassigned module number to prevent conflicts with Companion Note Companion DS30 split restrictions If you choose a 3 5 channel split for your system the second module cannot be assigned Therefore you can add a maximum of 16 Companion base stations which support a maximum of 30 handsets This means you can only use a DSM 16 on DS30 6 You cannot assign a DSM 32 If your system is set to full double de
167. ble Install conduit for the antenna cable according to local building and wiring codes Screw the antenna bracket to the wall so that the antenna is vertical on the exterior wall of the building Loosen the nut on the antenna Slide the antenna into the slot of the bracket and tighten the nut Refer to Figure 171 P0993133 03 Chapter 12 Install Companion or DECT Systems 267 Figure 171 Antenna with antenna bracket USA or jd i 6 Feed the coaxial cable through the wall to the lightning surge protector on the interior wall 7 This procedure is complete Install a lightning surge protector USA Use the procedure in this section to install the lightning surge protector The surge protector prevents damage to the Companion components due to electrical surges caused by lighting 1 Install the lightning surge protector on the interior wall as close as possible to the entry point of the coaxial cable from the outdoor antenna Before you connect the ground lead to the lightning surge protector attach the ground lead to an approved ground Refer to the Wiring information tips box on the next page Route and connect the coaxial cable from the outdoor antenna to the lightning surge protector Route and connect the coaxial cable from the lightning surge protector to the appropriate base station connector Refer to Figure 172 on page 268 Installation and Maintenance Guide 268 Ch
168. ble because you cannot use double density modules to deploy Companion Table 65 DSM 16 and DSM32 double density switch settings for new 3 0 systems A B A B A B A B A B A B p To assign these Select Enter these switch settings DNs DS30 bus to DSM 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 A DSM1 B DSM2 3 off on on on on onjA 221 236 off on off on on on B 237 252 3 off on on on on off A 253 268 off on off on on off B 269 284 off on on on off on A 285 300 off on off on off on B 301 316 5 off on on on off off A 317 332 off on off on off off B 333 348 off on on off on on A 349 364 off on off off on on B 365 380 Jum off on on off on off A 381 396 off on off off on off B 397 412 The extensions listed are based on a three digit DN with a Start DN of 221 If your system has longer DNs or a different Start DN enter the range in the blank column If your system is configured with a 3 5 channel split you cannot use DS30 7 Available only on systems set to FDD Modules cannot be set to double density on systems set to PDD Refer to the previous chart for the switch settings for single density and PDD Available only on systems set to FDD with a 2 6 DS30 split Modules cannot be set to double density on systems set to PDD Refer to the previous chart for the switch settings for single density and PDD To as
169. cate through a stationary base station which is wired to a digital station media bay module on the Business Communications Manager Depending on your system configuration you can have up to 64 sets assigned to your system For installation instructions refer to Companion Hardware Installation on page 251 Provides two line display but no line memory or display buttons The handset accesses a restricted set of system features DECT region specific provides cordless access to the system through a DECT media bay module The cordless handsets can be twinned with a stationary set or configured to act as an independent set You can register up to 32 sets on a module Each Business Communications Manager system can support one DECT module Has display but no line display or memory buttons and has access to a restricted list of system features For base station installation and handset registration instructions refer to the DECT Installation and Maintenance Guide Norstar M7100 Norstar M7208 one line display eight memory buttons with indicators Norstar M7208N UK and Australia only same features Audio Conference Unit ACU provides large room audio conferencing The keypad provides many of the set features of the basic Norstar M series telephones without display or memory buttons This set comes with three microphones Installation instructions are provided by the vendor T7406 Cordl
170. cations Manager system The front bezel of the FEM has six connectors These connections are made using fiber cables between the FEM module and the Norstar expansion modules Beside each connector an LED lights when the fiber port is enabled P0993133 03 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware 83 The module has port status LEDs beside each port as well as the usual power and status LEDs Figure 47 shows the front of the FEM module Each enabled port consumes one DS30 channel Figure 47 Fiber expansion media bay module FEM LEDs FEM EI SES amp Port 4 Power LED Status LED Port 1 Port 5 Port 2 Port 6 Port 3 Digital Drop amp Insert MUX DDIM The Digital Drop amp Insert MUX DDIM module supports 1 x MUX TI trunk with a user defined combination of voice and data channels The DDI MUX enables a Business Communications Manager system to share its connection to a Universal T1 network with a local area network LAN The DDI MUX provides the functionality of a DTM media bay module T1 digital lines only splits the incoming T1 line so that some of the lines are used for voice traffic and some of the lines are used for data traffic provides either the CSU Channel Service Unit or DSU Data Service Unit functionality to support connections to data terminal equipment DTE such as a router or a bridge conn
171. cations System Use the LAN WAN or serial port to connect to your computer and use the Unified Manager to perform configuration If you run multiple operations on your computer we recommend that you use Windows NT or 2000 to ensure optimal performance with the Unified Manager If your computer is using Windows 95 98 the interaction can be slower if you attempt to run more than one application P0993133 03 Chapter 2 Auxilliary Requirements and Installation Process Overview 93 Figure 50 Installation Process Overview Figure 50 provides an overview of the installation process Use the overview information as a quick reference to prepare the Business Communications Manager for installation The overview information provides the correct installation sequence Select the media bay modules you require optional expansion unit Set the media bay module switches Install the media bay modules Power up the base and expansion units Installation and initialization overview The number of telephone lines and extensions you have determines the number and type of media bay modules you need For instructions about how to select the media bay modules refer to Chapter B Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings on page 313 The Business Communications Manager base function tray performs the main computing tasks It contains the telephony and data networking component
172. ced function tray on page 159 Restore the Business Communications Manager to operation Refer to Restart the System after Maintenance on page 147 Set up the hard disk a Initialize the hard disk Refer to Initialize the Hard Disk on page 176 b After the disk is initialized restore your data from your backups If you did not backup your keycodes re enter them This procedure is complete Initialize the Hard Disk The Business Communications Manager system is normally initialized prior to shipment However if you have to replace the hard drive in a Business Communications Manager you must re initialize the Business Communications Manager After you replace the hard disk and the system has booted up perform the initialization as follows 1 Make sure the Status LED on the Business Communications Manager is lit This LED that all services have started and the Business Communications Manager is operating correctly Attach the base function tray and a computer through the serial port as described in Null modem cable setup on page 138 Enter the terminal emulation program as described in Display the configuration menus on page 139 f the hard disk does not require initialization the main menu appears Refer to Figure 102 P0993133 03 Chapter 7 Hard Disk Replacement Procedures 177 Figure 102 Main Menu screen of Telnet 10 10 10 1 Mm x Connect Edit Terminal Help MeSH SS HS HS HS HS HS HS HS
173. ch port also occupies one full DS30 channel Therefore if you have a fully configured six module Norstar system to convert you need to turn on all six ports on the FEM and therefore no other module can be installed in the Business Communications Manager Note The FEM module only supports connections to the Norstar trunk and station expansion modules To turn on a fiber port set the DIP switch for the corresponding DS30 bus as shown in Table 67 For example if you want to use fiber port 2 turn on DIP switch 2 DS30 3 After the module is installed an LED lights beside each active fiber port Table 67 shows the switch for each fiber port Table 67 FEM switch settings Choose a port Set this switch to turn on the port This DS30 bus gets to turn on 1 2 3 4 5 6 assigned N 2 ON 3 ON 4 ON 5 ON 6 ON Te A aj A N If your system is configured with a 3 5 channel split DS30 7 is not available Note If you turn on all six switches you are using all the DS30 numbers In this case the Business Communications Manager can support only the FEM module All other media bays must be empty Warning Do not attempt to turn on ports requiring a DS30 bus that is already in service N to another media bay module located on the same Business Communications Manager Doing this results in unpredictable behavior with both modules P099
174. charge Always wear a ground wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container Warning Use care when removing or inserting the Base function tray Do not forcefully A remove or insert the base function tray You could damage or stretch the cables Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static N discharge Always wear a ground wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container Use the following steps to remove the base function tray from the platform base chassis 1 If you still have access to the Unified Manager shut down the system using the Shutdown command For details refer to Shut down the system software on page 145 Otherwise skip to step 2 2 Setup the server for maintenance as described in Shut down the system hardware on page 146 Disconnect the Business Communications Manager from the AC power outlet Disconnect any connectors from the front of the base function tray Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 6 Remove the platform base chassis top cover Refer to Remove the platform base chassis top cover on page 161 Remove the base function tray latch screws and place in a safe location Move the base function tray latches to the unlocked position See Figure 80 Grasp the base function tray latches and partially remove
175. coaxial cable 3 Connect the antenna to the appropriate base station radio Note The coaxial cable length must not exceed 10 m 33 ft 4 This procedure is complete P0993133 03 Chapter 12 Install Companion or DECT Systems 271 Install an indoor omnidirectional antenna Canada Use the procedure in this section to install an indoor omnidirectional antenna Canada only Use the following guidelines to install an indoor omnidirectional antenna e Use the bracket supplied to install the antenna on a wall or ceiling This bracket provides the necessary clearance between the floor or wall and the antenna e Mount the bracket so that the external antenna is vertical The recommended installation position on a wall is halfway between the floor and the ceiling Figure 174 shows the two methods of installing the indoor omnidirectional external antenna Figure 174 Indoor omnidirectional external antenna Canada Co axial Cable cable clamp Ceiling mount installation Wall mount installation Co axial cable Cable clamp Insert the antenna in the bracket so that the antenna is vertical Use two screws to install the bracket to the wall or ceiling Clamp the cable to the mounting surface to prevent cable stress on the coaxial cable A WO 2a Connect the external antenna to the appropriate base station Note The length of the coaxial cable must not exceed 10 m 33 ft gt
176. connected together contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority Do not try to make the connections yourself The Business Communications Manager or expansion unit power cord is 1 5 m 5 ft long You can connect the power cord to a power bar with a maximum length of 2 m 6 5 ft including power bar You must use a power bar approved by an appropriate National Test Body with a third wire ground Do not use an extension cord between the platform base chassis and the power bar or between the power bar and the electrical outlet The cable between the Business Communications Manager expansion unit and the Business Communications Manager is supplied with the expansion unit Do not use any other cables or connectors Internal Wiring Requirements This section describes the requirements for a digital loop and an analog loop within the system Digital Loop The following parameters must be met for a digital loop e one two or three twisted pair cable s per telephone e dc loop resistance of less than 64 Q e cable length 0 5 mm or 24 AWG less than 300 m 975 ft e use of a station auxiliary power supply SAPS for loops 300 m 975 ft to 1200 m 3900 ft In North America the SAPS must be a CSA or UL approved Class 2 power source In Europe the SAPS must be a Class II power source and CE marked no bridge taps Analog Loop The following parameters must be met for an analog loop e maximum dc loop resistance of 208 Q
177. control the use of the channel by your choice of using either a 2 6 or 3 5 DS30 bus split This is set when you run the Quick Start Wizard at the initial startup of the system For more details about deciding which DS30 bus configuration you want for your system refer to Determining module channel requirements on page 320 and to the chapter on configuring MSC Resources in the Business Communications Manager 3 0 Programming Operations Guide Installation and Maintenance Guide 60 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware Main PEC Ils The Business Communications Manager 3 0 uses PEC IIIs to deliver increased capacity for digital signal processing for voice mail call center FAX VoIP trunks IP telephony and dialup ISDN WAN The BCM200 platform uses one PEC III card expandable to 2 The BCM400 platform uses two PEC IIs expandable to 4 to accommodate increased requirements for media processing Refer to the chapter on configuring MSC Resources in the Business Communications Manager 3 0 Programming Operations Guide card The main card contains several field replaceable units FRUs such as the RAM modem card and CMOS battery A riser card set at right angles to the main card provides connections for the MSC and field installed wide area network card In North America only an embedded modem provides connection for a backup analog trunk Figure 20 shows the layout of the main card as insta
178. cover ccc eee eee 163 Chapter 7 Hard Disk Replacement Procedures 000e essen eee eee 165 Remove a Hard Disk lt 2 eR Soe ee hd REEERERSEGE ange dh alate ete 166 Remove a hard disk cage from a BCM200 platform base chassis 166 Remove a hard disk cage from a BCM400 platform base chassis 168 Remove a hard disk from the hard disk cage naana eee eee 169 Installa New Hard Disk e 244 xs tae Oded af CLePFUSPBe bade Re tev Y eg ote 171 Install a hard disk into a hard disk cage sssellelesssss 171 Install a hard disk cage in a BCM200 platform base chassis 173 Install a hard disk cage in a BCM400 platform base chassis 175 Initialize the Hard Disk 0 0000 es 176 Chapter 8 Install or Replace a Cooling Fan 0 000 e eee eee eee 179 Cooling Fan Replacement Process 0 000 e eee eee eee eens 179 Installation and Maintenance Guide 20 Contents Troubleshooting Fans 00 A tee 180 Remove a BCM400 cooling fan 00 000 cece 180 Install a BCM400 cooling fan 0 000 cee cee 182 Remove a BCM200 cooling fan 0 0 00 cece 185 Install the BCM200 cooling fan 000 0 cee eee 187 Remove an expansion unit fan 0 eee 188 Install an expansion unit fan s ceteran T nian AE eae 190 Chapter 9 Replace or Upgrade a Power Supply 2000e cece eee eee eee 191 Replace a Standard Powe
179. cover Precautions Before you replace or update any hardware on the Business Communications Manager system disconnect the system from the trunk lines Remove the top cover to access the standard power supply I O card or backplane components For fan hard disk or power supply maintenance remove the appropriate chassis panels Remove the base function tray to replace any PCI cards Remove the advanced function tray from the BCM400 platform base chassis to replace or upgrade the hard disk If applicable remove the platform base chassis from a server rack Observe the following precautions when working inside the Business Communications Manager system Maintain a clean and static safe site Danger Electrical shock warning J Disconnect the power cord telephone cables and network cables before opening the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis Read and follow installation instructions carefully Danger Electrical shock warning J Partially remove the power supply module from the power supply cage Do not completely remove the power supply module IMPORTANT Wait several seconds before removing the power supply module completely from the power supply cage to ensure complete electrical discharge Caution Use only a Nortel Networks approved replacement Contact your account representative for the current list of approved replacement parts Installation and Maintenance Guide 144 Chapter 6 Pre
180. cted to For future reference put a checkmark beside the ports where there are sets installed Note The following table is based on a system with three digit DNs with a start DN of 221 If your system has longer DNs the system automatically adds a 2 for each additional DN length unit i e 221 becomes 2221 Appendix C Media Bay Module Combinations on page 345 contains a blank table to use if you changed the start DN on your system Table 25 Cross referencing ports and DNs 26 White Blue DN 221 DN 237 DN 253 DN 269 DN 285 DN 301 1 Blue White Port 201 Port 301 Port 401 Port 501 Port 601 Port 701 28 White Green DN 223 DN 239 DN 255 DN 271 DN 287 DN 303 3 Green White Port 203 Port 303 Port 403 Port 503 Port 603 Port 703 30 White Slate DN 225 DN 241 DN 257 DN 273 DN 289 DN 305 5 Slate White Port 205 Port 305 Port 405 Port 505 Port 605 Port 705 32 Red Orange DN 227 DN 243 DN 259 DN 275 DN 291 DN 307 7 Orange Red Port207 Port 307 Port 407 Port 507 Port 607 Port 707 34 Red Brown DN 229 DN 245 DN 261 DN 277 DN 293 DN 309 9 Brown Red Port 209 Port 309 Port 409 Port 509 Port 609 Port 709 P0993133 03 Chapter 11 Install Telephones and Peripherals 245 Table 25 Cross referencing ports and DNs Continued Black Blue DN 231 DN 247 DN 263 DN 279 DN 295 D
181. ction tray into the platform base chassis See Install the base function tray on page 151 Continue to the next step of this procedure when complete Restore the Business Communications Manager to operation For details refer to Restart the System after Maintenance on page 147 Continue to the next step of this procedure when complete This procedure is complete Installation and Maintenance Guide 242 Chapter 10 Replace Data Cards and Processing Hardware P0993133 03 243 Chapter 11 Install Telephones and Peripherals You can add telephones and peripherals before or after you initialize your system Set configuration is determined by the which station module you are using and what DS30 channel settings you chose for the module Refer to Chapter 13 Install Analog Terminal Adapters on page 277 The system creates default settings for the telephone DN records when it is first initialized The settings are based on which telephony profile you chose To change these settings use the Unified Manager application Specific instructions for configuring telephone operation through the Unified Manager are contained in the Business Communications Manager 3 0 Programming Operations Guide Note Programming occurs on the set when the Business Communications Manager recognizes the set on the system System Telephones The Business Communications Manager system supports a number of analog digital IP tel
182. dia bay modules required 0 0c e eee eee 315 Matching modules to DS30 channel capacity 321 Possible trunk media bay module DIP switch settings 328 Possible station media bay module DIP switch settings 329 DIM switch settings Td i2 sobirhilisessrerceSieeerest 2ereser 332 DTM switch settings North American PRI 00005 332 DTM switch settings E1 and UK PRI 0000 000 ee 333 DDIM switch settings lllllsies ee 333 BRIM S T switch settings llis 334 CTM and CTM8 switch settings 0 2 0c cee eee eee 335 4X16 switch settings lille 336 ASM8 settings for upgraded 2 5 systems and new 3 0 systems 337 DSM 16 DSM 16 and DSM 32 DSM32 single density switch settings for 2 5 systems upgraded to 3 0 339 DSM 16 and DSM32 double density switch settings for 2 5 systems upgraded t0 3 0 0 cee eee 340 DSM 16 DSM 16 and DSM 32 DSM32 single density switch settings for new 3 0 systems 341 DSM 16 and DSM32 double density switch settings for new 3 0 systems 0 cee 342 DECT module settings r ey tiiran eE RORE EE EEEE E O AA 343 FEMswitch setings narar E re EXE T E ENE T ees 344 CTMs combined with 4X16 modules n nananana eaaa 345 DSM combined with 2 DTMs and 2 ASMs 2 00000000 346 All station modules set for double density llsus 347 Two double densi
183. disk cage Remove a hard disk cage from a BCM200 platform base chassis Use this procedure to remove the hard disk cage from the BCM200 base platform chassis Use this procedure to remove a BCM200 RAID upgrade kit Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static discharge Always wear a ground wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container 1 If you still have access to the Unified Manager shut down the system by following the instructions in Shut down the system software on page 145 Otherwise skip to step 2 P0993133 03 Chapter 7 Hard Disk Replacement Procedures 167 2 Setup the server for maintenance as described in Shut down the system hardware on page 146 Continue to the next step of this procedure when complete Disconnect the Business Communications Manager from the wall power outlet Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 5 Access the hard disk from a panel at the rear of the platform base chassis Remove the four hard disk access panel screws see Figure 4 on page 45 Place the panel and screws in a safe location 6 Remove the BCM200 platform base chassis top cover see Remove the platform base chassis top cover on page 161 Continue to the next step of this procedure when complete 7 Place your fingers under the tab located at the bottom re
184. dle components Always place the components in static free container Warning Power supply cable management is critical Cable damage can result due to loose or incorrectly positioned cables 1 Ensure the new power supply is an auto adjust power supply Insert a tie wrap in the power supply support bracket lanclet Place the standard power supply top down on a flat surface Place the power supply support bracket on the bottom surface of the power supply 4 Gather together and route the main card 20 Pin power cable P1 and the 12v power cable P9 at the tie wrap 5 Secure the the power cables to the power supply support bracket with the tie wrap from step 2 see Figure 128 Figure 128 Fasten the power supply support bracket cables 7w Place the support gt Insert a tie wrap Ca Gather and route the power J prackebon ihe power s 3 inthe power PN cables at the tie wrap supply d supply support bracket lanclet Place power pets upside _ down on flat surface yc Secure the power cables to j the power supply bracket with the tie wrap Installation and Maintenance Guide 202 Chapter 9 Replace or Upgrade a Power Supply 6 Insert the standard power supply and support bracket in the platform base chassis The power supply support bracket rests on the MSC guide bracket on one side and the chassis wall on the other 7 Ensure the mounting holes in the power supply support bracket al
185. dle power cables P2 and P3 along with auxiliary cable P7 8 together with a grommet see Figure 138 Insert the P2 P3 and auxiliary cables into the cable slot on the chassis secured with the grommet 15 This procedure is complete Upgrade to a redundant power supply Use the procedures in this section to upgrade a BCM400 platform base chassis currently equipped with a standard power supply with a redundant power supply Figure 131 provides an overview of the steps required to upgrade your Business Communications Manager BCM400 system from a standard power supply to a redundant power supply Note A Business Communications Manager expansion unit with a standard power supply cannot be upgraded You must replace the expansion unit chassis Note When you install a redundant power supply you must also install a redundant cooling fan included with the redundancy upgrade kit Note When you install a redundant power supply you must also remove the jumper installed in the PSU Status connector RPS output signaling connector on the I O card Installation and Maintenance Guide 204 Chapter 9 Replace or Upgrade a Power Supply Figure 131 Redundant power supply upgrade overview Shut the system down Install redundant power supply Insert both modules into power supply cage cage Set u
186. duction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware 53 The media bay module MBM backplane provides the media bay module component interface to the power supply and main card The media bay module backplane mounts at the rear of the media bay module bays and is a non replaceable chassis component Figure 13 illustrates the media bay module backplane and connectors for the BCM200 platform Figure 14 illustrates the media bay module backplane and connectors for the BCM400 platform Figure 13 BCM200 media bay module backplane Front view Rear view put A R EON a 20920 0g SA EE hs Shy MBM backplane ORE e connector to M ORS MSC MBM pe ra MBM backplane e COONS connector to power supply Figure 14 illustrates the BCM400 media bay module backplane and connectors Figure 14 BCM400 media bay module backplane Front view Rear view MBM backplane connector to MSC MBM backplane connector to power supply PSD I MBM CED backplane SEXE WO connectors Installation and Maintenance Guide 54 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware Base Function Tray Component Hardware The base function tray hardware controls all data and telephony tasks such as call processing voice messaging and data routing The base function tray contains the following hardware components e 1x Base function tray chass
187. e reconnecting the cables to the media bay modules Danger Electrical shock hazards Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunications network and ac mains are possible with this equipment To minimize risk to service personnel and users the Business Communications Manager system must be connected to an outlet with a third wire ground In addition all unused slots must have blank faceplates installed The covers on all units must be in place at the completion of any servicing Figure 67 on page 118 provides an overview of the process for connecting trunk and station wiring to the Business Communications Manager media bay modules Installation and Maintenance Guide 118 Chapter 4 Install remove or replace the Media Bay Modules Figure 67 Trunk and station wiring overview Trunk and station modules Media bay modules installed Read warnings Wire cables to telco demarcation block Connect cables to appropriate trunk modules Wire internal 25 pair cables to station set distribution BIX block for your building Connect amphenol cable to R i appropriate station modules Continue with setup procedures Module Wiring Warnings A Warning Electrical shock warning The Business Communications Manager media bay modules have been Safety approved for installation into Business Communications Manager base units and expansion units It is the res
188. e Expansion Unit to the Business Communications Manager After the expansion unit has been installed in the desired location use the supplied DS256 cable to connect it to the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis 1 Plug one end of the cable into the DS256 connector on the Business Communications Manager expansion unit Refer to Figure 59 P0993133 03 Chapter 3 Install the Business Communications Manager amp Expansion Unit Platform Base Chassis 107 Figure 59 DS256 connector on the expansion unit NORTEL NETWORKS DS256 connector 2 Plug the other end of the cable into the DS256 connector on the faceplate of the MSC in the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis Refer to Figure 60 Figure 60 Business Communications Manager platform base chassis DS258 connector f cms s 1 Aux 3 4 F oo Lael lL F5 iiu 1 1 1 1Z r F y ZEN mE s me d e e E osm 2 meee J I Js ye M in n TM Tm 00000000 00000000 TI L E M
189. e Ifyou are installing an outdoor antenna on a metal surface greater than 18 cm 7 in in diameter position the antenna perpendicular to the surface e When running the coaxial cable inside or outside be careful not to damage the cable which affects its performance The minimum recommended bending radius is 20 mm 0 8 in e Always ensure that the antenna is clear of any adjacent obstruction or metal objects If you use more than one outdoor antenna at a cell center separate the antennas at by least 0 5 m 20 in to avoid radio interference problems e Use RG 58 U coaxial cables to connect the antennas to the base stations Caution Use only passive antennas to connect to the Companion base stations The coaxial cable you use to connect the external antenna to a Companion base station must have an impedance of 50 ohms Installation and Maintenance Guide 270 Chapter 12 Install Companion or DECT Systems Installing an Indoor Directional Antenna The indoor directional antenna has a backplate that allows for easy installation on a wall The antenna is installed half way between the floor and the ceiling For some applications for example a stairwell you can install the antenna on the ceiling 1 Use four screws to install the antenna Refer to Figure 173 Figure 173 Indoor directional external antenna Canada 4 eo 2 Fasten the cable to the mounting surface to prevent stress on the
190. e building Connect the lightning surge protector to ground before you connect the coaxial cable Antenna installation United States of America The following points cover special information about installations in the United States of America The outdoor antenna connectors on the base station are special proprietary BNC connectors Antennas are supplied with cables attached and terminated with special proprietary BNC plugs to join with the connector on the base station Cables are not supplied with outdoor antennas Installation and Maintenance Guide 266 Chapter 12 Install Companion or DECT Systems Install an outdoor antenna USA Use the procedure in this section to install an outdoor antenna Perform the following before you install an outdoor antenna Locate the antenna on the external wall of the building e Keep the outdoor antenna as close as possible to the base station connected to it The base station must always be inside the building The recommended installation height for the antenna is 13 to 16 ft above ground e Always install a lightning surge protector between an outdoor antenna and a base station Refer to Figure 170 Figure 170 Installed antenna and lightning surge protectors USA j Antenna Mounting bracket Back to back proprietary BNC connectors F7 Lightning surge arrestor with mounting bracket 1 Make a hole for the coaxial ca
191. e connected to an outlet with a third wire ground In addition all unused slots must have blank faceplates installed The covers on all units must be in place at the completion of any servicing Warning Leakage currents N Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of high leakage currents becoming available on metal system surfaces during power line fault events near network lines These leakage currents normally safely flow to Protective Earth ground via the power cord System shutdown You must disconnect the media bay module cables from the system before disconnecting the power cord from a grounded outlet System startup You must reconnect the power cords to a grounded outlet before reconnecting the cables to the media bay modules Installation and Maintenance Guide 128 Chapter 5 Business Communications Manager System Startup Check Power and Wiring The Business Communications Manager system is available as North American and International versions Ensure that the power supply is correct for your location e 2 0 hardware has a standard power supply which requires manual adjustment for the voltage by setting a switch located on the face of the power supply e 2 5 and 3 0 systems have standard power supplies and redundant power supplies which adjust automatically to the required voltage Follow this procedure to check the voltage and wiring and power up the system 1 Check all wiring before connecting powe
192. e end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface Remove the platform base chassis top Refer to Remove the platform base chassis top cover on page 161 Continue to the next step of this procedure when complete Installation and Maintenance Guide 228 Chapter 10 Replace Data Cards and Processing Hardware 11 12 13 14 15 16 Disconnect any connectors from the front of the base function tray Partially remove the base function tray from the platform base chassis See Remove the base function tray on page 150 Do not exert force on the DS30 cables and connectors Ensure you do not pinch stretch or damage any cables Remove the WAN card if applicable see Remove the WAN card on page 219 Continue to the next step when complete Disconnect the DS30 cables from the MSC Remove the base function tray completely from the platform base chassis Ensure you do not pinch stretch or damage any cables Refer to Remove the base function tray on page 150 Place the base function tray on a flat clean and static free surface Continue to the next step of this procedure when complete Remove the base function tray bezel See Remove the base function tray bezel on page 153 Continue to the next step when complete Loosen and remove the PCI cover plate screw use a 2 Phillips screwdriver see Figure 146 Place the PCI cover plate screw in a safe location Remov
193. e modem components Use the modem connection to manage the Business Communications Manager system from a different location e provide dialup backup for a WAN card Installation and Maintenance Guide 64 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware Figure 26 Modem card and interface Modem card LS RJ11 card interface a To Main card modem fo socket connector Modem card d 1L RJ11 connector pin guide Fo E cee on BFT A o a NR S GZ Z l Main card connector BFT mount points l O Interface card The I O interface card is a provides signal junction between the Base function tray hard disk power supply and cooling system Figure 27 shows the I O interface card and connections Figure 27 O interface card PSU Status RPS output signalling connector BCM200 MSC guide bracket Chassis Fan 2 connector Chassis Fan 1 connector 20 pin power supply connector BFT connector PSU AUX connector Secondary IDE controller IDE1 P0993133 03 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware 65 Platform Power Supply The BCM200 and BCM400 STD base platforms use a switched power supply Internal cabling routes to the I O card media bay backplane and hard disk External cabling extends to the line power supply outlet Figure 28 illustrates the standard platform power supply
194. e mounting plate Insert the plastic plug into the base of the cover to keep moisture out Feed the coaxial cable through the wall to the surge protector on the interior wall o ON Oo This procedure is complete Installation and Maintenance Guide 274 Chapter 12 Install Companion or DECT Systems Install a lightning surge protector Canada Use the procedure in this section to install a lightning surge protector Canada only Install the lightning surge protector for the outdoor omnidirectional external antenna to protect it from electrical surges The recommended lightning surge protector is part number A0382082 Refer to the installation instructions from the manufacturer for more details on its installation To install a lightning surge protector follow these steps 1 Install the surge protector on the interior wall as close as possible to the entry point of the coaxial cable from the outdoor antenna Figure 176 shows where to locate the surge protector Follow the installation instructions provided with the surge protector Figure 176 Install the lightning surge protector Canada Exterior wall Interior wall zero Copper plates a 3 Surge protector Co axial cable to base station le cl Co axial cable to Gable clamps outdoor external antenna Low impedance ground lead 2 Attach the ground lead to an approved ground before you connect the ground
195. e such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician P0993133 03 Network Connection Canada and US Table 1 Interface harmonized standards Interface Harmonized Standard Description CTM Industry Canada CS03 Analog terminal device FCC Part 68 DTM Industry Canada CS03 T1 and Primary Rate ISDN FCC Part 68 BRIM Industry Canada CS03 Basic Rate ISDN FCC Part 68 WAN Industry Canada CS03 T1 FCC Part 68 Hearing Aid Compatibility Business Communications Manager telephones are hearing aid compatible as defined in Section 68 316 of Part 68 FCC Rules Electromagnetic Compatibility Business Communications Manager equipment meets all FCC Part 15 Class A radiated and conducted emissions requirements Business Communications Manager does not exceed the Class A limits for radiated and conducted emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of Industry Canada Telephone Company Registration It is usually not necessary to call the telecommunications company with information on the equipment before connecting the Business Communications Manager system to the telephone network If the telecommunications company requires this information provide the following e telephone number s to which the system will be connected e FCC registration number on label affixed to Business Communications Manager e unive
196. e the PCI cover plate from the base function tray chassis see Figure 146 on page 220 Place the PCI cover plate in a safe location Remove the MSC Refer to Remove the media services card MSC on page 225 Continue to the next step of this procedure when complete Locate the modem card on the main card Carefully grasp the modem card edges with your finger tips Carefully pull the modem card away from the main card Place the modem card in a clean safe and static free location Figure 152 Modem card Base function tray face O O A Modem card T 17 Carefully grasp the modem card guide pin and remove Place the pin in a safe location 18 This procedure is complete P0993133 03 Chapter 10 Replace Data Cards and Processing Hardware 229 Install the modem card Use this procedure to install a modem card in a base function tray This procedure assumes the base function tray is not installed in the platform base chassis Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static discharge Always wear a ground wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Obtain a correct and functional modem card Disconnect the Business Communications Manager from the AC power outlet Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface
197. e upper BCM400 platform base chassis bay The advanced function tray slides out and away from the front of the chassis for hard disk maintenance RAID upgrade or exchange purposes Figure 8 illustrates the advanced function tray chassis and faceplate interfaces for the BCM400 standard STD and redundant feature option RFO platform configurations Figure 8 Advanced function tray Advanced function tray latch Advanced function tray chassis Status LEDs e RAID only Reset button Reserved bay Advanced function tray face with single hard disk Advanced function tray RFO configuration Hard disk cage Power supply Primary disk Primary disk y connector Reserved bay p Power supply a aoe Se connector M bet d RAID N card SS Mirror Hard disk ss disk IDE connector cage lift tab IDE connector P0993133 03 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware 51 BCM400 advanced function tray RAID status LEDs Three LEDs are located on the bezel face of the advanced function tray The LEDs show the current state of RAID hardware components The RAID status LEDs indicate monitoring of the following e Primary hard disk activity e Mirror hard disk activity e Card status activity Figure 9 Advanced function tray RAID status LEDs NEO aise Primary Mirror Alarm Reset NETWORKS Q Status e Platform Media Bay Module Bays and Backp
198. echargers Equipment for installing the platform base chassis For the installation you need the following equipment e rack mounting bracket e four rubber feet e Phillips screwdriver 2 e flat blade screwdriver e pliers e antistatic grounding strap e connecting tool e surge protector recommended e cables 25 pair cable with amphenol connectors P0993133 03 99 Chapter 3 Install the Business Communications Manager amp Expansion Unit Platform Base Chassis This chapter describes how to install the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis and expansion unit in your physical environment Install the Platform Base Chassis in a Rack The Business Communications Manager platform base chassis fits into a standard 19 inch equipment rack You can install the platform base chassis in the same rack as your other networking and telecommunications equipment Caution When installing the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis in arack do not stack units directly on top of one another in the rack Fasten each unit to the rack with the appropriate mounting brackets Mounting brackets cannot support multiple units Refer to Environment Checklist on page 95 for acceptable environmental conditions before selecting a location for the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis Caution For desk mount installations do not place anything directly on top of the Busin
199. ecific type of line and are not available to all regions Table 42 lists a cross reference between regions and the type of modules that can be used within the related area Table 42 Module availability by profile DSM16 CTM Region DSM32 ASM CTM8 4X16 BRI DTM DECT DDIM Australia v v v v v Caribbean Y v v v v v CALA Y Y v A v v Denmark Y v v v v France v v v v v Germany Y Y Y v v Global v v v v v v v Holland Y v v v v Installation and Maintenance Guide 304 System Region Attributes Table 42 Module availability by profile Continued DSM16 CTM Region DSM32 ASM CTM8 4X16 BRI DTM DECT DDIM Hong Kong v A v v v Y v Italy v v v v v North American v Y Y v A v v Norway Y Y Y v v PRC v A v v v v Spain Y Y Y v v Sweden v Y v v v Switzerland v v v v v Taiwan Y v Y v v v v United Kingdom Y v v Y v Trunk Availability by Region Different countries have different available trunk types Table 42 provides a cross reference between regions and available trunks types Table 43 Trunk availability by region Country PRI specific ETSI 30 channels analog Region BRI S T 2 4 BRI U2 4 NA 23channels Analog DID E amp M CLASS trunk card Australia Y v Y CALA v Y A v v v Caribbean v v Y v v v Denmark v v France v v v
200. ect the hardware components against damage from electro static discharge Always wear a ground wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container 1 Place the new fan in proper location in the platform base chassis Ensure the I O card connector cable is on the bottom Note Ensure the label of the new fan faces the back wall of the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis Airflow is out of the chassis as indicated by the arrows imprinted on the fan 2 Align the fan chassis mounting holes with the holes on the platform base chassis 3 Attach the fan to the platform base chassis using four snap rivets a Hold the fan in place and push the rivet collar through the fan access panel and fan chassis mounting holes b Insert the rivet pin into the rivet collar see Figure 109 Figure 114 Insert the snap rivets into the BCM200 platform base chassis Insert the rivet collar into Fan exhaust Vw the fan access panel hole Platform base chassis _ _ 4 Insert the rivet pin into the rivet collar CN 41 B Rivet pin Rivet collar 4 Connect the power supply cable to the I O card Connect the Fan to connector 1 on the I O card 5 Replace the platform base chassis top cover See Install the platform base chassis top cover on page 163 6 Restore the Business Communications Manager system to operation For details re
201. ected regions Networking DPNSS upgrade requires keycode provides private voice networking for the UK Market Networking MCDN and EDSI Q SIG Voice Networking requires keycode allows you to network your Business Communications Manager system or a number of Business Communications Manager systems to a Meridian system This allows the network to use a common numbering plan as well as common voice messaging and auto attendant systems connected to the Meridian Data setup applications and protocols to configure the Business Communications Manager system to be part of a LAN or WAN network Refer to the next section for specifics Attendant Console Setup and Operation Guide and Attendant Console User Guide Attendant Console requires keycode provides centralized call management and call activity reporting to a business The three components of this application create a system that communicates with the Business Communications Manager provides call management options and reports how incoming calls are handled within a business Call Center Agent User Guide and Call Center Supervisor User Guide Installation and Maintenance Guide 354 System Options Nortel Networks Call Center Agents requires keycode allows the addition of a specific number of call center agents to your system Comes in versions for one four eight 16 32 and 64 seat authorization codes Call Center Set Up and Operation Guide Nortel Networks Call Ce
202. ection to the Business Communications Manager base function tray if the default IP address is not compatible with your LAN or WAN network Required equipment e null modem cable e VT100 compatible terminal or a computer that has a terminal program such as Hyperterminal Warning Your terminal must be VT100 compatible and must support the VT100 National Character set If the terminal does not support the National Character set the text displays incorrectly Installation and Maintenance Guide 138 Chapter 5 Business Communications Manager System Startup Null modem cable setup Table 22 shows the correct wiring for the Business Communications Manager serial port of the null modem cable Table 22 Serial port pinout 1 Data Carrier Detect DCD 6 Data Set Ready DSR LS wap s 2 Serial data in RX 7 Request to Send RTS 3 Serial data out TX 8 Clear to Send CTS 4 Data Terminal Ready DTR 9 Ring Indicator RI 678 9 5 Ground required connections Transmission parameters e 9600 bits per second e 8 data bits no parity e 1 stop bit e hardware flow control Note For instructions about how to set the transmission parameters refer to the terminal or terminal emulation program documentation The Business Communications Manager system supports carriage return P0993133 03 Chapter 5 Business Communications Manager System Startup 139 Display the configuration men
203. ects to network devices that support V 35 interfaces provides end to end transparent bit service supports loopbacks between the Product Name short and the internal Business Communications Manager components and between the Product Name short and digital terminal equipment Installation and Maintenance Guide 84 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware Figure 48 Digital Drop amp Insert DDIM faceplate TxD RxD RTS CTS DCD DSR TM o Vo Oo OO O m MUN MAS Power LED OB Status LED In Service LED Loopback Test LED Continuity Loopback Receive LEDs Transmit LED Loopback we RJ48C digital telephone line connect P0993133 03 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware 85 Telephones and adapters The following telephones and devices can be used with the Business Communications Manager system Business Series Terminal T7100 one line display one memory button without indicator T7000 not shown International only four memory buttons without display or indicators Business Series Terminal T7316 two line display three display buttons 16 memory buttons with indicators eight memory buttons without indicators Norstar M7324 two line display with three display buttons 24 memory buttons with indicators Options two CAP modules Norstar M732AN UK and Au
204. edia bay module Central answering position Committed information rate Calling line identification Carrier sense multiple access collision detect Channel service unit Calling line trunk module Digital enhanced cordless telecommunications Business Communication Manager 3 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 36 Preface DIMM DLCI DN DNS DPNSS DRT DSM DTM DTMF FEM HTTP Hz I C IP ISDN Kbyte LAN MCDN MHz MSC NIC OPX PBX PCI PEC Ill PRI PSTN QoS QSIG RAM ROM SAPS TAPI TCP IP UTAM VoIP WAN Dual in line memory module Data link connection indentifier Directory number Domain name server Digital private network signalling system Delayed ring transfer to prime Digital station media bay module Digital Trunk media bay module Dual tone multifrequency Fiber expansion media bay module Hypertext transfer protocol Hertz Intercom Internet protocol Integrated services digital network Kilobyte Local area network Meridian customer defined network protocol Megahertz Media services card Network interface card Off premises extension Private branch exchange Peripheral component interconnect Processor expansion card version III Primary rate interface Public switched telephone network Quality of service Q reference point signalling Random access memory Read only memory Station auxiliary power supply Telephony application program interface Transmission control protocol internet protoco
205. edure is complete Install a power supply module This procedure describes how to install power supply modules in the power supply cage After you install the redundant power supply cage in the platform base chassis insert the two power supply modules Use this procedure also to replace faulty power supply modules Redundant power supply modules can be exchanged while the system is running as long as one of the modules remains active This section is relevant only with the BCM400 platform base chassis Note When you upgrade to a redundant power supply you should also install a redundant fan Refer to Install a BCM400 cooling fan on page 182 A Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a ground wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container 1 Ensure you have the correct redundant power supply cage installed in the BCM400 platform base chassis see Install a redundant power supply cage on page 205 2 Ensure that you position the power supply modules correctly before inserting them into the power supply cage The green LEDs are located at the top right of the power supply modules 3 Insert the power supply modules into the redundant power supply cage at the rear of the platform base chassis P0993133 03 Chapter 9 Replace or Upgrade a Power Supply 213 a Push on the power supply module until the face of
206. en moved 20 Connect cable runs P2 and P3 to the media bay backplane see Figure 137 as follows a Bundle the cables together Run the cables on the top of the power supply chassis and secure with the cable clamp b Connect cable P2 into the bottom media bay module backplane power connector C Connect cable P3 into the top media bay module backplane connector Bundle power cables P2 and P3 along with auxiliary cable P7 8 together with a grommet see Figure 138 e Insert the P2 P3 and auxiliary cables into the cable slot on the chassis secured with the grommet f Ensure that one power run connects to one MBM backplane connector Do not connect a single power run to both MBM backplane connectors Figure 138 Install a cable grommet Insert the P2 P3 and auxiliary cables into the cable slot Cable slot Cable grommet 21 Install the platform base chassis top cover See Install the platform base chassis top cover on page 163 22 This procedure is complete Installation and Maintenance Guide 210 Chapter 9 Replace or Upgrade a Power Supply Remove a BCM400 redundant power supply cage Use this procedure to remove an existing redundant power supply cage from the BCM400 platform base chassis Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge N Always wear a ground wrist strap before you handle components Always place the compone
207. enance as described in Shut down the system hardware on page 146 Continue to the next step of this procedure when complete Disconnect the Business Communications Manager from the AC power outlet Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface Partially remove the BCM400 advanced function tray see Remove the advanced function tray on page 157 Do not to pinch or stretch any cables when sliding the advanced function tray partially out of the platform base chassis Locate the hard disk in the advanced function tray Disconnect the hard disk cables from the system a Disconnect the power supply connector from the hard disk b Disconnect the hard disk connector at the I O card Carefully remove the advanced function tray Do not pinch or stretch any cables when sliding the advanced function tray completely out of the platform base chassis Remove the transportation HDD cage restraint screw and keep in a safe place Place your fingers under the tab located at the bottom rear of the hard disk cage Lift firmly on the tab At the same time slide the hard disk cage in the direction shown in Figure 94 until the unit detaches from the mounting points on the chassis P0993133 03 Chapter 7 Hard Disk Replacement Procedures 169 Figure 94 Detach the hard disk cage from the BCM400 advanced function tray chassis E RS RN Slide the hard disk cage toward 2 gt
208. ephone attached to the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 2 Make sure the analog port terminates correctly in 600 ohms by replacing the single line telephone with the test set e using TRANSMIT 600 OHM HOLD mode on the test set 3 Make sure the test set connects in parallel to the service line before removing the single line telephone or the line drops 4 Remove the single line telephone Installation and Maintenance Guide 280 Chapter 13 Install Analog Terminal Adapters 5 Introduce a 1 kHz tone into the analog line at 10 dBm and measure the level at the CO exchange Note The difference in levels is the transmit loss and must be less than 10 dB for example 9 dB is acceptable 6 This procedure is complete Connect the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 After you have determined that the proper environment exists connect the ATA 2 to the line and set Refer to Figure 179 Figure 179 Single line telephone installation overview ATA 2 power cord C Single line telephone Business Communications Manager Central E Office ATA 2 Line loop resistance Terminal loop resistance 135 ohms maximum 1300 ohms maximum Figure 180 shows the pinouts for the connection cables Figure 180 ATA 2 pin outs Line Jack Terminal Jack TCM Ring B Lead
209. ephony and cordless telephones Refer to Telephones and adapters on page 85 for a description of the sets the system supports Analog telephones are supported either through analog modules ASMs or by connecting to a digital module through an Analog Terminal Adapter 2 ATA2 Documentation describing installation and set features is supplied with each piece of equipment Caution Do not use telephones as off premises extensions OPX Digital and analog telephones must not be installed on any connections not protected by building equipment Analog terminal adapter The Analog Terminal Adapter 2 ATA 2 connects a standard analog voice device or data communication device to a digital line connector on the Business Communications Manager system Refer to Chapter 13 Install Analog Terminal Adapters on page 277 for the requirements and procedure for installing the device Installation and Maintenance Guide 244 Chapter 11 Install Telephones and Peripherals Central answering position CAP The Central Answering Position CAP module connects to an M7324 telephone The module provides 48 additional memory buttons For installation procedures for the CAP refer to the installation documents that came with the CAP Telephone port and DN cross reference The media bay module the analog and digital telephones are connected to dictates DNs and port numbers Use Table 25 to identify which port your telephones are conne
210. er has been disconnected and then reconnected 3 Ensure you have room to access the part you are working on Remove the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis from the rack if necessary 4 This procedure is complete P0993133 03 Chapter 6 Prepare Hardware for Maintenance or Upgrades 147 Restart the System after Maintenance When you finish your power off maintenance procedure restart the Business Communications Manager system in the order described in this section Restore the System to Operation To restore the system to operation after maintenance activities follow these steps 1 oa 5 Q Ensure that all cables inside the housing are connected snuggly to the correct boards and excess cable bundled neatly out of the way Replace the bezel on the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis if you removed it Replace the platform base chassis top cover and replace the screws If you removed the Business Communications Manager from the rack or wall replace it Plug the expansion unit if there is one into the AC power source Plug the Business Communications Manager into the AC power source The Business Communications Manager automatically starts booting i Warning When you restart the system all IP clients voice mail and VoIP ports are not available until the system services restart 7 8 Replace all the connectors to the front of the units The reboot can take seve
211. es to Service Providers 00 005 119 Wire Media Bay Modules to Internal Connections llli llle 121 FEM WIN uds See QURE in eo IET SE UR e ERR LA Ue RR ERR n 124 Connect the fiber cables 000 cece tte 125 Installation Replacement Troubleshooting lllleel eese 126 Chapter 5 Business Communications Manager System Startup 127 Ghe ck Power and Wiring 22 4 2 nerra ee bandit wie kne tied eee COURS RATES 128 Check system power and status 0 0 0 129 Connect the Data Networking Hardware 0 000 cece e eee eee 131 Connect the cards is 3 ess tate eo etm eR dares pal eG dara ke ok 132 Connect wiring to the WAN card 000 cece eee eee 133 Connect wiring to the modem 000 cee eee 134 Install th e Cards i eerte Pa ek nw ep treat paco baba een ep a pre et 136 l itializethe System shee aed Bhan it tan Gy ete Bede de Bae one Be hate Potts 136 Data parameter requirements lille eae 136 Default IP settings llle 136 Connecting when there is an IP address conflict 00005 137 Use of a null modem serial cable 0 0 0 ee 137 Null modem cable setup 6 0 0 eee eee 138 Display the configuration menus 0 cee ee 139 Ethernet crossover cable usage 0 ee eee 140 Set the crossover connections 0000 cee eee eee 140 P0993133 03 Contents 19 Configure your com
212. ess Communications Manager base platform chassis Attach the rack mounting brackets Place the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis on a flat clean surface 2 Align the screw holes between the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis and the right rack mounting bracket 3 Fasten the bracket to the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis using four Screws Caution Only use the screws supplied with the rack mounting bracket Do not replace screws Other screws can damage the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis 4 Align the screw holes between the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis and the left rack mounting bracket 5 Fasten the bracket to the platform base chassis using four screws Refer to Figure 52 Business Communication Manager 3 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 100 Chapter 3 Install the Business Communications Manager amp Expansion Unit Platform Base Chassis Figure 51 Attach the rack mount bracket to the BCM200 chassis Install rack mount bracket screws Install rack mount bracket screws Mount the platform base chassis into an equipment rack Use the procedure in this section to install the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis in an equipment rack Determine the location in the rack where you want to install the platform base chassis Position the unit in the rack Have
213. ess Telephone system provides cordless mobility in a small office environment Each base station supports three telephones Function is based on the T7316 M7310 telephone The base station connects to a digital station media bay module on the system Provides six memory buttons with indicators and a two line display with three display buttons For installation instructions refer to the T7406 Cordless Telephone Installation Guide o Symbol amp NetVision and NetVision Data telephones H 3234 based IP telephones asit provide eMobility access so through a LAN WAN TAA connection via a wireless OOGOJ access point A display Soi menu provides access to user and call feature Provides multi line display capability but no line memory or display buttons P0993133 03 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware 87 Accessories Station auxiliary power supply SAPS e Analog Terminal Adapter 2 ATA 2 provides power for the Business converts digital signals to analog signals to allow Communications Manager central answering communication with analog devices such as position CAP module Can also be used to FAX machines modems and answering extend the loop length between a telephone or machines The ATA 2 supports a maximum terminal and the Business Communications transmission rate of 28 8 kbit s With a single
214. ess cable as shown in Figure 125 Figure 125 Tie wrap excess P1 power cable length Media bay module backplane MSC Sl e P1 cable mr ENS ait P1 cable tie wrap l O card Power supply Hard disk 8 Connect the hard disk cable to the secondary IDE I O card connection Connect the hard disk cable to the hard disk connector Connect the power connector to the hard disk see Figure 125 Insert extra connectors under the hard disk 9 Connect the 20 Pin motherboard power cable P1 and the 12v power Cable P9 to the I O card Installation and Maintenance Guide 198 Chapter 9 Replace or Upgrade a Power Supply 10 Loop the cables together and tie wrap to the side of the power supply to remove P1 P9 P3 P7 8 excess cable length Fold the cables to the rear of the platform base chassis and secure with a tie wrap Ensure the cables are tied far enough back so they do not interfere with the insertion of the base function tray 11 Attach the fan plug to the I O card Fan 1 connection Loop excess fan cable length under the I O card Note Verify the power supply cables are connected correctly and do not interfere with any internal components 12 Insert the base function tray fully into the platform base chassis Ensure the base function tray does not interfer with any cabling 13 Replace the platfo
215. etach the DS30 cable connectors from the MSC 11 Remove the base function tray completely from the platform base chassis Ensure you do not pinch stretch or damage any cables See Remove the base function tray on page 150 Continue to the next step of this procedure when complete 12 Remove the media services card see Remove the media services card MSC on page 225 Continue to the next step of this procedure when complete 13 Carefully push down on the fastening tabs on either side of the DIMM you want to remove As you press down on the fastening tabs the DIMM lifts out of the DIMM slot 14 Grasp both ends of the DIMM with your fingertips Lift the DIMM up and away from the DIMM slot see Figure 157 on page 236 Place the DIMM in a static free container Figure 157 Remove and replace the dual in line memory module Base function tray front s s o 15 This procedure is complete P0993133 03 Chapter 10 Replace Data Cards and Processing Hardware 237 Install the dual in line memory module DIMM card Use this procedure to install a replacement DIMM or when you want to increase the amount of RAM in the Business Communications Manager Note There must be at least one DIMM installed in the Business Communications Manager in order for the system to function Warning Protect the hardware components against dam
216. etails P0993133 03 Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings 321 Figure 196 Space requirements for special media bay modules 4X16 module 2 DS30 buses offset set to 0 1 2 or 3 1 offset of 1 full DS30 for lines 1 full DS30 for telephone and equipment connections Combination and specialized media bay modules DDIM module DECT module 2 DS30 buses 1 DS30 bus offset set to 0 offset set to 0 1 full DS30 1 DECT for DTM per DS30 module 1 DECT per system 1 full DS30 for data module Note The FEM module requires a DS30 bus for each port that is active If all ports are active no other modules can be added to the system Note If you choose a CTM8 or a 4X16 module there are some restrictions about the offsets you can choose Refer to the DIP switch settings in CTM switch settings on page 334 and 4X16 switch settings on page 336 for details 1 Make a list of modules and the space requirements for each module you chose Refer to Table 50 Table 50 Matching modules to DS30 channel capacity Type of module DS30 split 2 6 default 3 5 extra IP lines Number required DS30s offsets required 2 Setthe bus numbers and offsets on the DIP switches of the module Refer to Chapter 4 Install remove or replace the Media Bay Modules on page 109 Note that you assign trunk modules starting from the bottom DS30 and you assign station mod
217. etermine the cause of the problem and if there is a damaged hardware component After you have corrected the problem test the Business Communications Manager system to confirm that the system is functioning correctly j Danger Electrical shock warning Disconnect the power cord telephone cables and network cables before opening the computer Read and follow installation instructions carefully Always wear a ground wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container i Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Hardware problems appear as any of the following e The operational LEDs on the Business Communications Manager base function tray advanced function tray RAID upgrade or the media bay modules do not display normal operational status e Business Communications Manager system does not function at all e The emergency telephone does not function e ATA 2 does not function Installation and Maintenance Guide 292 Chapter 15 Troubleshooting Access the System Status Monitor to Monitor LEDs The LEDs on the Business Communications Manager base function tray are part of the System Status Display SSD board Figure 188 shows what the board looks like from inside the base function tray Figure 188 SSD board connections System status monitor board SSM board mounting screws Maincard connector PC
218. eting plays a list of options to a caller and performs call routing functions in response to caller selections CallPilot requires keycodes for additional voice mailboxes provides a voice mail application as part of the core Business Communications Manager programming CallPilot provides voice messaging Automated Attendant and Custom Call Routing features for Business Communications Manager telephony services Voice Mailbox Expansion requires keycode allows you to add extra mailboxes to your voice messaging system The application comes with a keycode that defines how many extra mailboxes are allowed CallPilot Fax Set up amp Operation Guide and CallPilot Fax User Guide Fax Suite requires keycode a CallPilot optional feature delivers fax messages to CallPilot mailboxes Users can use the application to send and retrieve fax messages as easily as they send and retrieve voice messages CallPilot Message Networking Setup and Operation Guide and CallPilot Message Networking User Guide P0993133 03 System Options 355 Message Networking requires keycode to add extra mailboxes links the CallPilot system with other voicemail systems and allows the exchange of voice messages between users at different sites CallPilot supports Digital networking using Voice Profile for Internet Messaging VPIM standard and Audio Messaging Interchange Specification AMIS networking CallPilot Desktop Messaging Software Install and M
219. ever 16 more channels on DS30 7 are also made available for IP telephones Exceptions e DTM modules support 23 to 30 lines per channel FEM modules where each bus supports one Norstar fiber module connection Offsets are numbered 0 1 2 and 3 Modules that require less than a full bus can be assigned a DS30 number and an offset number This allows more than one module to be assigned the same DS30 number but with a different offset number Modules that can have offsets assigned include CTM CTM8 BRIM S T and ASM 8 For example two CTM 8s can be assigned to the same DS30 number with different offset numbers However you cannot assign a CTM8 and an BRI module to the same DS30 Offsets are assigned using DIP switches 1 2 and 3 on the media bay module Note Media bay modules that do not or cannot share DS30 buses always assign the offset as 0 zero As well if the module requires more than one bus such as the 4x16 module or the DDIM only the first DS30 is set on the DIP switches The next consecutive DS30 channel number is automatically assigned by the module Figure 194 shows a DS30 broken down into four offset groups of four single density or eight double density lines each Once again note that when you enable a station module for double density the line numbers double P0993133 03 Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings 319 Figure 194 Offsets are part of DS30 channel line groups Offsets
220. ew CTM 4 CTM8 8 7 6 Aux 5 1 Aux 2 3 4 or eee D A l 1 Aux 2 3 4 Power LED Status LED Line 1 Aux Line 2 Line 3 Auxiliary port Line 4 Auxiliary port Line 5 Basic rate interface media bay module The Basic Rate Interface media bay module ISDN BRI module connects a maximum of four BRI ISDN lines to the Business Communications Manager system European systems use an S interface North American based systems use a T interface with an external NTI line Each BRI ISDN line you connect adds two telephone lines to the Business Communications Manager system Therefore each ISDN BRI adds a maximum of eight telephone lines to the Business Communications Manager system via the four RJ48C jacks on the faceplate You can also use this module for dial backup or dial on demand services for WAN connections The LEDs beside each RJ 48C jack are on when the ISDN line is active Figure 42 shows the BRI faceplate LEDs and connections Figure 42 ISDN BRI media bay module LEDs and jacks ISDN BRI A B GENS O Oo b Power LED Status LED Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 78 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware Station Media Bay Modules Install the station media bay modules in the base function tray or the Business Communications Manager expansion unit Station media bay modules
221. ext step of this procedure when complete Remove the base function tray bezel See Remove the base function tray bezel on page 153 Continue to the next step of this procedure when complete At the front of the base function tray loosen and remove the PCI cover plate screw use a 2 Phillips screwdriver Figure 146 shows an interior view of the base function tray Place the screw in a safe location Remove the PCI cover plate from the base function tray chassis Place the PCI cover plate in a safe location Remove the two chassis mounting screws that secure the MSC to the base function tray chassis extension at the rear of the MSC see Figure 151 Place the screws in a safe location Installation and Maintenance Guide 226 Chapter 10 Replace Data Cards and Processing Hardware Figure 151 MSC chassis mounting screws Tu J MSC chassis mounting A screws pA PEC III slots ta MSC d Base function tray chassis extension 13 Use both hands to carefully hold the card along the side edges Push the card away from the PCI riser card connector to disconnect the MSC 14 Remove the MSC from the base function tray Place the MSC on a flat clean and static free surface 15 This procedure is complete Install the media services card MSC Use this procedure to install the media services card in the base function tray Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static N d
222. external call A call to or from a destination outside the Business Communications Manager system Installation and Maintenance Guide 364 Glossary external line A line assigned to a telephone that allows calls to the PSTN external paging A feature that allows voice announcements over an externally installed loudspeaker connected to the Business Communications Manager The external speaker is not an Business Communications Manager component FAX FAX works with Business Communications Manager Voice Messaging FAX allows a caller to send a fax document to a voice mailbox feature code A unique code used to access Business Communications Manager features and options on the telephones filtering Filtering is the process of examining a data packet on the network to determine the destination of the data and whether the packet gets passed along on the local LAN copied to another LAN or dropped frame relay A frame relay is a high speed packet switching WAN protocol designed to provide efficient high speed frame or packet transmission with minimum delay Frame relay uses minimal error detection and relies on higher level protocols for error control gateway A system that links two different types of networks and enables them to communicate with each other The Business Communications Manager can provide the gateway to an intranet or internet ground start trunk Ground start trunks provide the same features as
223. f 24 AWG or less Do not use bridge taps and loading coils between the Business Communications Manager system and ATA 2 External line to the Business Communications Manager system Ensure the external line is correctly connected to the Business Communications Manager system and make sure there is dial tone 4 This procedure is complete Check for dial tone at the ATA 2 Check to ensure there is dial tone from the set and from the ATA 2 module If there is no dial tone replace a single line telephone for the data communication device If there is no dial tone at the ATA 2 unit a Disconnect the line side of ATA 2 Connect an Business Communications Manager telephone to the ATA 2 port b Check that the connection from ATA 2 to the Business Communications Manager system is functioning correctly the telephone has dial tone This procedure is complete Check for trunk line dial tone to the ATA 2 Use the following steps to check for trunk line dial tone to the ATA 2 1 o0 A o Nw Disconnect ATA 2 external line from the Business Communications Manager system and connect the data device directly to this external line Make a call If the problem continues the device or the external line is possibly at fault Plug the device into a different line If the problem continues the device is possibly at fault This procedure is complete For more information about ATA 2 contact your customer service representative In
224. feel a snap as the locking tab slips into position 6 Reconnect power and IDE cables to the hard disk Connect the hard disk to the system a Connect the hard disk I O card connector to the I O card IDE interface b Connect the power supply to the hard disk Note All connectors have a notch that allows you to align the connectors correctly If you cannot push a connector in easily do not force it Figure 100 Insert the hard disk cage into the BCM200 platform base chassis Slide the hard disk cage toward the front of the chassis lt NM 7 Replace the cover and access panel if required 8 Restore the Business Communications Manager to operation Refer to Restart the System after Maintenance on page 147 9 Setup the disk a Initialize the hard disk Refer to Initialize the Hard Disk on page 176 b After the disk is initialized restore your data from your backups If you did not backup your keycodes re enter them see Enter the software keycodes on page 142 10 This procedure is complete P0993133 03 Chapter 7 Hard Disk Replacement Procedures 175 Install a hard disk cage in a BCM400 platform base chassis Use this procedure to install the hard disk cage into the BCM400 platform advanced function tray Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static discharge Always wear a ground wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in sta
225. fer to Restart the System after Maintenance on page 147 The Business Communications Manager system starts up when you connect the AC power cord The start up process takes several minutes to complete 7 Test the direction of the fan exhaust air flow to determine if the fan is correctly installed Installation and Maintenance Guide 188 Chapter 8 Install or Replace a Cooling Fan a Hold apiece of paper or your hand close to the fan exhaust A correctly installed fan blows air away from the platform base chassis b Ifthe fan exhaust air flow is incorrect remove the cooling fan See Remove a BCM200 cooling fan on page 185 and re install the fan in the correct orientation this procedure 8 This procedure is complete Remove an expansion unit fan Use this procedure to remove a malfunctioning fan from the expansion unit The Business Communications Manager expansion unit comes either with one fan or a redundant fan set The single fan unit is not upgradeable Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static discharge Always wear a ground wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container 1 Shutdown the system following the directions in Shut down the system software on page 145 2 Disconnect the fan power cable from the hub card Note If the unit has redundant fans each fan has a connector on the hub board gt 3 Locate the
226. front of the units units procedure Test system Remove from rack functions P0993133 03 Chapter 6 Prepare Hardware for Maintenance or Upgrades 145 Special Tools Before you replace the components ensure you have the following equipment Phillips screwdriver 2 with a blade 3 5 in long 3 16 inch slot screwdriver antistatic wrist grounding strap Caution You must wear an antistatic grounding strap at all times when handling electronic components Failure to do so can result in damage to the equipment Controlled System Shutdown Use the procedures described in this section to perform a controlled software and hardware system shutdown The Business Communications Manager system requires a controlled shutdown to guarantee the integrity of the file system The procedures in this section assume you have access to the Unified Manager If a controlled shutdown is not possible disconnect the power cord from the AC power outlet power down the Business Communications Manager Shut down the system software Use this procedure to ensure a safe shutdown of the Business Communications Manager software system 1 Start a web browser on a computer with a LAN connection to the Business Communications Manager system 2 Enter the IP address of the Business Communications Manager system and the port number for Business Communications Manager Unified Manager 6800 For example http 10 10 10 1 6800 3 Click the Config
227. g extensions you can use an Business Communications Manager ATA 2 to connect these devices to your DSM 16 DSM 32 or the DSM connector on a 4X16 module Each analog extension requires a Business Communications Manager ATA 2 Tip The BCM400 can hold a maximum of four media bay modules If you require more you also need an Business Communications Manager expansion unit 3 This procedure is complete Upgrade from an existing Norstar system A special media bay module allows you to convert existing Norstar expansion modules from the Norstar ICS to full Business Communications Manager capability The FEM allows you to connect a maximum of six Norstar expansion modules to a Business Communications Manager Each expansion module connection requires one DS30 channel therefore the Business Communications Manager used for this purpose can only support one FEM module if you are converting a fully configured Norstar system Determine system capacity After you have selected the modules you require you must ensure that the Business Communications Manager can support all the modules This is determined by the line requirements of each module P0993133 03 Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings 317 The following sections describe the MSC DS30 buses which manage the DS30 channels and how you fit your modules into the overall system planning Understand DS30 numbers A DS30 bus is a block of virtual pathways on the media se
228. g two fans cover one fan at a time with your hand b Ifthe fan exhaust air flow is incorrect remove the cooling fan See Remove a BCM400 cooling fan on page 180 and re install the fan in the correct position this procedure 7 This procedure is complete Remove a BCM200 cooling fan Use this procedure to remove the cooling fan in a BCM200 platform configuration Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static discharge Always wear a ground wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container 1 If you still have access to the Unified Manager shut down the system using the Shutdown command For details refer to Shut down the system software on page 145 Otherwise skip to step 2 2 Setup the server for maintenance as described in Shut down the system hardware on page 146 Disconnect the Business Communications Manager system from the AC power outlet Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 5 Remove the top cover from the platform base chassis see Remove the platform base chassis top cover on page 161 6 Disconnect the I O card fan cable connection see Figure 112 Installation and Maintenance Guide 186 Chapter 8 Install or Replace a Cooling Fan Figure 112 Disconnect the BCM200 fan cable from the I O card J
229. ge relay page output N and music on hold interfaces must use safety extra low voltage SELV All four interfaces are SELV and the external equipment connected to these interfaces must be SELV If these interfaces are not SELV you must use external line isolation units LIU P0993133 03 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware 59 The MSC faceplate offers the following optional connections DS256 connector BCM400 The Business Communications Manager expansion unit connects to the base function tray through the DS256 jack on the MSC faceplate The DS256 cable to make this connection is provided with the purchase of an BCM1000e expansion chassis Auxiliary ringer jack The base function tray uses the auxiliary ringer jack to control the cadence of an auxiliary ringer customer supplied You must use this output in a low current low voltage application only Do not use this output for switching the auxiliary ringer directly Page relay jack When you use the page signal output jack to connect an external paging amplifier you also use the page relay jack The page relay jack connects a floating relay contact pair The base function tray uses this jack to control the external paging amplifier Page output jack The base function tray uses the page output to connect an internally generated voice paging signal to an external paging amplifier customer supplied Music on hold j
230. ged before opening the Business Communications Manager or Business Communications Manager expansion unit If installation of additional hardware and or servicing is required disconnect all telephone cable connections prior to unplugging the Business Communications Manager Ensure the Business Communications Manager and Business Communications Manager expansion unit are plugged into the wall socket using a three prong power cable before any telephone cables are connected P0993133 03 Caution Only qualified persons should service the system The installation and service of this hardware is to be performed only by service personnel having appropriate training and experience necessary to be aware of hazards to which they are exposed in performing a task and of measures to minimize the danger to themselves or other persons Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunication network and AC mains are possible with this equipment To minimize risk to service personnel and users the Business Communications Manager system must be connected to an outlet with a third wire ground Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of high leakage currents becoming available on metal system surfaces during power line fault events near network lines These leakage currents normally safely flow to Protective Earth ground via the power cord Therefore it is mandatory that connection to an earthed outlet is performed first and removed last when cab
231. ger a TAPI based application provides a graphical interface that allows you to use your computer to manage your calls and address book while still using your telephone for voice communication Interactive Voice Response Installation and Configuration Guide Interactive Voice Response is an automated telephony application that prompts callers with a combination of recorded menus and prompts and real time data from databases Users enter digits from their touch tone key pad that directs the Interactive Voice Response application to access databases and play information back to the caller Interactive Voice Response documents include the following e Media Processing Server Series COMMGR Reference Manual P0988083 e PeriView Reference Manual P0988083 e PeriReporter User s Guide P0988093 e BCM IVR Integration Supplement P0995957 Data Features The Business Communications Manager offers the following data features as described and configured in the Business Communications Manager 3 0 Programming Operations Guide Integrated QoS Routing controls the router interface between the Business Communications Manager system and the local area network wide area network and internet DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Business Communications Manager 2 5 provides DHCP service to branch office clients This service dynamically assigns IP addresses to branch office PCs so you do not manually assign an IP address to each PC The Business Com
232. grates voice and data capabilities VoIP gateway functions and quality of service QoS data routing features into a single telephony system Business Communications Manager is a compact system that allows you to create and provide telephony applications for use in a business environment The Business Communications Manager system includes software and hardware components that provide data networking telephony service voice messaging and service applications The Business Communications Manager requires version 3 0 software and is available in the following three product configurations e BCM200 e BCM400 Standard STD e BCM400 Redundant feature option RFO Figure 2 provides an overview of the core Business Communications Manager system Figure 2 Business Communications Manager core system components overview Internal sets Business Communication Telephones and adapters on page 85 Manager features Appendix D System Options WAN network Data networking components on page 62 o AMOOO0 00000 o i o 00000 00000 H a ee PSTN of BoR FE fa mm e E Installation Process Business Communications Manager Overview on page 93
233. h a 3 5 split The exception to this is the 4X16 module and the DDIM which require two DS30 buses so it must be set to a DS30 that has the next channel open P0993133 03 Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings 325 Figure 197 Assigning single density modules to the DS30 channel hierarchy After you choose your modules choose where f Example of Example of a to assign them on the DS30 buses North American European based DS30 DN assignment based setup setup begins with Start DN buses defaut 221 2 Station modules are 2 assigned starting at the top DSM 32 d DS30 2 of the available media bay module DS30 ml 3 buses 3 DSM 32 Exception DSM 16 or DSM 32 ka y used for Companion In this case DSM 32 must be set to CTM 4 DS30 6 DSM 16 can be CTM 4 SNE installed in both DS30 6 and 7 CTM NEEE If DS30 7 is not available you cannot use a DSM32 4X16 ae 5 Trunk modules are DS30 5 Sipe the 5 BRI assigned starting with the station module part of a last available media bay the 4X16 module DS30 bus DS30 6 or 6 7 depending on the channel 6 BRI split in effect EE DSM 32 Exception a 4X16 module or I 7 a DDIM cannot be assigned Companion 7 DECT to the last DS30 bus Lines start at 61 on DS30 7 3 5 channel split DSM 16 DSM 3 DS30 7 is not available to any module if your system has been 6 conf
234. he hard 7 disk ribbon cable from the os primary hard disk disk retainer screws Rear view A ae V7 Remove the hard disk 2 from the hard disk cage 4 This procedure is complete P0993133 03 Chapter 7 Hard Disk Replacement Procedures 171 Install a New Hard Disk This section describes the procedures to install a new hard disk into the Business Communications Manager This section describes two processes to install a hard disk e Install a hard disk into the hard disk cage e Install a hard disk cage containing the hard disk into the platform base chassis Warning You must initialize the Business Communications Manager system when you N install a new hard disk on a single disk system Install a hard disk into a hard disk cage Use this procedure to install a hard disk into a hard disk cage for a BCM200 or BCM400 platform Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static discharge Always wear a ground wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container 1 Position the hard disk into the hard disk cage Note For a BCM200 platform orient the hard disk such that the power and IDE connectors are on the bottom and opposite to the hard disk cage lift tab see Figure 97 For a BCM400 platform orient the hard disk such that the power and IDE connectors are on the bottom and on the same side as the h
235. he power supply module tray opening faces the rear of the platform base chassis 15 Align the mounting holes in the redundant power supply cage with the screw holes in the platform base chassis 16 Attach the redundant power supply cage to the platform base chassis using the four chassis mounting screws Refer to Figure 136 Installation and Maintenance Guide 208 Chapter 9 Replace or Upgrade a Power Supply Figure 136 Attach the redundant power supply cage chassis mounting screws 17 If you have not already done so install a redundant fan into the unit Refer to Install a BCM400 cooling fan on page 182 Continue to the next step of this procedure when complete 18 Install a new cable clamp on the underside of the top cover Place the new cable clamp beside the existing cable clamp Use the cable clamp to secure the power IDE and auxilliary cables to the roof of the platform base chassis Figure 137 Install a new cable clamp Mount new cable T clamp located on underside of chassis cover Cable clamp located L on top of power supply P0993133 03 Chapter 9 Replace or Upgrade a Power Supply 209 19 Run the power supply auxilliary and IDE cables to the hard disk Secure these cables in the new cable clamp Note Verify the power supply cables are connected correctly completely and are routed so they do not interfere with any internal components wh
236. he wire connections for a RS 422 EIA 530 cable Table 19 RS 422 EIA 530 adapter cable 1 Protective Ground 1 14 Transmit Data B 14 2 Transmit Data A 2 15 Transmit Clock A 15 3 Receive Data A 3 16 Receive Data B 16 4 Request to Send A 4 17 Receive Clock A 17 5 Clear to Send A 5 18 18 6 Data Set Ready A 6 19 Request To Send B 19 7 Signal Ground 7 20 Data Terminal Ready A 20 8 Data Carrier Detect A 8 21 21 9 Receive Clock B 9 22 Data Set Ready B 22 10 Data Carrier Detect B 10 23 Data Terminal Ready B 23 11 External Clock B 11 24 External Clock A 24 12 Transmit Clock B 12 25 25 13 Clear To Send B 13 26 P0993133 03 Chapter 5 Business Communications Manager System Startup 135 Table 20 shows the wire connections for a V 35 adapter cable Table 20 V 35 Adapter Cable 1 Protective Ground A cus C1 Transmit Clock A y 3 Receive Data A R Receive Clock A V NI 5 Clear to Send D rat oO 7 Signal Ground B 1 9 Receive Clock B X wo 11 External Clock B Ww M ol 13 Table 21 shows the wire connections for a DB15 X 21 adapter cable Table 21 DB15 X 21 adapter cable Chassis Ground Receive Data A Clear to Send A Signal Ground CS A Receive Clock A Request To Send B N mu 9 Receive Clock B 13 23 11 External Clock B 14
237. heck LEDs END Remove the WAN card Use this procedure to remove the WAN card Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static discharge Always wear a ground wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container 1 If you still have access to the Unified Manager shut down the system using the Shutdown command For details refer to Shut down the system software on page 145 Otherwise skip to step 2 2 Setup the server for maintenance as described in Shut down the system hardware on page 146 Disconnect the Business Communications Manager from the AC power outlet Disconnect any connectors from the front of the base function tray Installation and Maintenance Guide 220 Chapter 10 Replace Data Cards and Processing Hardware 10 11 Remove the platform base chassis top cover Refer to Remove the platform base chassis top cover on page 161 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface Partially remove the base function tray from the platform base chassis Ensure you do not pinch stretch or damage any cables If required remove the base function tray completely from the platform base chassis see Remove the base function tray on page 150 Remove the base function tray bezel See Remove the base function tray bezel on page 153 At the front of the base f
238. identifies a destination and transmitting computer over a internet See also static IP address and dynamic IP address IP address server The IP address server manages the assignment of IP addresses to the devices that access the system The server assigns an IP address to the device whenever it logs on to the network ISDN DN A directory number DN used by ISDN terminal equipment connected to the system The Business Communications Manager system uses a maximum of 30 ISDN DNs The DECT cordless handsets use this type of DN kbyte The abbreviation for kilobyte A kilobyte is equal to 1024 bytes keycode These numerical codes generated for specific applications and for individual sites allow access to additional features on the Business Communications Manager system Refer to the Software Keycode Installation guide for details line The complete path of a voice or data connection between one telephone or other device and another line number A number that identifies an external line The total number of lines depends on the number and type of trunk media bay modules installed line pool Lines grouped in a common pool that assigned telephones can access to make external calls Assign a line to be part of a line pool under Trunk Line data in Lines programming Line Redirection A feature that allows you to redirect all calls on an incoming line to a destination outside the system You can set up the system to ring brief
239. ier Canadian Regulations please read carefully Notice The term IC before the certification number located on the host equipment only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to P0993133 03 7 request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas Caution Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate Notice The Ringer Equivalence Number REN assigned to e
240. ign with the holes in the platform base chassis 8 Fasten the power supply suppport bracket mounting screws see Figure 129 Figure 129 Fasten the power supply support bracket to the platform base chassis fasten the power supply support bracket power supply not shown 9 Align the mounting holes in the power supply with the chassis holes at the rear of the platform base chassis Fasten the power supply mounting screws to the platform base chassis Figure 130 Fasten the standard power supply to the platform base chassis i Fasten power Fasten power auxilliary IDE supply chassis cables using mounting screws cable clamp located on underside of chassis cover P0993133 03 Chapter 9 Replace or Upgrade a Power Supply 203 10 Attach the 20 pin motherboard connector and the 12V power connector into the I O card 11 Route the power cable auxilliary and IDE cable to the hard disk cage Bundle the cables together and fasten to the roof of the platform base chassis using the cable clamp see Figure 130 12 Connect the power cable and IDE cable to the hard disk 13 Run the auxilliary cable to the chassis cable slot see next step 14 Connect cable runs P2 and P3 to the media bay backplane as follows a b c Connect cable P2 into the bottom media bay module backplane power connector Connect cable P3 into the top media bay module backplane connector Bun
241. igured with a 3 5 channel split Companion Modules that require two DS30 buses such as the DSM32 and the 4X16 must be assigned to DS30s higher than 6 to allow Copf pahion accommodate all the resource requirements Companion Only a maximum of 16 Companion base stations 30 handsets can be registered on a system configured with a 3 5 split Installation and Maintenance Guide 326 Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings Figure 198 Assigning double density modules to the DS30 channel hierarchy Example of Example of a Dou ble density example North American European based based setup setup system configured as Partial Density Partial density Systems configured with Partial double density PDD allow Companion telephones on DS30 6 and 7 if the sys DDIDSMIS2S 2 DD DSM 32 tem is set to a 2 6 split In this configuration DS30 6 and 7 only allow single density modules DS30 2 to 5 are set to k DD DSM 16 allow double density modules 3 SPIBEMEE DD DSM 32 Double density Systems configured with Full double density FDD do not CTM allow Companion telephones All DS30s are set to allow CTM A double density modules CTM DD DSM 324 3 5 channel split DS30 5 supports EH Works in same as shown in the single density diagram If the station module 5 i i i i part of the 4X16 the system is set to a 3 5 split DS30 7 is not available to a
242. iilii 299 Language Availability llle III 300 GallerTD DIisplays i038 ote xe a sexi x UE E Ox US Ep ds 301 Companding Law by Region 000 cece eee eee 301 ISDN Line Services send ue RE ERR okie a Ehe Bae er d ds 301 Mobility Services by Region 00 cece tte ee 303 Media Bay Module Availability by Region 0 0 c eee ee 303 Trunk Availability by Region 0 eee 304 BRI and PRI line types isset ed emn data ce ae 306 Define Time Zones by Country and Language 00 cee eee eee eee 308 System Defaults ues eoo mue et Rer EUR E eR S Pte E 308 P0993133 03 Contents 23 Appendix B Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings 313 Media Bay Module System Selection 0c eee eee eee 313 Trunk media bay module selection 0 0 c ee eee 314 Station media bay module selection 0000 e cee eee tees 315 Upgrade from an existing Norstar system lille 316 Determine system capacity 00 eee nne 316 Understand DS30 numbers 000 0 cece tees 317 Setting offsets 0 0 ttt 318 Determining module channel requirements 0 0c eee ee eee 320 Set Media Bay Module Dip Switches 00 000 cece eee 322 Rules for Assigning DS30 Resources 000 cece eee eee 322 Notes about assigning modules 02 e eee eens 322 Choose the assigned order for modules
243. ine the ATA 2 extension number 0 0 2 es 282 Configure the ATA2 orere ikra E RE OEA AE E EEE eens 283 Test the ATA 2 eos a Me ng A Raha ein he A BS 283 ATA 2 Data Communication 0 0 0 00 0c eee ls 284 Data transmission requirements llli 284 FAX and modem transmission compatibility llli 284 Install a Data Communication Device 0 eee 285 Chapter 14 Install Optional Telephony Equipment 00 eee eee ee eee 287 Media Service Card Connections 0 0 eens 287 Install an auxiliary ringer 0 0000 cc ee 287 Activate auxiliary ringer programming 0000 eee ee ee eee eee 288 Connect the external paging system 2 0 0 cee 288 Connect an external music source 1 0 ees 289 Music on hold specifications 00 00 cece tees 289 Chapter 15 Troubleshooting is ies ses eh n Re n RR rrr es 291 Access the System Status Monitor to Monitor LEDs 00005 292 Business Communications Manager does not Function 000 295 Emergency Telephone Does Not Function 0000 0 cece eee eee 296 ATA 2 Does Not Function llle as 296 Check the ATA 2 wiring 6 0 0 ccc Ih 297 Check for dial tone at the ATA2 llle 297 Check for trunk line dial tone to the ATA2 0 cc eee 297 Appendix A System Region Attributes 0c ee eee 299 Core Software and Regions
244. ion Before you attempt to install an ATA 2 device ensure that your system and environment meet the requirements listed in this section Environmental requirements Check the following environment requirements for the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 Line voltage 120 V 102 132 V ac Line voltage 230 V 207 253 V ac Temperature 0 50 C 32 122 F Relative humidity 596 9596 non condensing Bridge taps Not allowed between the Business Communications Manager system loading coils and Business Communications Manager ATA 2 Operating requirements The following are requirements for operating other analog or data communication devices Ringing signal North America 20 Hz 1 Hz Frequency Voltage 80 V rms 10 Ringing signal Europe 25 Hz 1 Hz Frequency voltage 75 V rms 10 Ringer equivalence number 3 Battery feed voltage 48 V dc 10 Loop current 20 mA minimum Installation and Maintenance Guide 278 Chapter 13 Install Analog Terminal Adapters FIC code OLI3ABC Business Communications Manager ATA 2 to 135 ohms maximum for example 800 m of Business Communications Manager system 0 5 mm wire or 2 600 ft of 24 AWG wire loop resistance cable only Analog loop resistance on terminal side for 1 300 ohms maximum for example 4 600 m of voice applications cable only 0 4 mm wire or 15 000 ft of 26 AWG wire Analog loop resistance on terminal for data 200 ohms maximum for example 730 m of
245. ion Data telephones Companion installation information is included in this guide and in the Programming Operations Guide Installation documentation for the other three systems is provided in separate documentation for each system Refer to Telephones and adapters on page 74 for information about the handsets and the hardware they use to connect to the system This section describes the media bay module MBM telephony components and various types of telephone equipment used with the Business Communications Manager system Figure 36 points to the sections that describe the modules and telephones that can be installed into the base function tray The Business Communications Manager system is modular You can increase the capacity of the system by adding more telephony hardware components media bay modules MBMs Each Business Communications Manager allocates a maximum of six DS30 channels to the media bay modules The number of media bay modules that can be added to your system is determined by the number of media bays that are open combined with the number of DS30 channels each component uses If your system requires many IP lines or trunks you can reduce the number of DS30 channels that are assigned to modules and increase the number of channels available to IP telephones This is known as a 3 5 DS30 channel split In this case you only have five DS30 channels available for use by the media bay modules Refer to Understand DS30 numbers
246. ion Module u law DECT8 Digital enhanced cordless telecommunications DECT media bay module on page 81 Fibre Expansion Module FEM 6 Fiber expansion media bay module FEM on page 82 Digital Drop amp Insert MUX DDI Mux Digital Drop amp Insert MUX DDIM on page 83 Media bay modules are designed within a common casing that include the following common features e LEDs All media bay modules have power and status LEDS e Power connections located at the rear of the media bay module e DIP switches located at the rear of the media bay module P0993133 03 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware 73 Media bay module LED indicators Figure 37 shows the location of the Power and Status on a CTM The power and status LEDs are located in the same place on all modules The figure describes the possible LED states Figure 37 Module Power and Status LED states Off Off No power applied to the module or failure of module power converter On Off FPGA not downloaded On Blinking Hardware is working but there is an operational problem such as no DS256 link detected DS256 frame alignment lost bandwidth not allocated module is in maintenance state Blinking Blinking Power is applied to module but there is a hardware problem such as partial failure of power converter thermal overload fanfailure Status LED
247. ion and Maintenance Guide 310 System Region Attributes Table 47 Region defaults Continued ISDN overlap receiving Functionality Attribute North American Global United Kingdom DRT Delay Show in second disabled disabled disabled Default 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles Options 1 ring cycles e 1 ring cycles e 1 ring cycles 2ring cycles e 2ring cycles e 2ring cycles 3ring cycles e 3 ring cycles e 3 ring cycles 4ring cycles e 4ring cycles 4ring cycles 6ring cycles e 6ring cycles 6ring cycles 10ringcycles 10ring cycles Handsfree none none none Pickup Group none none none Remind Delay 60 secs 60 secs 60 secs Allow SLR disabled disabled disabled Transfer Callback Show in second disabled disabled disabled Default 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles Options 3ring cycles e 3ring cycles e 3 ring cycles 4ring cycles e 4ring cycles 4ring cycles bring cycles bring cycles e 5ring cycles 6ring cycles e 6ring cycles e 6ring cycles e 12ringcycles 12 ring cycles e 12 ring cycles Dialling Plan market dependent market dependent market dependent defined in defined in defined in application application but application but but controlled by market controlled by controlled by market profile ID market profile ID profile ID ONN Blocking VSC for analog n a n a 141 tone VSC for analog n a n a 141 pulse V
248. ion tray on a flat clean and static free surface If you need to remove the hard disk component refer to See Remove a hard disk cage from a BCM400 platform base chassis on page 168 Figure 86 Remove the advanced function tray 1 uu 3i Unfasten advanced P 7 v Disconnect IDE cable S function tray latch screws E lt 5 CUL MU j from VO card N Ix 4 Disconnect power cables from fee the hard disk or RAID card PNS DE A x d p e Le ea Ly a Move advanced function tray 2 latches to the unlocked position Slide advanced function tray partially away from the platform base chassis AL E rene 13 This procedure is complete P0993133 03 Chapter 6 Prepare Hardware for Maintenance or Upgrades 159 Install the advanced function tray Use this procedure to install the advanced function tray in the platform base chassis i Warning Use care when removing or inserting the advanced function tray Do not forcefully remove or insert the advanced function tray You could damage or stretch the cables i Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static discharge Always wear a ground wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container or work area oN Oo QC 11 12 13 14 15 Disconnect the Business Communications Manager from the AC power outlet Attach one
249. is Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge N Always wear a ground wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container Warning Power supply cable management is critical Cable damage can result due to N loose or incorrectly positioned cables 1 Setup the Business Communications Manager for maintenance see Shut down the system hardware on page 146 2 Disconnect all cables from the front of the base function tray Disconnect the platform base chassis and the expansion unit if applicable from the AC power connection 3 Remove the top cover from the platform base chassis see Remove the platform base chassis top cover on page 161 P0993133 03 Chapter 9 Replace or Upgrade a Power Supply 193 4 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 5 Locate and disconnect the power supply cables from the I O card media bay backplane and hard disk Disconnect all cables from the I O card Partially remove the base function tray see Remove the base function tray on page 150 Continue to the next step in this procedure when complete 8 Remove the screws that secure the MSC guide bracket to the I O card Place the MSC guide bracket and screws in a safe location see Figure 118 Figure 118 Remove the BCM200 MSC guide bracket Unfasten BCM200 MSC guide bracke
250. is e System status display LEDs e 1x Media services card e 1x Main card 1x Wide area network WAN card available only as a field upgrade e Processor expansion cards PEC III 1 for BCM200 or 2 for BCM400 1x V 90 modem North America only Base function tray chassis The base function tray installs in the platform base chassis and houses the main card with the system interfaces Figure 15 illustrates the base function tray chassis layout BCM200 configuration shown Figure 15 Base function tray hardware and chassis DS30 MSC chassis Connectors mounting screws System status e A display LEDs ee a PEC Ill 2 slots Base function p d tray chassis extension Base function tray chassis function tray latch P0993133 03 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware 55 Base function tray interfaces You can connect to the base function tray through the serial port or through a LAN port to perform the system initialization The data networking components connect the Business Communications Manager system to your local area network LAN and or the wide area network WAN For initialization information refer to Use of a null modem serial cable on page 137 and Connect the Ethernet crossover cable on page 141 Figure 16 illustrates the base function tray ports for the BCM200 platform Figure 16 Base function tray faceplate p
251. ischarge Always wear a ground wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container Note If you purchased optional Business Communications Manager applications that require keycode activation regenerate the keycodes after you re install the replacement MSC For further information see Regenerating keycodes after system replacement on page 142 1 Disconnect the Business Communications Manager from the wall power outlet 2 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 3 Position the MSC in the correct PCI riser card connector P0993133 03 Chapter 10 Replace Data Cards and Processing Hardware 227 10 11 12 13 14 15 Push the card firmly and fully into the PCI riser card connector Install the two chassis mounting screws at the rear of the MSC see Figure 151 Position the PCI cover plate on the front of the base function tray such that the base function tray and cover plate screw holes align Position the PCI cover plate locking screw in the PCI cover plate Tighten the PCI cover plate locking screw until the plate is firmly set in place see Figure 147 Install the base function tray bezel See Install the base function tray bezel on page 154 Continue to the next step in this procedure when complete Partially install the base function tray in the platform base chassis Connect the DS30 connectors
252. ission network requirements described in the data communication device specifications Transmission rates baud over 1 200 bps require a modulation design compatible with the telephone line bandwidth Use a conditioned external line to prevent data corruption during transmission Note Maximum loss from the ATA 2 analog terminal to the CO must be 10 dB or less at 1 kHz If the loss exceeds this limit condition the line This loss ensures correct data transmission for different types of data terminals FAX and modem transmission compatibility The Business Communications Manager ATA 2 is compatible with all commercial FAX and modem protocols When connected to an ATA 2 the Business Communications Manager system supports data transmission rates a maximum of and including 28 8 kbit s Note Nortel Networks cannot guarantee the maximum data transmission rate because the maximum rate is subject to the quality of the end to end channel P0993133 03 Chapter 13 Install Analog Terminal Adapters 285 Install a Data Communication Device Use this procedure to install an ATA 2 to a data communication device Figure 183 shows the hardware configuration for connecting a data communication device through an ATA 2 to the Business Communications Manager Figure 183 Data communication device installation overview ATA 2 power cord Business Communications Manager Ed CE imm amm tee Ls s J PTE Data communica
253. it The remote power interconnect unit RPI provides remote power for base station support Figure 161 shows a diagram of the RPI Caution The RPI unit must have the DC backup power supplied by a UL listed universal power supply UPS The UPS must have an output voltage rating of 44 to 52 V DC with a maximum fault current limit of 6 A to protect the RPI output wiring If these requirements are not met it is necessary to use class 1 wiring Warning Install the RPI units inside a building N The AC outlet powering the RPI must be installed near the equipment and must be easily accessible The length of the RPI cord from the outside surface of the unit to the plug must be a minimum of 1 3 m 4 5 ft and a maximum of 4 6 m 15 ft Figure 161 RPI unit Installation and Maintenance Guide 252 Chapter 12 Install Companion or DECT Systems There are two versions of the RPI unit e The RPI 8 BIX UL supports a maximum of eight base stations e The RPI 16 BIX UL supports a maximum of 16 base stations Each RPI has a connection printed circuit board and either one RPI 8 BIX UL or two RPI 16 BIX UL power supply units PSUs The maximum input power consumption of an RPI is 240 W If you use a UPS 48 V dc backup source the maximum input power requirement of the RPI is 140 W Install a second PSU to the RPI 8 BIX UL to upgrade an RPI 8 BIX UL to an RPI 16 BIX UL If you distribute the RPIs
254. itor LED Display screen 2 5 294 Figure 191 System Status Monitor LED Settings record 2 4 294 Figure 192 Process for determining modules llle else 313 Figure 193 DS30 model 0 000 cece 317 Figure 194 Offsets are part of DS30 channel line groups 319 Figure 195 Space requirements for media bay modules on a per DS30 configuration 00 0 c cee ee 320 Figure 196 Space requirements for special media bay modules 321 Figure 197 Assigning single density modules to the DS30 channel hierarchy 325 Figure 198 Assigning double density modules to the DS30 channel hierarchy 326 Figure 199 How to use the configuration map llseeelsense 327 Figure 200 Switches on the media bay module 00000 ee eeeee 330 Installation and Maintenance Guide 30 Figures P0993133 03 31 Tables Table 1 Interface harmonized standards liliis ses 5 Table 2 Card field replaceable units 0 00 c cee 40 Table 3 Chassis field replaceable units 0 00 eee eee 40 Table 4 Hard drive field replaceable units 000020 0c eee eee 41 Table 5 Power supply field replaceable units 0000 eee 42 Table 6 Cooling fan field replaceable units 00 000 eee 42 Table 7 Media bay module a eee 42 Table 8 Media bay module list liliis 72 Table 9 Trunk media
255. ix additional bays for media bay modules The Business Communications Manager expansion unit is available for use only with the BCM400 The supplied DS256 cable is 5 m 16 ft long Use of any other cable is not supported The cable connects into a DS256 port on the MSC of the base function tray and into a DS256 port on the center panel of the expansion unit Refer to Figure 49 Note The number of modules that actually can be installed is determined by the number of DS30 channels required by the modules and the number of channels available Refer to Chapter 3 Install the Business Communications Manager amp Expansion Unit Platform Base Chassis on page 99 Figure 49 Business communication manager DS256 connectors and expansion unit Business Communications Manager BCM400 vg EL aee Bi a i OH UT S mmi DS256 port Business Communications Manager expansion unit 2 PIER o O eel 3 C3 E E UBBEBEB lo E O O o oO OOOO e ela 0 0O 0O gO o O m A e lo 2 o DS256 port P0993133 03 91 Chapter 2 Auxilliary Requirements and Installation Process Overview This chapter p
256. justment Trunk connectors must be converted to RJ11 CTM or RJ45 BRI connectors However if you use the FEM module to connect your Norstar modules to the Business Communications Manager the station wiring needs to be adjusted Refer to FEM Wiring on page 124 System Setup Use the following table to make a note of your basic system setup Post this page near the Business Communications Manager hardware for future reference Media bay module DIP switch setting Line set type Line Loop DN range Media bay module DIP switch setting Line set type Line Loop DN range P0993133 03 Media Bay Module Combinations 351 Set DNs and Port Numbers The media bay module based on the switch settings of the module defines which DNs and port numbers can be populated with telephones If you have changed the default start DN for your system use Table 73 to identify the DNs and ports for your sets If you are using the default start DN 211 a completed chart is provided in Table 25 on page 244 Table 73 Cross referencing ports and DNs 26 White Blue DN DN DN DN DN DN 1 Blue White Port 201 Port 301 Port 401 Port 501 Port 601 Port 701 27 White Orange DN DN DN DN DN DN 2 Orange White Port 202 Port 302 Port 402 Port 502 Port 602 Port 702 28 White Green DN DN DN
257. l UTAM Inc Voice over IP Wide area network P0993133 03 Preface 37 Related publications The following documents provide further information about the Business Communications Manager related media bay modules extension equipment and system applications and software e Business Communications Manager 3 0 Programming and Operations Guide P0993211 describes core system operational configuration and how to program the Business Communications Manager equipment e Telephone Features Programming Guide P0993 136 provides feature descriptions and programming for the numerous telephone features available to users through the buttons on digital telephone sets e Business Communications Manager 3 0 BIX Box Wiring Guide P0993134 provides illustrations for correctly wiring internal cable connections to telephones e All optional Business Communications Manager applications have installation and user guides specific to that application For an overview of these application user guides refer to Telephony Features and Options on page 353 Guide type CallPilot applications Call center applications Applications Installation amp Maintenance Title CallPilot Manager Set Up and Operation Guide CallPilot Reference Guide CallPilot Fax Set up amp Operation Guide CallPilot Fax User Guide CallPilot Message Networking Setup and Operation Guide CallPilot Message Networking User Guide CallPilot Programming Record
258. l signals or voltages client A client is a computer system or process that requests a service of another computer system or process For example a workstation requesting the contents of a file from a file server is a client of the file server cold start A cold start occurs when you lose all system programming or if the system was down for maintenance and you want to start it up again Companion portable telephone Hand held wireless telephones that allow complete mobility within the reach of Companion base stations or an external antenna Portable telephones provide many but not all standard system features They also share some of the same programming as desk telephones Installation and Maintenance Guide 362 Glossary Companion Wireless The name for the communication systems which use radio technology to transmit and receive signals between its components and the Business Communications Manager Conference A feature that allows the user to establish a three way call D channel Data channel An ISDN standard transmission channel which is packet switched The channel is used for call setup signaling and data transmission data link connection indentifier DLCI The DLCI is used to identify a PVC in frame relay networks DECT cordless telephone system Hand held wireless telephones that allow complete mobility within the reach of DECT base stations Portable telephones provide many but not all standard s
259. l Charge Rate Indication CCRD ISDN Call Connection Limit Loop avoidance Network Call Transfer Executive Intrusion Break in Three Party Trunk Route Optimization TRO Route Optimization Trunk Anti Tromboning Table 40 ISDN services by Protocol Protocol Available ISDN services NI Basic Call Caribbean North America DID Name display Number display ONN blocking ETSI Euro Basic Call Australia CALA Denmark France DDI Germany Global Holland Hong Kong Italy Norway PRC Spain Kingdom Sweden Switzerland Taiwan United sub addressing on S loop ETSI Call Diversion partial rerouting AOC E specific changes for Holland and Italy MCID CLIP COLP CLIR P0993133 03 System Region Attributes 303 Mobility Services by Region Table 41 shows the Mobility services that are supported by the Business Communications Manager and the regions that can use each type Table 41 Mobility services by region Profile Available Mobility Service Caribbean North American PRC Companion CT2 Plus Etiquette CALA Companion CT2 Plus Hong Kong Taiwan Companion CT2 Plus Etiquette DECT Australia Denmark France Germany Global Holland Italy Norway Spain Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom DECT Media Bay Module Availability by Region Some of the media bay modules are customized for a sp
260. l a Media Bay Module on page 109 FEM6 MBM NT7B07AAAC NT7B07AAAC Fiber expansion media bay module FEM on page 82 Install a Media Bay Module on page 109 DDIM MBM NT5B52AAA NT5B52AAA Digital Drop amp Insert MUX DDIM on page 83 Install a Media Bay Module on page 109 Installation and Maintenance Guide 44 Ch apter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware BCM200 Platform Base Hardware The BCM200 platform base hardware has the following primary components e 1x Platform base chassis see BCM200 platform base chassis on page 44 e 2xMedia bay module bays MBM see Media bay modules MBMs on page 71 e 1x Sliding base function tray BFT see Base Function Tray Component Hardware on page 54 Figure 3 illustrates the BCM200 configuration primary components The figure shows the base function tray installed in the BCM200 platform base chassis Figure 3 BCM200 platform base chassis and primary components eo eee ee e E Platform ES z base i 9 9 9 l chassis y S E sem WE WES ee f A Base function tray latch Base function tray 2 x Media bay module MBM bays MBM ejector BCM200 platform base chassis The BCM200 platform base chassis design provides multiple points of access to the base platform
261. l standard power supply in a BCM200 platform base chassis The I O card must be removed from the platform base chassis before you perform this procedure The base function tray must be partially removed Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge N Always wear a ground wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container Warning Power supply cable management is critical Cable damage can result due to N loose or incorrectly positioned cables 1 Obtain and use only the power supply recommended by Nortel Networks 2 Place the new power supply into the platform base chassis Note Install the power supply carefully Ensure the power supply cables are not entangled or crushed against any internal components 3 Secure the power supply to the platform base chassis Align the power supply mounting holes with the chassis holes Install the chassis screws at the rear of the platform base chassis See Figure 121 Do not over tighten the power supply chassis mounting screws Figure 121 Install the BCM200 power supply chassis screws 4 Run the P4 P5 P6 power supply cable and the IDE cable to the hard disk The I O card is not installed in the platform base chassis for this step Perform the following a Route the power cable between the I O card chassis standoffs in the area shown see Figure 122 Run the IDE cable in the same m
262. lace data card and processing hardware components Warning You must remove all of the connections to the Business Communications N Manager before you power the system down Failure to disconnect lines before power down can cause damage to the system Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static N discharge Always wear a ground wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container The following are field replaceable units FRUs for the BCM200 and BCM400 platforms e Base function tray e Cards WAN MSC Modem e Computer memory e PEC cards Main card CMOS battery System status LEDs Ten LEDs on the front of the Business Communications Manager base function tray indicate PCI card and hardware status Use the LEDs to determine PCI device status as follows e Green LED on Device is present and the driver is active e Green LED flashing Driver is not running e Green LED off Device is not present Card Replacement Procedures For a description of the function of each type of card on the Business Communications Manager system refer to Data networking components on page 62 The base function tray BFT contains all of the cards described by the replacement procedures Use the procedures in this section to replace the following cards e Wide area network WAN card Media services card MSC Modem card Installation and Maintena
263. lane The number and configuration of the media bay modules depend on the number of bays available in the platform base chassis and DS30 system resources The BCM200 platform base chassis provides two media bay module bays The BCM400 platform base chassis provides four media bay module bays All media bay module bays must contain either a media bay module or a MBM filler blanking plate Populate the bays with media bay modules as required Fill unpopulated media bay module bay openings in the platform base chassis with the MBM filler blanking plate see Figure 10 Figure 10 Media bay module filler blanking plate fie Filler blanking Se plate face D L BL TU Installation and Maintenance Guide 52 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware The media bay modules slide into the MBM bays and lock into place Pull on the MBM ejector to release the MBM or filler blanking plate The module or filler blanking plate partially ejects from the bay Slide the the media bay module out of the bay to remove from the platform base chassis Figure 11 shows the BCM200 platform MBM bays and release mechanism Figure 11 BCM200 media bay module bays P A eo OT 7777 WH f Hi ff iE WY ILI LL ILI P l 1 S M isl aes pen a 3 X wf lt Ejector x P0993133 03 Chapter 1 Intro
264. le 49 record the number of each type of extension you have 2 Usethe number of extensions and the number of extensions per module to determine how many modules you need Table 49 Station media bay modules required Number of Number of Type of media bay extensions Number of Type of extension extensions module per module modules required Digital extensions DSM 16 DSM 16 16 DSM 16 Digital extensions DSM 32 DSM 32 32 DSM 32 Digital extensions 4X16 16 DSM 16 Analog extensions ASM8 8 ASM 8 Installation and Maintenance Guide 316 Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings Table 49 Station media bay modules required Number of Number of Type of media bay extensions Number of Type of extension extensions module per module modules required Cordless handsets DECT 32 DECT DECT selected profiles only Digital extensions are digital or IP telephones You do not need to include IP telephones when calculating the number of required DSM modules For a list of the telephones that can be used with the Business Communications Manager system refer to Telephones and adapters on page 85 Analog extensions include single line telephones fax machines and modems An example for North America e If you require 12 digital extensions you need one DSM 16 DSM 16 e If you require 24 digital extensions you need one DSM 32 DSM 32 Note If you require only a few analo
265. le 61 ASM6B8 settings for upgraded 2 5 systems and new 3 0 systems Select Select Enter these switch To Select Enter these switch To Custom bus offset settings assign offset settings assign DN range 1 273 4 5 6 these 1 2 3s3 4 5 e these DNs DNs 2 5 system upgraded to 3 0 New 3 0 system 0 on on on on on on 221 228 0 on on on on on on 221 228 1 on on off on on on 228 236 1 on on off on on on 228 236 2 on off on on on on 377 384 2 on off on on on on 237 244 3 on off off on on on 385 392 3 on off off on on on 245 252 0 on on on on on off 237 244 0 on on on on on off 253 260 1 on on off on on off 245 252 1 on on off on on off 261 268 2 on off on on on off 393 400 2 on off on on on off 269 275 3 on off off on on off 401 408 3 on off off on on off 276 284 0 on on on on off on 253 260 0 on on on on off on 285 292 4 1 on on off on off on 261 268 1 on on off on off on 293 300 2 on off on on off on 409 416 2 on off on on off on 301 308 3 on off off on off on 417 424 3 on off off on off on 309 316 0 on on on on off off 269 276 0 on on on on off off 317 324 1 on on off on off off 277 284 1 on on off on off off 325 332 2 2 on off on on off off 425 432 2 on off on on off off 333 340 3 on off off on off off 433 440 3 on off off on off off 341 348 0 on
266. lead to the surge protector The recommended wire gauge is 6 AWG 4 mm Connect the ground lead to the building ground Do not connect to a ground rod or series of ground rods If you cannot connect the ground lead to the building ground connect the ground lead to the metal frame of the building The connection must be no more than 2 m 6 5 ft to 3 m 10 ft long You can connect the ground lead to the 120 V ac conduit which is connected to the building ground However Nortel Networks does not recommend using the 120 V ac conduit 3 Route and connect the coaxial cable from the outdoor antenna to the surge protector P0993133 03 Chapter 12 Install Companion or DECT Systems 275 4 Route and connect the coaxial cable from the surge protector to the appropriate base station BNC connector Note The total length of the coaxial cables from the outdoor antenna to the base station must not exceed 10 m 33 ft 5 This procedure is complete Install DECT Systems The DECT system requires a DECT media bay module to allow communication between the DECT handsets and the Business Communications Manager The module installs in the Business Communications Manager base unit or expansion unit A maximum of eight base stations which are distributed throughout the transmission area are connected to the module After this step is complete the handsets are subscribed to the Business Communications Manager system For detailed i
267. line F78 4 Exit the Unified Manager 5 Set the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 to Tones ON when you are assigning an analog voice device Set the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 to Tones OFF when you are assigning a data communication device For details refer to the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 User Guide The default is Tones OFF 6 This procedure is complete Test the ATA 2 Confirm that the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 is operating by connecting a single line telephone to the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 Make an internal call and an external call using the telephone connected to the ATA 2 Next call the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 from an system telephone Refer to the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 User Guide for details Installation and Maintenance Guide 284 Chapter 13 Install Analog Terminal Adapters ATA 2 Data Communication The Business Communications Manager ATA 2 connects a standard analog data device such as a FAX or modem to the Business Communications Manager system This section shows the additional steps required to install ATA 2 for data communication Data transmission requirements When using the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 for data transmission the analog loop resistance must not exceed 200 ohms for example 730 m of 0 4 mm wire or 2 400 ft of 26 AWG wire The external line assigned to the ATA 2 must follow the transm
268. ling before hanging up 2 Perform such activities in the off peak hours such as early mornings or late evenings P0993133 03 EMI EMC FCC Part 15 Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Important Safety Instructions The following safety instructions cover
269. ling to the unit Specifically operations requiring the unit to be powered down must have the network connections central office lines removed first Enhanced 911 Configuration Caution Warning Local state and federal requirements for Emergency 911 services support by Customer Premises Equipment vary Consult your telecommunication service provider regarding compliance with applicable laws and regulations Note For information about 911 configuration refer to the Enhanced 911 E911 Configuration section in the Business Communications Manager 3 0 Programming Operations Guide Radio frequency Interference AN Warning Equipment generates RF energy This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy If not installed and used in accordance with the installation manual it may cause interference to radio communications It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with ICES 003 CLASS A Canadian EMI Requirements Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference in which case the user at his or her own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference Installation and Maintenance Guide Telecommunication Registration Business Communications Manager equipment meets all applicable requirements of both Industry Canada CS 03 and U
270. lled in the base function tray The main card contains the following hardware Figure 20 1 x Processor 1 x 168 pin 256MB DIMM maximum of 2 x 256MB DIMMS 1 x modem card North American system only 1 x lithium coin battery cell CMOS 1 x 2 slot PCI riser card Main card connectors PCI Riser card connectors _ Modem M ES l f f ANN NF UU VUUDUUVUUuuv card CMOS DIMM connectors battery Pa connector Main card P0993133 03 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware 61 Main card connections The main card provides peripheral and telephony processing control for the Business Communications Manager system The main card connects to the I O card system status display SSD card modem interface card Figure 21 shows the main card and I O card connectors Figure 24 Card connections Chassis DIMM connectors ens front rear IN e e SSD board T T connector 4 TE dE EIE Connect to hard disk TT I HEME Connect to TI red
271. ly when a call comes in on a redirected line under Capabilities in System DNs programming This feature is different from Call Forward in two ways Line redirection redirects only external calls and redirects calls to destinations outside the system Call forward redirects calls only to destinations within the system P0993133 03 Glossary 367 Link If the Business Communications Manager system is connected to a Private Branch Exchange PBX the Link signal is used to access special features The Link signal can be included as part of a longer stored sequence on an External Autodial button or in a Speed Dial code The Link symbol uses two of the 24 spaces in a dialing sequence Local Area Network LAN A network of interconnected computers such as the Business Communications Manager sharing the resources of a single processor or server within a relatively small geographic area mailbox A storage place for voice messages on Business Communications Manager Voice Messaging Meridian 1 ISDN Primary Rate Interface This is the MCDN protocol which is used between members of the Nortel Networks Meridian family of Private Telecommunication Network Exchanges The signalling information is carried via time slot 16 of a 2 048 Mbit s digital transmission system MHz A unit of measure indicating frequency in millions of cycles per second microprocessor The Central Processing Unit CPU component that controls all activity inside the
272. media services card MSC connectors Locate the MSC connectors on the front of the Business Communications Manager base function tray Refer to Media services card MSC on page 57 Media Service Card Connections The MSC faceplate provides the following connections for optional telephony equipment Auxiliary ringer Page relay Page output Music on hold Install an auxiliary ringer An auxiliary ringer is a customer supplied piece of hardware that provides external ringing capability to telephones on the Business Communications Manager if the telephones are set to allow it Use this procedure to install an auxiliary ringer 1 Use the installation instructions that came with the ringer hardware to install the auxiliary ringer Connect the ringer generator miniature jack to the auxiliary ringer output on the MSC Refer to Figure 184 Figure 184 Auxiliary ringer jack Auxiliary ringer jack MSC Faceplate Ring Auxiliary ringer Tip Lloooo Sleeve Tip Auxiliary relay output Ring Auxiliary relay output Sleeve Ground Warning The auxiliary ringer must not be connected to exposed plant The ringer must not draw more than 50 mA from a 40 V DC source Installation and Maintenance Guide 288 Chapter 14 Install Optional Telephony Equipment Activate auxiliary ringer programming You can activate the auxiliary ringer by setting auxiliary ring for specific external lines and Busines
273. meout s Service Mar ee i SSM Status Up Watchdog Disk Mirrori Unified Man Driver Deby Table 34 lists the values on the LED Settings screen Table 34 LED Display screen settings Attribute Values Description Version Read only The current version of the LED monitoring application Reset Yes No N A Use Yes to allow the system status monitor board to reset the computing platform in the event that the sanity check fails the user set parameters P0993133 03 Chapter 15 Troubleshooting 295 Table 34 LED Display screen settings Continued Sanity Time 60 255 The time in seconds between sanity checks Default 240 Timeouts 0 254 The number of sanity checks that must fail before the system Default 10 status monitor sends a reset signal to the computing platform 4 This procedure is complete Business Communications Manager does not Function The Business Communications Manager can experience a complete failure for any of the following reasons Power supply failure Incorrect power supply connections AC power failure Installation and Maintenance Guide 296 Chapter 15 Troubleshooting Emergency Telephone Does Not Function If the emergency telephone is connected to the system use the following procedure b amp b O N a o Check the power LED on the ASM 8 to
274. mpletely from the platform base chassis see Remove the base function tray on page 150 Remove the base function tray bezel if applicable Insert the WAN card in the same PCI slot from which you removed the original card Refer to Figure 147 Push firmly on the WAN card until it sits completely in the top PCI riser card connector 6 Position the PCI cover plate on the front of the base function tray such that the base function tray and cover plate screw holes align 7 Position the PCI cover plate locking screw in the PCI cover plate Tighten the PCI cover plate locking screw until the plate is firmly set in place see Figure 147 Figure 147 Install the WAN card 1 Install the A WAN card PCI cover plate e A 2 Install the PCI p ty 2 cover plate WAN card Installation and Maintenance Guide 222 Chapter 10 Replace Data Cards and Processing Hardware 8 Partially insert the base function tray in the platform base chassis see Install the base function tray on page 151 Ensure you do not pinch or damage any cables 9 Install the base function tray bezel See Install the base function tray bezel on page 154 10 Move the base function tray latches to the locked position and install the latch screws 11 Insert all connectors in the correct locations on the base function tray face 12 Restore the unit to operation For details refer to Restart
275. mponents Always place the components in static free container Installation and Maintenance Guide 206 Chapter 9 Replace or Upgrade a Power Supply 1 If you still have access to the Unified Manager shut down the system using the Shutdown command For details refer to Shut down the system software on page 145 Otherwise skip to step 2 2 Setup the Business Communications Manager for maintenance as described in Shut down the system hardware on page 146 Disconnect the BCM400 system from the AC power outlet Remove the standard power supply from the platform base chassis see Remove a BCM400 standard power supply on page 199 Continue to the next step in this procedure when complete 5 Remove the power supply support bracket from the platform base chassis see Remove a BCM400 standard power supply on page 199 Continue to the next step in this procedure when complete 6 Remove the power supply adapter tab from the support bracket see Figure 133 Use pliers to bend and snap the tab away from the support bracket Make sure you remove only the inner adapter tab Figure 133 Remove the BCM400 power supply adapter tab from the support bracket Remove the inner adapter tab 7 Remove the knockout plate from the rear of the platform base chassis see Figure 134 Figure 134 Remove the power supply knockout bracket Rear view Remove this bracket to accommodate redundant power sup
276. munications Manager can also be set to use this application as a relay agent to an external DHCP server on the network DNS Domain Name System Business Communications Manager 2 5 functions as both a gateway to the internet and as a DNS proxy for your network The DNS service allows clients to enter a domain name such as www nortelnetworks com instead of an IP address when using web browsers IP Routing Business Communications Manager 2 5 supports the following IP routing protocols static routing RIP Routing Information Protocol OSPF Open Shortest Path First IPX Routing Business Communications Manager 2 5 supports the following IPX Routing protocols in a NetWare environment static routing RIP Routing Information Protocol SAP Service Advertising Protocol P0993133 03 System Options 357 NAT Network Address Translation Business Communications Manager 2 5 supports both static and dynamic NAT for a number of packet types and protocols NAT is a network security feature that translates the IP addresses used within your private network to different IP addresses known to internet users outside your private network Policy Management Business Communications Manager 2 5 allows you to implement classes of service and assign priority levels to different types of traffic using the DiffServ network architecture You can configure policies that monitor the characteristics of traffic for
277. n a BCM400 standard or redundant feature option RFO platform configuration The standard Business Communications Manager platform base chassis has one fan The BCM400 RFO version has two fans Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static discharge Always wear a ground wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container Before you shut down the system determine if a fan in the redundant version has failed Refer to Table 23 1 If you still have access to the Unified Manager shut down the system using the Shutdown command For details refer to Shut down the system software on page 145 Otherwise skip to the next step 2 Setup the Business Communications Manager for maintenance as described in Shut down the system hardware on page 146 Disconnect the Business Communications Manager system from the AC power outlet Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 5 Remove the fan access panel at the rear of the platform base chassis see Figure 105 a Remove the fan access panel screws at the top and bottom of the panel Place the screws in a safe location b Tipthe top of the fan access panel toward you C Grasp the fan access panel with both hands and lift the away from the platform base chassis Do not stretch the fan cable s P0993133 03 Chapter 8 Install or Replace a Cooling Fan 18
278. n and Latin American countries with European based standards Installation and Maintenance Guide 300 System Region Attributes Language Availability Table 36 lists the languages available for each region and a specific order in which the languages are set as default Table 36 Languages Region Language CALA Caribbean Hong Kong North American PRC Taiwan NA English NA French NA Spanish Australia United Kingdom UK English Denmark Danish Norwegian Swedish NA English France Euro French NA English Germany German NA English Global NA English NA French NA Spanish Turkish Holland Dutch Euro French NA English Italy Italian NA English Norway Norwegian Swedish Danish NA English Spain Euro Spanish NA English Sweden Swedish Norwegian Danish NA English Switzerland German Euro French Italian NA English Table 37 shows a breakdown of the language support for South American and Central American countries Table 37 South Central America language breakout Language Spanish English French Country Dominican Republic Peru St Thomas Guyana Haiti Jamaica Panama USVI create Puerto Rico Uruguay Aruba St Kitts Argentina Venezuela Bahamas E TET Bolivia El Salvador Bermuda St Maarten Chile Honduras Curacao SE Columbia Ecuador Trinidad IRSE CEE Costa Rica Paraguay Anguilla St Vincent Guatemala Antig
279. n for information e tis no longer necessary to notify the Telephone Company of your phone s Registration and REN numbers However you must provide this information to the telephone company if they request it The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operation or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modification to maintain uninterrupted service e Do not attempt to repair this equipment If you experience trouble write for warranty and repair information Nortel Networks 640 Massman Drive Nashville TN 37210 USA Ringer Equivalence Number The FCC Registration label on bottom of phone includes a Ringer Equivalence Number REN which is used to determine the number of devices you may connect to your phone line A high total REN may prevent phones from ringing in response to an incoming call and may make placing calls difficult In most areas a total REN of 5 should permit normal phone operation To determine the total REN allowed on your telephone line consult your local telephone company Hearing Aids This phone is compatible with hearing aids equipped with an appropriate telecoil option Programming Emergency Numbers When programming emergency numbers and or making test calls to emergency numbers 1 Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for cal
280. n off 77 84 If your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 channel split DS30 channel 7 is not available To assign these CTM switch settings There are two models of CTMs e CTMs have four lines therefore you can add a maximum of four CTMs per DS30 bus e CTMSs have eight lines This module uses two offset settings per module Therefore you can add a maximum of two CTM8 modules per DS30 bus e You can also mix the two modules For instance if you have two existing CTM modules with offset 0 and 1 you can add a CTMS on offset 2 CTM The CTM provides connections for four analog calling line identification CLID PSTN lines Each voice line uses one line in the offset Since each DS30 channel has four lines per offset you can assign a maximum of four CTMs to a single DS30 bus by making the offset switch settings different for each module You can also combine three CTMs with the trunk module part of the 4X16 module on the same DS30 bus CTMS The CTMS provides connections for eight analog calling line identification CLID PSTN lines Each line uses one voice line Since each DS30 bus has four lines per offset you require two offsets for each module You can assign a maximum of two CTMSs to a DS30 bus by making the offset switch settings different for each module P0993133 03 Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings 335 You can also combine a CTM8 with a 4X16 module on the same DS30 number When you cho
281. n this step Note If you are replacing a faulty power supply module power down the power supply module Partially remove the power supply module from the power supply cage Do not completely remove the power supply module IMPORTANT When the power is on wait several seconds before removing the power supply module completely from the power supply cage to ensure complete electrical discharge P0993133 03 Chapter 9 Replace or Upgrade a Power Supply 215 Note If you are installing the redundant power supply for the first time remove both power supply modules from the redundant power supply cage Remove the power supply modules before you install the power supply in the platform base chassis see Figure 143 Continue to Step 5 of this procedure Rear view Power supply modules slide out of the power supply cage d 3 Compress the locking _ tab toward the handle ee BN O SS GP o A mA A Zu d H gt SPa q 1 Unfasten the power supply 9 Lift the power supply module locking nut XE module handle N 4 5 Place the power supply module on a flat clean static free surface 6 Repeat this step for any remaining power supply modules 7 This procedure is complete Installation and Maintenance Guide 216 Chapter 9 Replace or Upgrade a Power Supply P0993133 03 217 Chapter 10 Replace Data Cards and Processing Hardware This chapter describes how to rep
282. nce Guide 218 Chapter 10 Replace Data Cards and Processing Hardware j Danger Electrical shock warning Disconnect the power cord telephone cables and network cables before opening the computer Read and follow installation instructions carefully Caution Use only a Nortel Networks approved replacement Contact your account representative for the current list of approved replacement parts Figure 144 shows an interior view of the base function tray looking forward The illustration identifies the location of interior components and chassis features Use the flow chart shown in Figure 145 to replace the cards Figure 144 Base function tray interior components WAN slot MSC slot PCI cover plate PCI cover screw A Modem card Base function tray face interface PCI Riser bur card i EE nnnonnnnnnnnnnr connectors B E cE M q B Modem _ i card Loo o o e Main card P0993133 03 Chapter 10 Replace Data Cards and Processing Hardware 219 Figure 145 Card replacement overview If possible do a software shutdown Perform BCM maintenance shutdown Remove the base function tray Remove the old card Install the new card in the same BFT slot Insert the Base function tray in the BFT chassis cage Restore unit to operation C
283. ncing file transfer and internet access BRI ISDN loop that provides both T S and U2 and U4 region specific reference point loops These loops can support both network T and S loops and terminal equipment S loop connections This type of line provides incoming and outgoing access to an ISDN network ETSI ISDN BRI is the European Telecommunications Standards Institute specification for BRI ISDN service BRI provides two bearer B channels operating at 64 kbits s and a data D channel which operates at 16 kbits s The D channel is used primarily to carry call information Like loop start trunks BRI lines can be configured as manual answer or auto answer DASS2 British Trunk provides multi line IDA interconnection to the British Telecom network DPNSS international term Q Sig or Q 931 a digital private network signaling system which allows phone systems from different manufacturers to be tied together over E1 lines offering significant enhancements to Business Communications Manager 2 5 networking capabilities DPNSS makes it easier to support centralized network functionality within private networks for operators and attendants dealing with large numbers of calls Its routing capabilities provide more of the larger network capabilities without the expense of installing a new system re configuring all the nodes and worrying about a lot of downtime Most functionality over DPNSS lines is transparent once the DPNSS is p
284. nction tray AFT e 4x Sliding media bay module bays MBM e 1x Sliding base function tray BFT The BCM400 RFO additional components are as follows e RAID controller card e Additional hard disk for RAID controller card e Redundant chassis cooling fan and fan panel e Redundant power supply cage and power supply modules Figure 5 illustrates the BCM400 RFO configuration The figure shows the base and advanced function trays installed in the BCM400 platform base chassis Figure 5 BCM400 platform base chassis and primary components Advanced function tray Advanced 3 function ff tray latch i 4 x Media bay module l MBM bays Base function e tray latch 20 MBM ejector Base function tray P0993133 03 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware 47 BCM400 platform base chassis The BCM400 platform is available in either a standard STD or RFO configuration Nortel Networks recommends that you know the location of the different components before attempting to install or maintain the system The BCM400 platform base chassis design provides multiple points of access to the base platform hardware components The front of the chassis has two sliding tray assemblies that house the base function tray and advanced function tray F
285. nd records the base station information in a provisioning record Caution You must install all base stations within 1230 m 4000 ft TCM wiring length of the Business Communications Manager system or base station module To optimize seamless hand off the difference in TCM wiring length between neighboring base stations must not exceed 300 m 1 000 ft Before you install or move wireless equipment in the United States check that you have approval from UTAM Inc The United States FCC has appointed UTAM Inc as the body responsible for coordinating and verifying the installation or relocation of unlicensed personal wireless communication devices To comply with UTAM Inc the system uses keys and credits to control user capacity and to ensure system location verification You require these software keys and credits to activate Companion services You purchase these credits at the time you place the order Position the Companion base station Avoid installing base stations on large concrete or marble columns because these columns affect radio coverage If possible place the base station a minimum of 1 m 40 in from these types of columns Do not install a base station with the antenna housings near metal objects Be careful not to damage existing wiring or panels Do not position base stations in ducts plenums or hollow spaces used to transport environmental air except where the duct plenum or hollow space is created by a suspe
286. nd wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container Cooling Fan Replacement Process Cooling fans circulate air through the chassis of the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis and expansion unit to prevent the components from overheating Figure 104 provides an overview of the fan replacement process Figure 104 Chassis cooling fan replacement overview FAN LED and or temp LED indicate problem Install new fan Set up unit for Connect fan maintenance cables to power Disconnect and remove failed fan Restore unit to operation Check fan LED Installation and Maintenance Guide 180 Chapter 8 Install or Replace a Cooling Fan Troubleshooting Fans There are three LEDs on the front of the Business Communications Manager base function tray and one on the front of the expansion unit used to assess fan function Table 23 describes the possible states of the fan and temperature LEDs Table 23 Fan and temperature LEDs on the base function tray Temperature Temperature is below threshold Temperature is in alarm status l Possible fan s failure Fans All installed fans are working There is a problem with a minimum of one fan 1 Power All components are working Component failure Remove a BCM400 cooling fan Use this procedure to remove the cooling fan s i
287. nded ceiling having lay in panels When you need more than one base station in a cell to meet traffic requirements position the base stations at the same cell center To place all base stations in the same cell center e for the USA a minimum of 54 in and a maximum of 9 ft 9 in distance between the center of one base station to the center of another e for Canada a minimum of 9 cm and a maximum of 1 5 m distance from edge to edge i Warning Never install base stations in rows Position base stations away from office areas or areas with high portable telephone traffic Table 3 on page 262 shows the minimum distance between office areas and base stations Install the base station on the ceiling or high on walls to maintain these minimum distances Installation and Maintenance Guide 262 Chapter 12 Install Companion or DECT Systems Table 31 Minimum distance between office areas and base stations Ht main S t 2 Attach a Companion Base Station to a wall or ceiling Install base stations on a wall or on a ceiling When installing base stations on a wall install them with their covers at the bottom as shown in Figure 169 on page 263 Allow for clearances around the base station as indicated in Table 32 Table 32 Clearance for the base stations Use this procedure to install a base station Fasten the bracket into position using two 8 38 mm 1 1 2 in screws 2 Route the cable from the Business Communicati
288. ndicates state OK Check for hardware a minimum of 1 PS no power to the D of system problem with fan needs attention module power power or heat inside housing Indicates all monitored in startup shutdown N A not all services are Oo condition of Services are mode working MSC may system status functioning check for problem not have started with MSC wiring correctly Connect the Data Networking Hardware This section describes how to connect network cards to the Business Communications Manager system AN Warning Check with your network administrator before you connect the Business Communications Manager to the network to ensure there are no IP address conflicts The default address for the Business Communications Manager system e IP 10 10 10 1 e Subnet 255 255 255 0 Warning If the default IP address would create a network conflict you must change the IP address of the Business Communications Manager before you connect any network connections To change the IP address outside of a network you can use one of the following e aterminal and a null modem cable acomputer and an ethernet crossover cable Refer to Use of a null modem serial cable on page 137 or Ethernet crossover cable usage on page 140 for detailed instructions about connecting to the Business Communications Manager Installation and Maintenance Guide 132 Chapter 5 Business Communications Manager System Startup Co
289. nel having appropriate training and experience necessary to be aware of hazards to which they are exposed in performing a task and of measures to minimize the danger to themselves or other persons Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunication network and AC mains are possible with this equipment To minimize risk to service personnel and users the Business Communications Manager system must be connected to an outlet with a third wire Earth Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of high leakage currents becoming available on metal system surfaces during power line fault events near network lines These leakage currents normally safely flow to Protective Earth via the power cord Therefore it is mandatory that connection to an earthed outlet is performed first and removed last when cabling to the unit Specifically operations requiring the unit to be powered down must have the network connections exchange lines removed first Additional Safety Information The following interfaces are classified as Telecommunication Network Voltage TNV circuits and may be connected to exposed plant e DTM interface e WAN interface e TCM Isolator The following interfaces are classified as Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV circuits and shall not be connected to exposed plant e BRIM Interface e TCM extensions e external music sources MSCX e auxiliary ringer AUX e paging system relay PAGE P0993133 03 13
290. nformation 4 Tip Tip Symbol Alerts you to additional information that can help you perform a task P0993133 03 Preface 35 Y Warning Grounding Symbol Alerts you to ground yourself with an antistatic grounding strap before performing the maintenance procedure 5 Warning Disconnect Symbol Alerts you to remove the Business Communications Manager and Business Communications Manager expansion cabinet power cords from the AC outlet before performing any maintenance procedure Text conventions This guide uses the following text conventions bold Courier text Indicates command names and options and text that you need to enter in italic text a command line interface Example Use the dinfo command Example Enter show ip alerts routes Indicates file and directory names new terms book titles Web addresses and variables in command syntax descriptions bold text Indicates command names screen titles options and text for a graphical user interface GUI angle brackets gt Indicates a keyboard key press or simultaneous key presses i e ENTER or lt CTRL j gt Acronyms This guide uses the following acronyms alphabetical order ANSI ASM AWG BIOS BPS BRI CAP CIR CLID CSMA CD CSU CTM DECT American National Standards Institute Analog station media bay module American wire gauge Basic input output system Bits per second Basic rate interface m
291. nified Manager Browser Requirements To use Business Communications Manager Unified Manager you must have e Java Virtual Machine JVM 5 0 build 5 0 0 3188 or greater one of the following web browsers Netscape Communicator 4 5 or greater Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 0 or greater Installation and Maintenance Guide 92 Chapter 2 Auxilliary Requirements and Installation Process Overview If you are using Netscape Communicator set the following parameters Enable Java On Cached document comparison Every time If you are using Microsoft Internet Explorer set the following parameters Check for newer versions Every visit to the page Java JIT compiler enabled On Preloading Java class Files On Your Workstation To preload Java class files on your workstation 1 Open Unified Manager from your desktop The first window displays a number of functional buttons Click the Install Client button From the list choose the link to the Java Class for the browser you are using Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator Two more Java Class links appear Click on the Java Class link that applies to your browser A download wizard appears Follow the prompts on the wizard to download the Java Class files Optimizing Unified Manager Speed The following are a number of suggestions about how to ensure you have the optimal connection to your Unified Manager while you program or maintain your Business Communi
292. nnect the cards The data networking hardware MSC is installed in the Business Communications Manager at the factory All systems have dual embedded ethernet interfaces Some models come with an embedded V 90 modem WAN cards and modems are ordered separately Figure 74 shows a BCM200 configuration with a field installed WAN card Figure 74 Base function tray data cards WAN card field upgrade North America version shown L_ _ Media services card Modem port North COM Etherne USB BCM200 version America only port t ports ports Note Your system may not have all the cards indicated Warning Do not plug the WAN or modem cables into the system unless it is running A For maintenance shutdowns ALWAYS follow this process a Shut down the software through the Unified Manager if possible b Remove all cable connects from the front of the base function tray and expansion unit c Remove power from the Business Communications Manager and the expansion unit d DO NOT RECONNECT the cables to the front of the units until the power connection has been restored P0993133 03 Chapter 5 Business Communications Manager System Startup 133 Connect wiring to the WAN card Ensure the system is powered up before connecting this cable WAN card face To connect the WAN card using the RJ48C connector insert the wide lOO C RJ48c jack area network W
293. ns Manager expansion unit The BCM200 holds a maximum of two media bay modules The BCM400 holds a maximum of four media bay modules The expansion unit holds a maximum of six media bay modules Trunk media bay modules connect telecommunications lines to the Business Communications Manager system These are determined by e which lines are available from your telephone service provider e what lines you require for the types of telephones you want to use e budget considerations Table 9 lists the types of trunk media bay modules that are available for the Business Communications Manager system Table 9 Trunk media bay modules DTM Connects digital public switched Can connect to four types of lines TI Digital trunk media bay module telephone lines to the Business NA PRI ETSI in UK only and Euro Communications Manager system PRI P0993133 03 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware 75 Table 9 Trunk media bay modules Continued CTM Caller ID trunk media bay module CTM8 Caller ID trunk media bay module Connects a maximum of four analog public switched telephone lines to the Business Communications Manager system Connects a maximum of eight analog public switched telephone lines to the Business Communications Manager system Only available for North American systems BRI Basic rate interface media bay module Connects
294. nsity FDD DS30 6 and or 7 do not support Companion The CTM8 module when set to single density uses two offsets on a DS30 bus You assign the first offset to the module and the second offset is automatically selected This means that you can choose offset pairs 0 1 1 2 or 2 3 Because the module requires two offsets on the same DS30 you cannot select offset 3 Refer to CTM switch settings on page 334 When the CTM8 is set to double density you can install four CTMS8s per DS30 bus using all four offsets Not all modules are available to all systems Refer to Media Bay Module System Selection on page 313 for specifics about each module Note Remember if you have chosen a 3 5 channel split for your system DS30 7 is no longer available for media bay modules Installation and Maintenance Guide 324 Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings Choose the assigned order for modules Assign the media bay modules and DS30 channels in the order shown in Figure 197 Station modules are assigned starting with DS30 2 This allows telephones to start numbering from the system Start DN Default 221 The exception to this is a DSM used for Companion which must be installed on DS30 6 DSM32 or DS30 6 and 7 two DSM 16s If your system is set to a 3 5 split you can only assign a DSM16 to DS30 6 for Companion Trunk modules are assigned starting at DS30 7 in a system with a 2 6 DS30 split and at DS30 6 in a system wit
295. nstallation refer to the Business Communications Manager 3 0 DECT Installation and Maintenance Guide Each jack on the DECT module corresponds to an internal port on the DECT module These numbers are used to access the base stations when you disable them to turn mobile recording on when you subscribe new handsets Warning Plug each base station in sequentially Ensure that each base station starts to N perform the startup sequence before plugging in the next base station You can check base station states through the DECT module interface Warning For detailed information refer to the DECT Installation and Maintenance Guide Figure 177 demonstrates these connections Installation and Maintenance Guide 276 Chapter 12 Install Companion or DECT Systems Figure 177 R451 connectors on the DECT media bay module P0993133 03 277 Chapter 13 Install Analog Terminal Adapters This chapter provides installation instructions for the Analog Terminal Adapter 2 ATA 2 The Analog Terminal Adapter 2 Business Communications Manager ATA 2 connects a standard analog voice device or data communication device to the Business Communications Manager system Examples of analog voice devices are single line telephones or answering machines Examples of data communication devices are modems and fax machines The Business Communications Manager ATA 2 provides on premise service only unexposed plant only Before Installat
296. nter requires keycode this Automatic Call Distribution ACD system provides tools for handling incoming calls to an agent network The application also provides administration supervision and reporting tools Nortel Networks Professional Call Center upgrade requires keycode this is an expanded version of the basic Call Center application Call Center Reporting Set Up and Operation Guide Nortel Networks Call Center Reporting requires keycode monitors the statistics of a call center This application is also compatible with IP wallboards from Itel and SYMON Call Detail Recording System Administration Guide Call Detail Recording no keycode required records and reports call activity from the Business Communications Manager You can create reports from this information to help you manage system usage effectively CallPilot Reference Guide CallPilot is a core Business Communications Manager application It works with the telephone system to provide automated receptionist service by answering incoming calls and routing them to telephones or mailboxes on the system This guide explains what the various parts of the CallPilot application do CallPilot Manager Set Up and Operation Guide and CallPilot Programming Record CallPilot Manager is the web based application that you use to set up and administer CallPilot Automated Attendant is the CallPilot answering service that answers incoming calls with a Company Gre
297. nts in static free container Warning Risk of shock A Hazardous voltage levels are maintained for several seconds on removable modules Do not completely remove the module from the power supply cage for several seconds after disengaging the module from the cage 1 Setup the server for maintenance see Shut down the system hardware on page 146 Disconnect all cables from the front of the base function tray 2 Disconnect the platform base chassis and the expansion unit if applicable from the AC power connection 3 Remove the top cover from the BCM400 platform base chassis see Remove the platform base chassis top cover on page 161 4 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 5 Remove the power supply modules see Remove a power supply module on page 214 Continue to the next step in this procedure when complete Note Partially remove the power supply module from the power supply cage Do not completely remove the power supply module IMPORTANT When the power is on wait several seconds before removing the power supply module completely from the power supply cage to ensure complete electrical discharge Disconnect the power supply cables from the I O card media bay backplane and hard disk Unfasten the cable clamp that holds the power and IDE cables in place The cable clamp is located under the top cover of the platform base chassis Run all cables
298. number When the telephone rings the display shows Set lt nn gt calling The number that appears on the display is the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 extension number Record the extension number Note The Automatic Set Relocation feature works with Business Communications Manager ATA 2 7 This procedure is complete P0993133 03 Chapter 13 Install Analog Terminal Adapters 283 Configure the ATA 2 Use this procedure to configure the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 using the Business Communications Manager Unified Manager For detailed information about using Unified Manager refer to the Business Communications Manager 3 0 Programming Operations Guide 1 2 Open the Unified Manager Assign the following line features to the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 e assign one external line to the telephone e set ringing for this line ON or OFF as required assign one intercom line e assign Held Line Reminder to ON e disable Full Handsfree e disable Handsfree Answerback e disable Paging Reception Assign an external line an intercom line or a line pool as the Prime Line for the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 Note Direct access to a CO line for modems fax machines and credit card gt verification machines is possible using the Hotline feature For direct access to a CO line program an external line as the Hotline Enter a pause to replace the telephone number for the Hot
299. ny media bay modules SD DSM 32 6 BRI Companion 7 BEEN Determine module DIP switch settings After you determine in which order you want to assign the modules you determine the specific switch settings for each module 1 Use Table 52 trunk modules and Table 53 station modules to determine a switch setting for all modules except the DECT and FEM modules Figure 199 shows an example of the table and how to do the following steps Step 1 On Table 52 or Table 53 circle the module names Step 2 Number the order in which you want to assign the modules Step 3 Determine the number of DS30s each module requires For some station modules this will depend on whether you choose to set the module to single or double density Step 4 Circle the DS30 bus and offset numbers Step 5 Follow the DS30 bus and offset number to the far right column where the switch settings are indicated Circle the setting for each module P0993133 03 Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings 327 Note If you must assign specific line or extension numbers to a module refer to the individual switch tables in Line and extension numbers for specific modules on page 332 for line and DN listings Figure 199 How to use the configuration map 1 Indicate the modules you want to install 4 Assign an offset Id Note how many DS30 buses each module requires umber to each module Media bay dul 1 positioning DI
300. o expand the number of extensions to 32 Digital Station media bay module DSM 32 supports 32 digital telephones through two amphenol connectors Set the full double density FDD switch to enable the module to carry 32 extensions over a half DS30 channel If required install a second DSM 32 and set the FDD switch to occupy the second half of the DS30 channel setting the FDD switch to expand the number of extensions to 64 Note Devices that share a DS30 channel must be identical Use two DSM 16 modules in full double density mode on a single DS30 channel Likewise use two DSM 32 modules in full double density mode on a single DS30 channel e 4X16 supports 16 digital telephones and does not require a separate trunk module Refer to 4X16 Media Bay Module on page 79 P0993133 03 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware 79 Figure 43 Faceplates of DSM 16 and DSM 32 o o o it Qu o DSM 16 i DSM 32 DSM 16 l l a E t AN Pc DE DSM 32 Power Status Amphenol connector Status LED Amphenol connectors 4X16 Media Bay Module North American systems only The 4X16 provides both analog trunk connections and connections to digital telephones The module a CTM media bay module with four analog lines and a DSM 16 digital telephone media bay module Each of the four ports support Caller ID and disconnect
301. o not use an electric screwdriver near the hard disk You can lose the information stored on the disk Shock can damage the hard disk Do not drop or hit the hard disk drive Warning You must remove all of the connections to the Business Communications Manager base function tray before you power the system down gt GO B Failure to disconnect lines before power down can cause damage to the system Installation and Maintenance Guide 166 Chapter 7 Hard Disk Replacement Procedures Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static discharge Always wear a ground wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container Figure 92 provides an overview of the hard disk replacement process Figure 92 Hard disk replacement overview If possible do a software shutdown Set up unit for Restore unit to maintenance operation Remove the hard disk and replace with new disk Perform system initialization and a BRU data restore Test all functions Remove a Hard Disk When a hard disk is causing problems or fails you must remove the unit from the BCM200 base platform chassis or the BCM400 advanced function tray This section describes two processes to remove a hard disk e Remove a hard disk cage containing the hard disk Remove a hard disk from the hard
302. o offset 3 Each shaded square represents the amount of the DS30 bus and the offset which the module requires If your system is configured for Partial double density PDD DS30 6 will support only modules set to single density If your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 split DS30 7 is not available to media bay modules If your system is configured for PDD and a 2 6 DS30 split DS30 7 will support only single density modules but it will also support Companion Note DSM 32 DSM 32 set to single density modules cannot be deployed on this bus ASM modules always use the single density dip switch settings with the appropriate offset If your system is set to PDD offsets 2 and 3 are not available to ASM8 modules Installation and Maintenance Guide 330 Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings Set the media bay module DIP switches Before you install the media bay modules into the Business Communications Manager housing you need to set the DIP switches Make a note of these settings either on the chart shown in Table 52 on page 328 or in the Programming Record forms Follow these steps to set the DIP switches 1 Locate the DIP switches on the module Figure 200 Switches on the media bay module i Underside of the i4 amp media bay module ssn as s Ty 654321 Off DTE s nna a e a s anaguu aa On EN
303. odule functions The handsets are registered to the base station but they can also roam between base stations DECT sets are ISDN sets and use the DN range of 597 to 624 with DN type ISDN and DECT If you require more than 28 DECT handsets use DNs from the Companion range and change the DN type to ISDN and DECT The Unified Manager provides a DECT Wizard that helps you coordinate the handset DNs between the Business Communications Manager and the DECT module Refer to the DECT documentation for details about using the Wizard Note On systems upgraded from 2 0 to 2 5 with three digit DNs starting at DN 221 DECT handsets default to the 501 to 532 DN range These numbers are based on systems with three digit DNs that use the default DN of 221 If you change either of those settings on your system adjust the numbering accordingly Mobility services by region on page 269 lists the regions that can accommodate DECT The following documentation is available for this system The Nortel Networks M626x DECT Deployment Tool guide is available on the Business Communications Manager CD Use the information in this guide to determine the most effective locations within your site for the base stations e Each handset also comes with a user guide that describes the handset features e The Business Communications Manager 3 0 DECT Installation and Maintenance Guide also on the CD describes the installation of the module and radio base station
304. of a three wire grounded electrical outlet clean free of traffic and excess dust dry and well ventilated within the temperature ranges of 10 C and 40 C 50 F and 95 F between 20 and 80 non condensing relative humidity enough space and strength to support the Business Communications Manager minimum of 46 cm 18 in from the floor ES Note The installation area must be of sufficient height from the floor to prevent water gt damage Electrical Requirements The following electrical requirements must be met Power must be supplied from non switched unobstructed outlet within 1 5 m 5 ft of the Business Communications Manager or expansion unit The supplied power must be a dedicated 110 V 120 V ac nominal or 220 V 230 V ac nominal 50 60 Hz 15 A minimum service with a third wire safety ground The third wire safety ground provides shock protection and avoids electromagnetic interference j Danger Risk of electric shock The safety of this product requires connection to an outlet with a third wire ground Use only with a three wire power cord and outlet Installation and Maintenance Guide 96 Chapter 2 Auxilliary Requirements and Installation Process Overview Caution Check ground connections Ensure that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metal water pipe system if present are connected together If these ground connections are not
305. off the base station power before connecting the coaxial cable of an outdoor antenna Always install the antenna at the cable entry point into the building Connect the lightning surge protector to ground before connecting the coaxial cable P0993133 03 Chapter 12 Install Companion or DECT Systems 273 1 Screw the antenna mounting plate vertically to the exterior wall of the building with lag bolts or other appropriate hardware Figure 175 shows how to fasten the mounting plate Figure 175 Install the outdoor omnidirectional external antenna Canada Mast Set screw 2f Exterior wall Connector mounting plate at the bas of the mast 2 Ew Shroud mounting hardware Plastic plug S lt Cable ties x V Co axial cable to IE surge protector on interior wall Lag bolts or appropriate NY 2 Feed one end of the coaxial cable up through the bottom of the antenna cover and attach the BNC connector to the base of the mast Slide the mast down into the cover until it fits Rotate the mast until the threaded hole in the base of the mast aligns with the set screw hole in the cover Tighten the set screw 5 Route the coaxial cable along the bottom edge of the plate between the cover and the wall plate Note The total length of the coaxial cables from the outdoor antenna to the base station must not exceed 10 m 33 ft Tie the cable to th
306. ommunications Commission FCC Notice 7 EMIEMC FCG Part 15 cese Ree aed Sole 9 Important Safety Instructions 0000 cee 9 International Regulatory Information lisse 11 Salety sov anise Ss ote cene S mtt dese beo Dao bd AUD us etes 12 Additional Safety Information 0000 c eee 12 Limited Warranty 000 200 E n ERa E lh 13 Exclusiorns eres dl naan nee anes CRM ELK Oed 13 Warranty Repair Services 00 0000 c cece eee 13 After Warranty Service 00 00 c cts 14 Prefa e i ee ee ee ee EX 33 DISPIAY MIPS RENE E LE 33 Symbols used in this guide 0000 c cette 34 TOX CONVENTIONS desire bET aa Seeds Peed eyed oh A eee arereb 35 ACFORVITIS 5i Nats eS eise erre ad ta perm dcn epos arb E dep DeC ER 35 Related publications ssas crr derede e naen eel en 37 How to Get Help 4x al eee n E dare doe a DD BU E E a E aes 38 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform HardWare 24 aaa ord ws a e a RO d 39 Business Communications Manager Field Replaceable Units 40 BCM200 Platform Base Hardware 0000 e cette 44 BCM200 platform base chassis 0 000 c cece eee cee eee 44 BCM400 Platform Base Hardware 0 00 eect sees 46 Installation and Maintenance Guide 16 Contents BCM400 platform base chassis 0 000 eens 47 BCM400 standard STD configuration hardware components
307. omplete Configuration Ualid Service startup Auto Motherboard TBD PCI Cards MSC Empty Modem LAN LAN HSCUersion R Make a selection 1 2 3 5 5 6 7 8 X Nl 2 Select option 8 Restart the system Select R to confirm a restart 3 Observe the base function tray LEDs Wait for the system to completely shut down indicated by flashing LEDs P0993133 03 Chapter 10 Replace Data Cards and Processing Hardware 223 4 Perform the WAN card installation as described in the procedure Install the WAN card on page 221 Continue to the next step of this procedure when complete 5 When the system is powered up perform the following a display the configuration menu see Configuration main menu display on page 222 b Select option 1 from the main menu to display the Platform Initialization Menu see Figure 149 Figure 149 Platform initialization menu off Telnet 10 10 10 1 I x Connect Edit Terminal Help re eee Nortel Networks Business Communications Manager 3 6 G mmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm X Platform Initialization Menu 2 22 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 22 2 2 2 2 3 1 Initialize Menu 2 U
308. on page 171 BCM RAID upgrade kit NTAB9861 NTAB3418 RAID upgrade kit Hard Disk on page 67 Replacement Procedures on page 165 BCM replacement blank hard NTAB3316 NTAB3316 Hard Disk on Hard Disk drive page 67 Replacement Procedures on page 165 Installation and Maintenance Guide 42 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware Table 5 Power supply field replaceable units Installation Component description BCM200 PEC BCM400 PEC FRU Description procedure BCM Universal power supply NTAB3423 NTAB3423 Platform Power Replace a Supply on page Standard Power 65 Supply on page 192 BCM400 redundant power Not applicable NTAB3419 BCM400 Upgrade to a supply module single redundant power redundant power supply on page supply on page 66 203 Table 6 Cooling fan field replaceable units Installation Component description BCM200 PEC BCM400 PEC FRU Description procedure BCM2 5 BCM400 Cooling fan Not applicable NTAB3315 Cooling Fanon Install a BCM400 4 wire base unit page 68 cooling fan on page 182 BCM Expansion Unit Cooling Not applicable NTAB9650 Cooling Fan on _ Install an Fan FRU page 68 expansion unit fan on page 190 BCM200 Chassis cooling fan NTAB3424 Not applicable Cooling Fanon Install the page 68 BCM200 cooling fan on page 187 Table 7 Media bay module Installation
309. on page 62 card on page 221 WAN interface card with CSU NTAB3213 NTAB3213 WAN interface Install the WAN V 35 X 21 International only card on page 62 card on page 221 256MB memory module NTAB3421 NTAB3421 Main card on Install the dual page 60 in line memory module DIMM card on page 237 Table 3 Chassis field replaceable units Installation Component description BCM200 PEC BCM400 PEC FRU Description procedure Base function tray NTAB9858 NTAB9857 Base Function Install the base Tray Component Hardware on page 54 function tray on page 151 P0993133 03 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware 41 Table 3 Chassis field replaceable units Installation Component description BCM200 PEC BCM400 PEC FRU Description procedure Wall mount kit NTAB3422 NTAB3422 Install the Platform Base Chassis on the Wall on page 102 BCM Field redundancy upgrade Not applicable NTAB3420 BCM400 platform Upgrade to a kit redundant redundant power feature option supply on page RFO 203 configuration on page 49 Hard Disk Replacement Procedures on page 165 eInstall or Replace a Cooling Fan on page 179 Table 4 Hard drive field replaceable units Installation Component description BCM200 PEC BCM400 PEC FRU description procedure BCM 3 0 hard drive NTAB3392 NTAB3392 Hard Disk on Install a New Programmed 20GB page 67 Hard Disk
310. onal Speed dial numbers only at the telephone on which they are programmed Pin 1 An indicator on the first pin on an electronic component You use this indicator to help you correctly align the component when attaching or installing it Port A connector on the Business Communications Manager that allows data exchange with other devices such as a printer or mouse portable telephone Typically a handset containing keypad receiver and transmitter that communications using a radio link to a base station connected to the Business Communications Manager Examples Companion DECT Primary Rate Interface PRI An ISDN interface that uses 23 B channels and a D channel 23B D Prime line The line the system selects for your telephone when you lift the receiver press the Handsfree Mute button or use an external dialing feature Assign a Prime Line to a telephone under Line access in System DNs programming Priority Call If you get a busy signal when you call a person in your office you can interrupt that person for an urgent call Enable this feature for a telephone under Capabilities in System DNs programming Private branch exchange PBX A PBX is a telephone system within an enterprise that switches calls between enterprise users on local lines while allowing all users to share a certain number of external telephone lines The main purpose of a PBX is to save the cost of requiring a line for each user to the telephone compan
311. onents Always place the components in static free container i Warning Power supply cable management is critical Cable damage can result due to loose or incorrectly positioned cables 10 Set up the Business Communications Manager for maintenance see Shut down the system hardware on page 146 Disconnect all cables from the front of the base function tray Disconnect the platform base chassis and the expansion unit if applicable from the AC power connection Remove the top cover from the platform base chassis see Remove the platform base chassis top cover on page 161 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface Disconnect all cables from the I O card Locate and disconnect the power supply cables from the media bay backplane and hard disk Partially remove the base function tray see Remove the base function tray on page 150 Continue to the next step of this procedure when complete Unfasten the power supply cable clamp located on the underside of the platform base chassis top cover see Figure 126 Gather the power supply cables away from the interior and toward the rear of the platform base chassis Remove the four power supply chassis screws from the back of the platform base chassis see Figure 126 Place the screws in a safe location Installation and Maintenance Guide 200 Chapter 9 Replace or Upgrade a Power Supply Figure 126
312. ons Manager system through the top or bottom opening Wind any excess cable around the posts then fasten the cable under the strain relief Connect the wires to the BIX connector on the bracket termination board as shown in Figure 168 Figure 168 Bracket termination board vine LIN P0993133 03 Chapter 12 Install Companion or DECT Systems 263 The polarity of the TCM connections is not important If you connect the two power pairs to the bracket terminal board of the base station you must connect the power pairs with the same polarity Caution Ensure that the RPI is off before connecting power pairs to the base station Install the base station on the bracket Snap it into position Connect the power RJ 11 jumper lead to the RJ 11 jacks on the termination board and the base station 7 For plug top power supplies only connect the power supply connector to the base station power connector Make sure the base station uses a class 2 plug top power source only Caution If you insert the power supply connector in the wrong direction you can damage the plug top power supply and the base stations Position the power supply connector in the correct direction and push it into place 8 Inthe space provided on the label attached to the lower right corner of the mounting bracket record the port number used Include the marking information f
313. ontact your account representative for the current list of approved replacement parts i Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static discharge Always wear a ground wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container Use the flow chart shown in Figure 79 as a summary guide to replace the base function tray P0993133 03 Chapter 6 Prepare Hardware for Maintenance or Upgrades 149 If possible do a software shutdown Perform BCM maintenance setup Remove the base function tray Replace No Figure 79 Base function tray replacement overview Replace different component Replace a He BFT card Remove the old card Install the new card in the same BFT slot See correct replacement Y procedure the BFT Remove all cards Re install all cards in replacement BFT Insert the Base function tray in the BFT chassis cage Restore unit to operation Check LEDs END Installation and Maintenance Guide 150 Chapter 6 Prepare Hardware for Maintenance or Upgrades Remove the base function tray This procedure describes how to remove the base function tray to perform maintenance or replacement activities Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static N dis
314. or LED Display screen d Business Communications Manager Unified Manager Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Nortel Networks Group Edit Configuration Performance Fault Report Tool Logo View Help 10 10 10 1 Comprehensive Add Delete Del All 9 GP BCM 10 10 10 1 D LED Display LED Display Bi Power BN HDD E watchdog BM Nic B v90 System On Flash On On On Resources Services Management Diagnostics MSC i Trunk Modu Service Met Service Mar Watchdog Disk Mirrori B MSC E Nic E n a B Temp E Fans On On Off On 0 This screen displays the current status of the operational LEDS 3 To set the parameters for the System Status Sanity check click the LED Settings tab The LED Settings record appears Figure 191 System Status Monitor LED Settings record Business Communications Manager Unified Manager Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Nortel Networks Group Edit Configuration Performance Fault Report Tools Logoff View Help 10 10 10 1 Comprehensive SSM Settings Add Delete Del All SSM Settings 9 G BCM 10 10 10 1 egi j 17 Read Only Field Services P Y v Management Seulas ERI 9 Diagnostics Sanity Interval eo MSC E Trunk Modu Serice Met j Sanity Ti
315. or all of the base stations on the completed installation floor plans 9 Slide the cover on the bracket using the guide to position it correctly Refer to Figure 169 Figure 169 Slide the cover on bracket 10 Snap the cover into place 11 This procedure is complete Installation and Maintenance Guide 264 Chapter 12 Install Companion or DECT Systems Companion set registration To use Companion portable telephones you must first install radio base stations to transmit and receive radio signals to and from the portable telephones See Install a companion base station on page 261 You use a different method to install portable telephones than desktop telephones There are no direct connections between the portable telephones and the system Do the following e Install the batteries and battery charging units for each portable using the instructions that come with the portable e Enter the software keys for Companion in the Business Communications Manager Unified Manager under Software keys Register every Companion portable for use with the system Note You must register a portable telephone before you can use it By default Companion portable telephones are not assigned extension numbers The range of portable extensions available for wireless registration is 061 to 118 For more information about registering and programming Companion portables see the Busines
316. or stretch the cables 1 Disconnect the Business Communications Manager from the AC power outlet 2 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface Installation and Maintenance Guide 152 Chapter 6 Prepare Hardware for Maintenance or Upgrades Move the base function tray latches to the unlocked position Position the base function tray in the correct platform base chassis bay Partially insert the base function tray into the platform base chassis see Figure 81 o0 5 Oo Connect the DS30 connectors to the MSC If necessary install the WAN card see Install the WAN card on page 221 return to this step when complete 7 If required install the base function tray bezel see Install the base function tray bezel on page 154 Return to this step when complete 8 Push the base function tray completely into the chassis Be careful not to crimp the DS30 cables 9 Move the base function tray latches to the locked position 10 Install the base function tray latch screws Figure 81 Install the base function tray Connect DS30 cables ey to the MSC e pu Insert base function tray completely 3 Move base function tray latches to ay the locked position UP Slide base function tray partially into the platform base chassis Fasten base function tray latch screws I y 11 Insert all connectors in the correct locations on
317. ore selecting a location for the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis Caution Possible damage to the platform base chassis Do not place anything directly on top of the Business Communications Manager base platform chassis To install the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis on a table or shelf 1 Attach four rubber feet to the corners on the bottom of the platform base chassis 2 Position the platform base chassis on the table or shelf Make sure you leave enough space around the unit for ventilation and access to the cables and media bay modules 3 This procedure is complete Install the Expansion Unit into a Rack This section describes how to install the Business Communications Manager expansion unit The Business Communications Manager expansion unit must be installed close enough to the Business Communications Manager that the 5 m 16 ft cable between the two units can be connected to the Business Communications Manager without stress on the cable The expansion unit has the same environmental and electrical requirements as the Business Communications Manager For more information about these requirements refer to Installation Preparation Checklist on page 95 The Business Communications Manager expansion unit fits into a standard 19 inch equipment rack Install the expansion unit in the same rack as the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis Caution When inst
318. orts System status display LEDs Reset button eeeoeece UI WAN card field IM upgrade Media services Modem port North COM Ethernet card MSC1b America only port ports ports Base function tray system status display LEDs A line of 10 LEDs display on the face of the base function tray see Figure 17 The LEDs show the current state of various hardware components The Unified Manager contains a monitoring tool that allows you to determine the current condition of the LEDs from your computer Refer to Access the System Status Monitor to Monitor LEDs on page 292 The system status LEDs indicate monitoring of the following e Power status LED 1 Indicates the status of all power components Green indicates normal status Red indicates an excessive voltage deficiency or a component failure such as a redundant power supply fan or module An LED that monitors a component will also show a fault in combination with the Power LED e Hard disk activity LED 2 Green indicates hard disk access e System status LED 3 Solid green indicates the system is normal and operational Green blink indicates one or more telephony services are not operational 1 Six non blinking LEDs in the center indicates monitoring software is not active Installation and Maintenance Guide 56 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager
319. ose an offset number for the CTMS the system automatically adds the next offset number You cannot assign offset 3 to the CTM8 module because this does not allow the module to assign the second set of lines Table 59 shows the switch settings for each DS30 number and the resulting line assignments for CTMs and CTMSs Table 59 CTM and CTM8 switch settings Select DS30 bus txk Select offset 0 o o N OfO N OF O N OFO N OJO N O N Enter these switch settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 on on on on on on on on off on on on on off on on on on on off off on on on on on on on on off on on off on on off on off on on on off on off off on on off on on on on off on on on off on off on on off on on off on on off off on off on on on on on off off on on off on off off on off on on off off on off off on off off on on on off on on on on off off on on on off on off on on on off off off on on on on on off on off on on off off on off on off on off on off on off off off on off To assign these lines CTM 211 214 219 222 227 230 235 238 181 184 189 192 197 200 205 208 151 154 159 162 167 170 175 178 121 124 129 132 137 140 145 148 91 94 99 102 107 110 115 118 61 64 69 72 77 80 85 88 To assign these lines CTM8 Lower Upper Lines 1 4 lines 5 8 211 214 219 222 219 222 227 230 227 230 23
320. ou do not have to modify the wiring connections Ensure you select the correct DS30 number Table 15 compares the designated extension numbers on the Norstar and on the Business Communications Manager Table 15 Extension comparison chart DS30 channel 2 FEM port 1 Norstar 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 BCM 225 226 227 228 221 222 223 224 233 234 235 236 229 230 231 232 DS30 channel 3 FEM port 2 Norstar 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 BCM 241 242 243 244 237 238 239 240 249 250 251 252 245 246 247 248 DS30 channel 4 FEM port 3 Norstar 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 BCM 257 258 259 260 253 254 255 256 265 266 267 268 261 262 263 264 Installation and Maintenance Guide 126 Chapter 4 Install remove or replace the Media Bay Modules Table 15 Extension comparison chart DS30 channel 5 FEM port 4 Norstar 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 BCM 273 274 275 276 269 270 271 272 281 282 283 284 277 278 279 280 DS30 channel 6 FEM port 5 Norstar 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 BCM 289 290 291 292 285 286 287 288 297 298
321. our bays accomodate the media bay modules MBMs For more information on the chassis interior hardware components see Media bay modules MBMs on page 71 The rear of the chassis provides mount points for the fan and power supply The top cover has fixed and removable sections Remove the rear portion of the cover to access the cabling power supply cage and hard disk components Chassis adapters allow you to install the chassis in a server rack An optional wall mount bracket is available separately BCM400 standard STD configuration hardware components The BCM400 standard configuration is equipped as follows 1x Main card 1x Media services card MSC with 2 processor expansion cards 2 additional cards can be added e 1x Programed hard drive e 1x auto sensing power supply e 1x System cooling fan Figure 6 shows the location of the hardware components standard configuration in the BCM400 platform base chassis Installation and Maintenance Guide 48 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware Figure 6 BCM400 Front view Advanced function tray Base function tray Rear view Media bay module backplane connectors Fan access panel platform base chassis standard configuration Removable cover Media bay module backplane Chassis rack mount bracket 2 a Power supply pd Fan exhaust o ees support br
322. ourced from independent clocks with different frequencies and phase relationships Start and stop bits may be added to coordinate character transfer autodial button A memory button that provides one touch dialing out automatic daylight savings time A feature that switches the system to standard or daylight savings time at programmed times Assigns automatic daylight savings time under Daylight time in System programming automatic telephone relocation A feature that maintains personal and system programing for a telephone keep when the telephone gets moved to a different modular jack Enable Automatic Telephone Relocation under Set relocation in System programming auxiliary ringer An external telephone ringer or bell which rings when a line or a telephone rings Enables the auxiliary ringer under Capabilities under System DNs programming Program an auxiliary ringer in Services programming B channel bearer channel An ISDN standard transmission channel used for voice or data transmission Also known as a media channel Installation and Maintenance Guide 360 Glossary background music A feature that plays music from the speaker of your telephone Background Music is available when you attach a music source to the system and enable the feature under Feature settings in System programming base station This is the radio telephony unit that allows communication between wireless handsets such as Companion or DE
323. p unit for Remove PSU maintenance jumper Restore unit to operation Note cable Make internal routing Remove connections cables Check power LED Remove the standard power supply Remove the PSU status connector jumper Use this procedure if you are installing a redundant power supply for the first time Use this procedure only with the BCM400 platform base chassis Note When you upgrade to a redundant power supply you should also install a redundant fan Refer to Install a BCM400 cooling fan on page 182 Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a ground wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container 1 If you still have access to the Unified Manager shut down the system using the Shutdown command For details refer to Shut down the system software on page 145 Otherwise skip to step 2 2 Setup the Business Communications Manager for maintenance as described in Shut down the system hardware on page 146 Disconnect the BCMAOO system from the AC power outlet Remove the platform base chassis top cover Refer to Remove the platform base chassis top cover on page 161 Continue to the next step in this procedure when complete 5 Locate the PSU Status connector on the I O card see Figure 132 Remove the RPS output signaling connector jumper Use needle nose pliers to pull the jumper ou
324. pare Hardware for Maintenance or Upgrades A Warning Maintain a current backup of your system When you replace the hard disk you must restore the Business Communications Manager system programming from the backup Caution Do not use an electric or magnetized screwdriver near the hard disk You can lose the information stored on the disk Shock can damage the hard disk Do not drop or hit the hard disk drive A Warning You must remove all of the connections to the Business Communications Manager base function tray before you power the system down Failure to disconnect lines before power down can cause damage to the system AN Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static discharge Always wear a ground wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container Figure 78 provides an overview of the process for preparing the Business Communications Manager hardware for maintenance or upgrade procedures Figure 78 Prepare for maintenance overview Use Unified Manager to shut down software or wall Place on static free surface Disconnect cables Remove the top Restore power from the front of from the unit to the units the server and expansion unit Perform Reconnect Remove AC power maintenance cables to the plugs from both upgrade
325. perform a specific job outside of the trunk and station description Refer to Table 12 e The DECT Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications module allows you to add radio based cordless communication devices to your Business Communications Manager in areas where the DECT technology is available e The Fiber Expansion module FEM provides a fast way of upgrading from an existing Norstar system simply by plugging in Norstar expansion modules to the FEM box Table 12 Specialized modules DECT connects a maximum of eight radio base stations Refer to Mobility Services by Region Digital enhanced which receives transmissions from registered on page 303 cordless cordless handsets a maximum of 32 telecommunications DECT media bay module FEM connects a maximum of six Norstar expansion The switches on the FEM are used to Fiber expansion modules turn fiber ports on and off The FEM media bay module does not work correctly if you set these FEM switches using the rules used for other media bay modules DDIM enables a Business Communications Manager Digital Drop amp Insert System to share its connection to a Universal T1 MUX DDIM network with a LAN Digital enhanced cordless telecommunications DECT media bay module region specific application The Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications DECT module allows radio based cordless handsets to access systems that are configured
326. pload an Etiquette core load to the MSC 3 Upload an CT2 Plus core load to the MSC 4 Upload an E1 core load to the MSC 5 Upload an E1 Global core load to the MSC 6 Upload an E1 CALA core load to the MSC 7 Toggle the automatic MSC upload Enabled 8 Selection not available no SSM firmware on BCH466 HM Main Menu Product Version BCH466 Release 3 8 Version RC 2 6 Issue 1 Cael oe teeta MMMM Initialization Complete Configuration Valid Service startup Auto R Motherboard TBD PCI Cards MSC Empty Modem LAN LAN HSCUersion a eee teeta tee tentententententententententententententententententententend Make a selection 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 M 7 6 From the Platform Initialization menu select option 1 to display the Initialize menu see Figure 150 The WAN card is shown in the PCI card inventory Installation and Maintenance Guide 224 Chapter 10 Replace Data Cards and Processing Hardware Figure 150 Initialize menu off Telnet 10 10 10 1 Oe x Connect Edi Terminal Help MSS SSS SS SS SS SHS HS HS SS SS SS SS SSS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SSS SS SSS SS SH SH TH HE Nortel Networks Business Communications Manager 3 6 HSS SSS SS SS SS SHS HS HS HS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS HS HS HS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SSS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SSS SSH SHH H
327. ply P0993133 03 Chapter 9 Replace or Upgrade a Power Supply 207 8 Remove both power supply modules from the redundant power supply cage before you install the power supply in the platform base chassis see Remove a power supply module on page 214 Continue to the next step of this procedure when complete 9 Place the redundant power supply top down on a flat surface Place the power supply support bracket on the bottom surface of the power supply 10 Insert a tie wrap in the power supply support bracket lanclet 11 Gather together and route the Motherboard 20 Pin power cable P1 the 12v power cable P9 the 3 3v load cable PB and the PS monitor Cable PA to the tie wrap 12 Secure the the cables to the power supply support bracket with a tie wrap see Figure 128 Figure 135 Fasten the power supply support bracket cables a Place the support bracket on the power Insert a tie wrap in 4 Gather and route the cables to the supply 3 the power supply Se ed m lt support bracket uS ae He WISP X lanclet i N 1 v Place power supply top side down on flat surface Z 5 Secure the cables to the power supply bracket with the tie wrap 13 Install the power supply support bracket in the BCM400 platform base chassis see Figure 129 14 Position the redundant power supply cage in the base platform chassis Make sure t
328. ponsibility of the installer and user to ensure that installation of the Business Communications Manager hardware does not compromise existing Safety approvals BEFORE YOU OPEN the Business Communications Manager or Business Communications Manager expansion unit ensure that the network telecom cables are unplugged and the unit is then disconnected from the ac power source Station modules The ports on these modules are meant to be connected only to approved digital telephones and peripherals with the proper cables on a protected internal wiring system Do not connect any telephones to wiring that runs outside of the building Read and follow the installation instructions carefully P0993133 03 Chapter 4 Install remove or replace the Media Bay Modules 119 Connect the Media Bay Modules to Service Providers To connect DTM CTM CTM8 4X16 CTM or BRIM S T media bay modules to the network follow these steps 1 On the front of the module locate the RJ48C jack DTM RJ45 jack BRI or the RJ11 jacks CTM and 4X16 modules 2 Wire one end of the cable to the telco demarcation blocks of the building Figure 68 shows the wiring pin outs for a DTM to connect to a service provider Figure 68 DTM RJ48C wiring array DTM connector E OO O O 0000 amp 8 RJ48C jack P d 12345678 To network To plug Receive from 1 Rring network 2 Rtip 3 Rshield Transmit to network 4 Tring
329. pply and modules Power supply module removed from the redundant power supply chassis Power supply module inserted in the redundant power supply chassis Figure 31 BCM400 Redundant power supply connectors Connector Configuration for Cable Lengths and Purpose and Notes Redundant Sparkle Power Supply Markings Route to Media bay backplane 1 Tie any slack at 550mm P2 the connector behind MBM Route to Media bay backplane 2 Tie any slack at 550mm P3 the connector behind MBM 3eommito ist To hard disk Tie any slack at the power supply Tuck P4 50mm to next P5 any loose connectors under hard disk cage 100mm to last P6 total 475mm 340mm to first Unused Tie to the center of the hard disk cage P7 right angle 150mm to next P8 total 490mm Route to I O card ooooooo0o0 oooo0o00000 TC 515mm P1 Route to I O card 515mm P9 Route to I O card 515mm PA ES Unused soomm PB P0993133 03 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware 67 Hard Disk The BCM200 and BCM400 standard configurations use a single hard disk see Figure 32 Figure 33 Figure 32 BCM200 standard hard disk and cage BCM200 hard disk cage front view 1 MERE SS Hard disk cage Hard Tu j z f UT tpe
330. puter 0000 cece ee 141 Connect the Ethernet crossover cable 2 00 0c eee eee 141 Enter the software keycodes u reresik kira nten EE ele 142 Regenerating keycodes after system replacement 142 Chapter 6 Prepare Hardware for Maintenance or Upgrades 143 Precautions DET 143 Special Tools 522 hens Bie D ERE ci beds Miwa PERRA RE RUE Tages 145 Controlled System Shutdown 0 00 cece ees 145 Shut down the system software 000 cece eee eee 145 Shut down the system hardware liiis 146 Restart the System after Maintenance llle 147 Restore the System to Operation 00 000 cece eee 147 Software Restart e RS es res RR e tae ea Sie alee a Daa 147 Base Function Tray Maintenance Procedures 00 0 eee eee eee 148 Remove the base function tray llle 150 Install the base function tray 0 2 rart onna TOE VEn BB 151 Remove the base function tray bezel 0 0 0 ee 153 Install the base function tray bezel 0 2 0 cee eee 154 Advanced Function Tray Maintenance Procedures 0 aaua eee eee 156 Remove the advanced function tray 0 e eee eee 157 Install the advanced function tray 2 0 ee ee 159 Remove and Install the Platform Base Chassis Top Cover 04 161 Remove the platform base chassis top cover anaana eee eae 161 Install the platform base chassis top
331. quired This takes about 10 minutes If you do not want to change the MSC load enter the number of the selection with the asterisks 7 The system automatically reboots a number of times as part of the initialization process When the first reboot occurs the telnet session disconnects 8 Doone ofthe following Run the Quick Start Wizard to create the system parameters and defaults Then restore your system data from your data backup Restore system and data information from your backup data Note The detailed processes for performing steps 6 and 7 are contained in the Business Communications Manager 3 0 Programming Operations Guide 9 This procedure is complete P0993133 03 179 Chapter 8 Install or Replace a Cooling Fan This chapter describes how to replace a cooling fan in the BCM200 and BCM400 platform base chassis This chapter also describes how to add a second fan the BCM400 platform base chassis available through the field redundancy upgrade kit Note For the BCM400 RFO factory configuration a redundant cooling fan and power supply is included N Warning You must remove all of the connections to the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis before you power the system down Failure to disconnect lines before power down can cause damage to the system A Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static discharge Always wear a grou
332. r Supply 0 000 cece eee eee nee 192 Remove a BCM200 standard power supply 0000 eee eee eee 192 Install a BCM200 standard power supply 0 00 0c eee eee eee 195 Remove a BCM400 standard power supply 0000 eee eee eee 199 Install a BCM400 standard power supply 0000 0c eee eee eee 201 Upgrade to a redundant power supply cece e ee eae 203 Remove the PSU status connector jumper 00000 eee ee eeee 204 Install a redundant power supply cage 0 ee 205 Remove a BCM400 redundant power supply cage 2000e eee 210 Install a power supply module lsllleeleees Be 212 Remove a power supply module 0000 c ee eee eae 214 Chapter 10 Replace Data Cards and Processing Hardware 217 System status LEDS i e RR RR Ra a Rae Ae Rare S PR e e Rae 217 Card Replacement Procedures 0 00 cect een eee 217 Remove the WAN Card sssssseeseeee rnanan 219 Install the WAN card 0 00 eens 221 Initialize anew WAN card 0 0 ee eee 222 Remove the media services card MSC 00000 cence eee eee 225 Install the media services card MSC 00 00 ccc eee eee 226 Install the modem Card 0 0c tte eae 229 Replace the Processor Expansion Card PEC nananana nanana e eee eee eee 230 Remove the processor expansion card PEC 00 0c eee neces 231 Install a processor expansion ca
333. r each module Table 72 Three BRI modules two DSM 32s and 1 DECT module Each heavily outlined and shaded square represents one module Switch setting 3 DS30 DECT BRI DSM 32s channel Offset 0 Offset 0 1 and 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 on on on on on on 3 4 on on on on off on 5 DECT switch settings BRI settings BRI settings on on off off on off BRI settings on off on off on off Installation and Maintenance Guide 350 Media Bay Module Combinations Changing Configurations Here are some points to consider when changing modules in existing or in new Business Communications Manager systems e Trunk and analog station modules cannot share a DS30 channel e Modules that require more than one DS30 channel automatically assign the next channel in chronological order Therefore if an existing installed module uses either of the required DS30 channels remove the installed module You must then assign the DIP switches for both modules so there is no conflict between them or with any other installed module e The goal is to have a balanced mix of trunk and station modules e Write the DIP switch settings for each module in a place that is handy to reference when you decide to change or add modules e If you update your Norstar system to Business Communications Manager your station amphenol connectors can be connected into the media bay modules without ad
334. r of the platform base chassis Push the media bay module into the unit You will hear a click when the module is firmly seated in the media bay Repeat steps 2 to 4 for each media bay module you want to install Install the front bezel on the expansion unit This procedure is complete Installation and Maintenance Guide 112 Chapter 4 Install remove or replace the Media Bay Modules Reconnect the equipment After you install the module correctly into the bay you must return the equipment to operation in an orderly manner Follow these steps carefully to ensure that you return your system to operation without endangering the equipment or yourself 1 Plug the power cords for the Business Communications Manager and the expansion unit if there is one back into the ac outlets Note The Business Communications Manager system starts up when you connect the ac power cord System startup takes several minutes to complete 2 Connect the cables to the proper outlets on the media bay modules and the MSC on the server Caution DECT modules Plug the base station RJ45 cables into the DECT module one at a time Ensure each base station begins the startup sequence before plugging in the next module 3 Check that the LEDs on the modules are on and indicating the correct state Refer to Check system power and status on page 129 for a detailed description of the LED states Test existing functions to confirm their opera
335. r ribbon cable card connector Mirror Hard disk connector on opposite side RAID card status LEDs Reset button Rear view Note Reverse RAID cage installation for BCM200 Primary hard disk RAID connector e p Mirror hard e disk RAID E connector BSS pc Nm BEES ribbon cable IDE tS connector connector Hard disk Note BCM200 lift tab is on cage liitiab E OMELSHDDN opposite end connectors Cooling Fan P0993133 03 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware 69 The BCM200 400 standard platforms use a single cooling fan The BCM400 RFO configuration uses two fans The BCM200 cooling fan mounts on the rear of the platform base chassis The BCM400 cooling fan s mount on a removable panel at the rear of the platform base chassis For further information on the platform cooling fans refer to Chapter 9 Replace or Upgrade a Power Supply Figure 35 illustrates a cooling fan and connectors Figure 35 Cooling fan e Chassis mount holes lt I O card fan uq 9 connector Telephony Components The telephony components perform call processing by connecting the telephones or peripheral telephony equipment such as fax machines to the Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN lines They also process telephony information that has been received through an IP link MSC The Media
336. r to Chapter 12 Install Companion or DECT Systems on page 249 The DECT module has a separate installation and maintenance guide Refer to the Business Communications Manager 3 0 Programming Operations Guide to set up basic telephony and data configurations Refer to the separate application guides to set up optional applications such as call management or voice over IP functions P0993133 03 Chapter 2 Auxilliary Requirements and Installation Process Overview 95 Installation Preparation Checklist Before you install the base BCM platform base or expansion unit hardware complete the following actions Determine the location for the Business Communications Manager or expansion unit telephones and other equipment based on spacing and electrical requirements For more information about spacing and electrical requirements refer to the Environment Checklist on page 95 and the Electrical Requirements on page 95 Order the required trunks from the central office Check that all of the media bay modules are installed in the Business Communications Manager or expansion unit Ensure that you have all the equipment and supplies you require to install the system Environment Checklist The installation area must be minimum of 4 m 13 ft from equipment such as photocopiers electrical motors and other equipment that produces electromagnetic radio frequency and electrostatic interference within 1 5 m 5 ft
337. r to the Business Communications Manager units i Warning Connecting power Always connect power to the Business Communications Manager platform system and expansion units before you reconnect the cabling to the front of the units 2 Connect the Business Communications Manager power cord to an electrical outlet that is a non switchable third wire ground ac outlet If you use a power bar plug the power cords into the power bar and connect the power bar to the ac outlet 3 Connect the Business Communications Manager expansion unit power cord to an electrical outlet that is a non switchable third wire ground ac outlet Danger Do not fasten power supply cords Do not fasten the Business Communications Manager or Business Communications Manager expansion unit power supply cords to any building surface 4 This procedure is complete P0993133 03 Chapter 5 Business Communications Manager System Startup 129 Check system power and status After you connect power to the Business Communications Manager system the Power LED on the front of the base function tray and expansion unit lights Once the system services have reactivated the Status LED turns solid green The Power LED can indicate RED if the system is in standby mode whereby power is available but shutdown by the operating system when UPS or Overtemp LEDs in position 3 8 will flash when the SSM is not communicating during startup shutdown or operating s
338. ral minutes to complete This procedure is complete Software Restart Use this procedure to perform a software reboot If you did not shut the system power down restart the software 1 2 3 4 Refer to Shut down the system software until you get to step 7 At this point select Reboot on the Logoff menu Continue with the intructions shown on the display terminal This procedure is complete Installation and Maintenance Guide 148 Chapter 6 Prepare Hardware for Maintenance or Upgrades Base Function Tray Maintenance Procedures The base function tray contains the core processing components To prepare for base function tray removal perform a software and hardware shutdown Use the Unified manager interface to properly deactivate and isolate the Business Communications Manager from the network Set up the server for maintenance as described in Shut down the system hardware on page 146 Use this procedure only under the following conditions e to replace the MSC modem memory DIMMs battery PEC III or WAN if applicable to replace the base function tray Remove the components from the old base function tray and install in the replacement base function tray Danger Electrical shock warning Disconnect the power cord telephone cables and AN network cables before opening the computer Read and follow installation instructions carefully Caution Use only a Nortel Networks approved replacement C
339. rd PEC 00000 cece eee 233 Replace Memory iste ne ne em edie dare m Bink eat at 235 Remove the dual in line memory module DIMM card lise 235 Install the dual in line memory module DIMM card lille 237 Replace the Clock Calendar Battery 0 0 cece eee eee eee 238 Remove the clock calendar battery 0 0 00 cee ee eee 239 Install a new clock calendar battery 0 00 cee eee 240 P0993133 03 Contents 21 Chapter 11 Install Telephones and Peripherals 00 0c eee e eee eee 243 System Telephones xu dnte t ee e eL DNE RIT AM Ro MUR UR EAA 243 Analog terminal adapter isliseeeee nh 243 Central answering position CAP 0 00000 cece ee cet eee 244 Telephone port and DN cross reference lille 244 Emergency Telephone Installation llle 245 Install IP Telephones isse kde m Re neue Re Gade es Ed RERO ED 246 Install Radio Based Portable Systems llle ellen 246 Companion portable system 00 000 cc es 246 DECT SYStOMS i 038 28 howto bbe I FePKFOQicdpesRPIsubvpestidvde sw 247 T7406 cordless systems 0 000 cee eee ee 248 Moving Telephones a E ccc hrs 248 Chapter 12 Install Companion or DECT Systems 0 00 c eee eee eee 249 The Companion Wireless System 0000 eects 249 Companion components 0 000 cee eee tees 250 Companion Hardware Installation
340. re on page 145 Otherwise skip to step 2 2 Setup the server for maintenance as described in Shut down the system hardware on page 146 Disconnect the Business Communications Manager from the AC power outlet If required remove the platform base chassis from the server rack Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 6 Remove the two top cover screws located at the rear of the platform base chassis Place the screws in a safe location 7 Lift the back of the cover and slide rear ward until it disengages from the platform base chassis Refer to Figure 89 or Figure 89 8 Lift the top cover up and away from the platform base chassis Place the cover in a safe location Installation and Maintenance Guide 162 Chapter 6 Prepare Hardware for Maintenance or Upgrades Figure 88 Aes eee Figure 89 Remove the BCM400 top cover Remove the BCM200 top cover Lift cover at rear of chassis Remove the top cover screws a Slide cover away V from chassis Platform chassis top cover Remove the SM a 5 p E Pi Lift cover at rear of chassis o _ top cover screws 3 Slide cover away VV from chassis 9 This procedure is complete P0993133 03 Chapter 6 Prepare Hardware for Maintenance or Upgrades 163 Install the platform base chassis top cover Use this procedure to install the
341. re on page 146 Disconnect the Business Communications Manager from the AC power outlet Disconnect any connectors from the front of the base function tray Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface Remove the base function tray latch screws and place in a safe location Move the base function tray latches to the unlocked position See Figure 80 Grasp the base function tray latches and partially remove the base function tray from the platform base chassis Do not exert force on the DS30 cables or connectors Unfasten the bezel screws from the base function tray face Place the screws in a safe location Pull and tip the bezel away from the base function tray until the bezel clips are clear of the base function tray chassis Move the bezel in a downward direction between the base function tray latches Place the bezel in a safe location See Figure 82 Installation and Maintenance Guide 154 Chapter 6 Prepare Hardware for Maintenance or Upgrades Figure 82 Remove the base function tray bezel Tip bezel away from base function tray Unfasten 7 Bezel screws v Unhook bezel clips Move bezel downward from base function tl and between latches tray chassis 11 This procedure is complete Install the base function tray bezel Use this procedure to install the base function tray bezel Warning Protect the hardware componen
342. re 195 on page 320 Figure 61 Overview of installing a media bay module Set module DIP switches Disconnect cables Restore power to Is this installation from the front of the Business part of a new server and expansion Communications system installation unit Manager and I expansion unit yes Disconnect power from both units Remove front bezel from the expansion Monitor LEDs for E BM power and status Reconnect all cables Continue with system initialization Use the Unified Manager l to identify the module to the system Install new module Replace bezel Installation and Maintenance Guide 110 Chapter 4 Install remove or replace the Media Bay Modules Shut down the system Before you perform any maintenance procedures read the following warnings to ensure you and your system are properly protected Warning If you are installing a new system or new Business Communications d Manager or expansion unit refer to Chapter 11 Install Telephones and Peripherals SD on page 243 for instructions about installing a new system before you connect the system to the ac power outlet Warning Failure to follow procedures to properly disconnect the Business Communications Manager and expansion unit can result in module or system damage gt Warning Ensure you are properly grounded
343. rent components before attempting to install or maintain the system Figure 4 BCM200 platform base chassis Front view Fan s p Removable cover Hard disk I O card Base function tray x1 Power supply Media bay Media bay module dule b 2 mpatlc paysa backplane Rear view Media bay module backplane connectors Power supply bay m di A Fan T d Rack mount exhaust adapter anchor points Hard disk bay removeable panel Installation and Maintenance Guide 46 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware BCM400 Platform Base Hardware The BCM400 platform consists of a platform base chassis equipped with advanced and base function trays and four media bay module bays The advanced function tray contains a hard disk and a bay for future use The base function tray provides call processing functions and interface connections The media bay modules provide telephony features Rack mount brackets allow you to install the chassis in a server rack Rubber feet attach under the platform base chassis if you want to mount the Business Communications Manager unit on a flat surface An optional wall mount bracket is available The BCM400 platform is available either in a Standard STD or Redundant Feature Option RFO configuration The BCM400 STD and RFO platform base hardware share the following common components e 1x Platform base chassis e 1 x Sliding advanced fu
344. res a software keycode for activation Companion components Business Communications Manager Companion has four main components Software Companion software manages the telephone traffic between Companion base stations and portable telephones Base stations connect to Business Communications Manager in the same way that Business Communications Manager sets do You register the Companion portable telephones on the system They do not require any ports on the system You can connect a maximum of 60 portable telephones and a maximum of 32 base stations 32 cells to the system channel 7 This limits you to a maximum of 16 base stations which can support a maximum of 30 handsets Note If you choose a 3 5 channel split for your system you cannot assign a module to gt Companion base stations Position the base stations around the coverage area to send and receive calls between the portable telephones and Business Communications Manager Base stations use digital radio technology and support handoff and roaming within the coverage area The coverage area can be a maximum of 160 000 square meters 1 700 000 square feet when using the maximum number of base stations Companion wireless handsets Business Communications Manager supports the following wireless handsets Companion 3020 Companion C3050 Etiquette Companion C3050 CT2Plus and Companion C3060 The portable telephones used with your Business Communications Manager
345. rm base chassis top cover See Install the platform base chassis top cover on page 163 14 Press the power supply switch to the ON position if applicable Plug the Business Communications Manager power cord into an AC power outlet 15 Restore the Business Communications Manager to operation For details refer to Restart the System after Maintenance on page 147 The Business Communications Manager system starts when you connect the AC power cord Wait for the start up process to finish 16 Monitor the power LED on the base function tray Refer to Table 24 Table 24 Power supply LED D Indicates state of system power OK N A a minimum of 1 PS needs N A attention a Ifthe Business Communications Manager does not power up press the reset button on the base function tray front panel b Ifthe Power LED is red and does not respond to a manual reset this indicates a faulty power condition Contact your Nortel Networks representative C If the Power LED indicates green the system is operating normally Continue to the next step in this procedure 17 This procedure is complete P0993133 03 Chapter 9 Replace or Upgrade a Power Supply 199 Remove a BCM400 standard power supply Use this procedure to remove the standard power supply from a BCM400 platform base chassis i Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a ground wrist strap before you handle comp
346. rogrammed into the system DPNSS allows a local node acting as a terminating node to communicate with other PBXs over the network using E1 lines For example corporate offices separated geographically can be linked over DPNSS lines to other Business Communications Manager 2 5 systems bypassing the restrictions of the PSTNs to which they may be connected This allows connected Business Communications Manager 2 5 systems to function like a private network Analog trunk types Public Provides potential access for any set on the system Private Provides potential access for a specific set Installation and Maintenance Guide 308 System Region Attributes Define Time Zones by Country and Language Time zones are based on the actual time zone where the Business Communications Manager system is located The Time Zone dropdown list on the initialization screen allows you to be very specific in choosing a compatible time zone If your exact location is not on the list choose the one with the time zone closest to you Note that some time zones are individualized because they do not switch from Standard Time to Daylight Saving Time For example this is the case for Saskatchewan The format of the time and date changes are based on the prime language of the region Table 46 provides a list of formats based on language or country Table 46 Time date formats based on language
347. rovides a description of the prerequisite computing platform and network specifications to operate the Business Communications Manager Unified Manager software This chapter also provides summary of the installation process for the Business Communications Manager telephony components and Business Communications Manager expansion unit You require a personal computer to run the Business Communications Manager Unified Manager application Use the Unified Manager application to configure and manage the Business Communications Manager system For administration purposes you also require an network connection with the correct browser setup Computer Specifications These are the minimum computer specifications you need to run the Business Communications Manager Unified Manager 133 MHz Pentium CPU or compatible e 64MB RAM e 10 MB disk space available screen resolution of 1024 x 768 e monitor large enough to support the screen resolution suggested size 17 inches e operating system minimum Windows 95 98 or NT 2000 or the Millennium version Note The ideal display setting for a monitor using Unified Manager is 1280 x 1024 gt Unified Manager is a web based application that runs off the Business Communications Manager computer Therefore you take up minimal space on your computer and you can run multiple applications on your computer We recommend that you use Windows NT or 2000 to ensure optimal performance with the U
348. rs ongoing repair and support for this product This service provides repair or replacement of your Nortel Networks product at Nortel Networks option for a fixed charge You are responsible for all shipping charges For further information and shipping instructions In North America contact our service information number 1 800 574 1611 Outside North America contact your sales representative Repairs to this product may be made only by the manufacturer and its authorized agents or by others who are legally authorized This restriction applies during and after the warranty period Unauthorized repair will void the warranty P0993133 03 15 Contents North American Regulatory Information 0 0 c eee eee 2 SALEI Me PEE EM 2 Enhanced 911 Configuration illis 3 Radio frequency Interference lisse 3 Telecommunication Registration 0 0 aaua auaa aaaea 4 Network Connections 2o 3 tide care hbo tahoe da dasa wet salve sada 5 Hearing Aid Compatibility 0 0 2 0 0 eee 5 Electromagnetic Compatibility llle 5 Telephone Company Registration llle sees 5 Use of aMusic Source ssslselseeeel rn 6 Rights of the Telecommunications Company ssslselsslessn 6 HepallS ipt y od E LAM MEE LA EAR Me rhc MES Li LESS 6 Canadian Regulations please read carefully lllllllllsssn 6 US Regulations please read carefully 0 0 0 0 0 y Federal C
349. rsal service order code USOC e service order code SOC facility interface code FIC Installation and Maintenance Guide Use of a Music Source In accordance with U S Copyright Law a license may be required from the American Society of Composers Authors and Publishers or similar organization if Radio or TV broadcasts are transmitted through the Music On Hold or Background Music features of this telecommunication system Nortel Networks hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license Rights of the Telecommunications Company If the Business Communications Manager system is causing harm to the telephone network the telecommunications company may discontinue service temporarily If possible the telecommunications company will notify you in advance If advance notice is not practical the user will be notified as soon as possible The user will be given the opportunity to correct the situation and informed of the right to file a complaint to the FCC The telecommunications company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the proper functioning of the system If this happens the telecommunications company will give you advance notice in order for you to make any necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service Repairs In the event of equipment malfunction all repairs to certified equipment will be performed by an authorized suppl
350. rvices card MSC On a default system six buses of DS30 channel blocks can be assigned to media bay modules Which block the module is assigned to determines the range of line trunk numbers or extension numbers DNs that can be allocated by the module to the equipment connected to that module The other two blocks are permanently routed to the PEC digital signal processors DSPs to support internal Business Communications Manager functions such as voice mail VoIP trunks IVR and IP telephony functions This configuration is called a 2 6 channel split You can change the DS30 allocation to a 3 5 split to accommodate increased IP telephony or VoIP trunk requirements You do this by assigning bus 7 to the voice data sector This choice should be made at system startup but a default system can be changed through the Unified Manager to a 3 5 split after startup if IP requirements increase At startup you indicate the split you want when you run the Quick Start Wizard Refer to the Programming Operations Guide for details Warning If you change the channel split from 3 5 to 2 6 after your system is configured you will lose all the data and optional application connections Figure 193 shows a model of how the MSC DS30 buses are a subgroup of the DS256 bus on the MSC The diagram also shows the offset channels which are a subgroup of the buses Figure 193 DS30 model Four offsets per bus DS30 channel 2 I
351. s If your system requires more than four media bay modules you must install a Business Communications Manager expansion unit For instructions about how to install the expansion unit refer to Chapter B Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings on page 313 Before you install the media bay modules you must set the switches on the back of the modules to select the DS30 bus the modules will use to access lines and extensions DNs For instructions about how to set the switches refer to Set Media Bay Module Dip Switches on page 322 After you have set the switches install the media bay modules into the Business Communications Manager or the expansion unit For instructions about how to install the media bay modules refer to Chapter 4 Install remove or replace the Media Bay Modules on page 109 When you have the main hardware connected start the system to ensure the first level of hardware and software is working For instructions about how to correctly start the units refer to Chapter 5 Business Communications Manager System Startup on page 127 Continued on next page Installation and Maintenance Guide 94 Chapter 2 Auxilliary Requirements and Installation Process Overview Installation overview continued Connect data networking equipment Initialize the system Connect the telephony components Install optional mobile equipment configurations The dat
352. s Communications Manager 3 0 Programming Operations Guide System restart Use this procedure to perform a system restart Warning A loss of unlicensed transition and management for microwave UTAM N information occurs when upgrading US Business Communications Manager systems You need UTAM Recovery Codes If you added a base station that requires a software update the system begins downloading the software to the base station The display shows BS 1 Dload Start 1 Press CLEAR to clear the message When the base station software finishes downloading the BS 1 Dload Done appears 2 Press CLEAR to clear the message Some base stations do not power up at the same time and this message repeats at the beginning of each download In the United States the display shows one of the messages listed in Table 33 after restarting Table 33 UTAM messages UTAM code req d System logical identifier LID information UTAM test failed See alarm codes in the Windows NT event log 3 This procedure is complete P0993133 03 Chapter 12 Install Companion or DECT Systems 265 Install an external antenna and lightning surge protection You can use external antennas to provide a broad range for your Companion system Ensure that any external installations comply with local regulations and include lightning surge protection Read before you install equipment Install the antenna vertically For more information refer
353. s Communications Manager telephones Refer to the Business Communications Manager 3 0 Programming Operations Guide for programming details Connect the external paging system You can connect a customer supplied external paging system to provide paging over external loudspeakers Ensure the paging system follows these guidelines e The paging output from the MSC is 100 mV rms across an input impedance of 600 Q e The output level is 0 dBm0 with reference to 600 ohms for a PCM encoded signal at 0 dBm There is no dc voltage across the page output terminals e The page output uses the tip and ring terminals of the jack The sleeve terminal of the jack connects to ground You must use a stereo plug to connect the page signal output When you use the page signal output jack to connect an external paging amplifier you also use the page relay jack which contains a floating relay contact pair The system uses this jack to control the external paging amplifier e The contact pair has a switch capacity of 50 mA non inductive at 40 V maximum You must remove any inductive load on the output e The page relay contacts connect to the tip and ring terminals of the jack The sleeve terminal of the jack connects to ground You must use a stereo plug to connect the page relay Use this procedure to install the external paging system using the installation instructions that came with the paging system 1 Connect the paging system audio input to
354. s communication manager base function tray System status display LEDs lille 57 Figure 18 BCM200 Media services Card 0 00 e eee cee eee 58 Figure 19 BCM400 Media services Card 0 00 e eee eee 58 Figure 20 Main card connectors 00 eee 60 Figure 21 Card connections saaana cette 61 Figure 22 PGI Risercard ere Gir htt a E a a E ONU AR ER ERU 62 Figure 23 PCI Riser card connectors 0 cee ee 62 Figure 24 WAN interface card international version llle 63 Figure 25 WAN interface card North American version 0005 63 Figure 26 Modem card and interface 0 cece 64 Figure 27 NO interface card 2 0 0 cc eh 64 Figure 28 BCM200 and BCM400 STD platform power supply rear view 65 Figure 29 Standard power supply connectors 00 0 cece eee eee 65 Figure 30 BCM400 platform redundant power supply and modules 66 Figure 31 BCM400 Redundant power supply connectors suus 66 Figure 32 BCM200 standard hard disk and cage iilslilsls sese 67 Figure 33 BCM400 standard hard disk and cage sillilsll else 67 Figure 34 BCM200 400 2xHDD RAID controller llle 68 Figure 35 Cooling fan ce nada ena i t Ea Re EORR ee ER Ke 69 Figure 36 Telephony hardware components 000 eee eee eee eee 71 Figure 37 Module Power and Status LED states 0020000 cee uee 73
355. s the call using an intranet trunk With Business Communications Manager VoIP Gateway you can make calls over any intranet connected to the Business Communications Manager system LAN CTE Configuration Guide LAN CTE introduced in 2 5 to replace TSP requires keycode provides an interface between a Personal Computer PC a telephone and the Business Communications Manager server that allows third party software to function on personal computers on the same network as the Business communication manager This allows customized solutions for such applications as hotel motel packages or text messaging programs TSP version 2 0 systems only requires keycode supplies the interface between the Business Communications Manager system and Microsoft TAPI This interface allows you to use TAPI applications on the Business Communications Manager system Multimedia Call Center Setup and Operation Guide and Multimedia Call Center Web Developers Guide Nortel Networks Multimedia Call Center requires keycode allows call agents and users to interact through either or both a telephone connection and an IP connection This allows the conversation to occur over the voice connection or through text chatting Further this application allows exchange and viewing of web pages and allows the agent to show the client screen captures Installation and Maintenance Guide 356 System Options Personal Call Manager User Guide Personal Call Mana
356. sed when you restart or turn off the Business Communications Manager RAID Redundant array of independent disks A disk subsystem used to increase performance and or provide fault tolerance RAID is a set of two or more ordinary hard disks and a specialized disk controller that contains the RAID functionality Remote access The ability to dial into an Business Communications Manager system from outside the system and use selected features The Class of Service determines which lines features and dialing capabilities are available Restriction filter Restriction filters prevent selected telephone numbers or feature codes from being dialed Restriction filters can be applied to lines sets specific lines on a set and to Class of Service passwords Read Only Memory ROM Memory that stores data permanently ROM contains instructions that the Business Communications Manager needs to operate The instructions stored in ROM are used by the Business Communications Manager each time it is turned on or restarted Router A device that forwards traffic between networks based on network layer information and routing tables A router decides which path network traffic follows using routing protocols to gain information about the network and algorithms to choose the best route based on a routing matrix P0993133 03 Glossary 371 Routing The path a message takes from its origin to its destination on a network or the Internet
357. ser Requirements 02 0 cece eee ee teeta 91 Preloading Java class Files On Your Workstation 000000 eae 92 Optimizing Unified Manager Speed 000 cece et eee 92 Installation Process Overview 0 0c eh 93 Installation Preparation Checklist 2 2 0 0 nannaa cc teenies 95 Environment Checklist n anaana cc eee eens 95 Electrical Requirements 00 0 eee ee eee 95 Internal Wiring Requirements 0 000 ce eae 96 Digital Loop sts sedi teh PRAE id a ke a a E 96 Analog LOOP nussa aee ee dba oe Goi eae eae eas 96 System Equipment and Supplies l l 97 Basic hardware v2 93 secum e ders nd rS aaa ee TRA m t ORE Te ERE 97 Optional equipment issssslesesees rn 97 Companion equipment ssssssssesel rn 98 Optional Companion equipment 0 0c eee 98 Other cordless systems 0 0 0 98 DECT Equipment inem Sake Rem pm ee eee ee 98 Equipment for installing the platform base chassis 00 5 98 C3050 CT2 Plus Canada 000 c cece 98 C3050 Etiquette USA 6 0 0 eee 98 Chapter 3 Install the Business Communications Manager amp Expansion Unit Platform Base Chassis lt i 4 ds eco el hm ron aes 99 Install the Platform Base Chassis in a Rack 0 00 0 cece eee eee eee 99 Attach the rack mounting brackets 0 0 c eee eee 99 Mount the platform base chassis into an equipment rack lisse 100 Inst
358. sign these DNs to DSM 32 connectors A top B bottom 237 252 221 236 269 284 253 268 301 316 285 300 333 348 317 332 365 380 349 364 397 412 381 396 P0993133 03 Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings 343 DECT switch settings The DECT module supports a maximum of eight DECT radio base station connections This module occupies one full DS30 bus which can support a maximum of 32 cordless handsets when all eight base stations are deployed The DECT module should be installed on DS30 6 or 7 For detailed instructions about using the DECT module refer to the Business Communications Manager 3 0 DECT Installation and Maintenance Guide Table 66 shows the settings for DS30 6 and 7 and the assigned dialing numbers DNs Table 66 DECT module settings Set the switches Use these Select 2 nean aa Vice da DNs on Offset DS30 channel DNs on 3 0 Custom DN range offset ESSI updated 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 y system on on Jon on jon 597 624 501 532 off 597 624 501 532 Installation and Maintenance Guide 344 Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings FEM switch settings The DIP switches on the underside of the FEM module are used to turn the six ports on the front of the module on or off You need to turn a port on for each Norstar expansion module you want to connect to the Business Communications Manager Ea
359. sion Phone Administrator NVPA This application which is specific to the Business Communications Manager resides on your computer It provides a set of handset options where you specify the features and settings for each handset This file is then uploaded by the handset through a serial cable from your computer The Business Communications IP Telephony Configuration Guide describes how to integrate this telephone into the Business Communications Manager system Symbol provides a user manual that describes the handset based features and how they work The NetVision Telephone Feature Card provided on your Business Communications Manager CD describes how to use the Business Communications Manager features that can be accessed by the handset Note The NetVision handsets can be configured to act as a stand alone telephone either providing a point for target line calls or with full call and receive capability although some of the features are not available It can also be twinned with stationary telephones to provide mobile coverage of one or more stationary telephones This handset has no memory buttons Instead a pre programmed display menu provides access to Business Communications Manager features Installation and Maintenance Guide 90 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware Business Communications Manager Expansion Unit The Business Communications Manager expansion unit contains s
360. stall the bracket P0993133 03 Chapter 3 Install the Business Communications Manager amp Expansion Unit Platform Base Chassis 103 6 Fasten the wall mount brackets securely to the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis using the screws provided Refer to Figure 56 Caution Use only the screws supplied with the wall mounting bracket Do not replace screws Other screws can damage the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis Figure 55 Attach the wall mount brackets to the BCM200 platform base chassis Install wall mount bracket screws N Install wall mount bracket screws 7 Hang the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis on the backboard screws Make sure the platform base chassis is level Ensure the wood screwheads seat fully into the wall mount bracket slots Tighten the wood screws against the wall mount bracket This procedure is complete Business Communication Manager 3 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 104 Chapter 3 Install the Business Communications Manager amp Expansion Unit Platform Base Chassis Install the Platform Base Chassis on a Flat Surface Use this procedure to install the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis on any flat surface that can safely support the weight of the unit Caution Refer to Environment Checklist on page 95 for acceptable environmental conditions bef
361. stallation and Maintenance Guide 298 Chapter 15 Troubleshooting P0993133 03 299 Appendix A System Region Attributes This appendix provides a number of tables that show the relationship of system programming to the region or software that you select at system startup Each region is designed using a set of system defaults that provide specific functionality for the region in which the system is deployed This can include specific languages and a specific order in which the languages are set as default language 1 whether Companion or DECT mobility will be allowed and what type of trunks can be used Core Software and Regions Each Region setting requires a specific core software to perform correctly Table 35 shows the core software available Table 35 Core software defined by region and carrier profile Core Software Carrier s w ID T1 CT2 Plus T1 Etiquette E1 Euro E1 Global E1 CALA Region Caribbean Caribbean Denmark Australia Australia Hong Kong Hong Kong Europe CALA CALA North American North American France Global Global Taiwan Taiwan Germany PRC PRC Holland Italy Norway Spain Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom South American and Central American countries are assigned to regions in the following way e Caribbean includes Antigua Bahamas Barbados Bermuda Cayman Islands Dominican Republic Grenada Jamaica USVI Puerto Rico and Trinidad CALA refers to all other Caribbea
362. station is 75 ohms You need one or two power pairs between the RPI and the base station The number of power pairs depends on the wire size of the power pair and the distance between the base station and the RPI Caution Do not run unprotected power cables outdoors The maximum cable distances allowed between the RPI and the base station depend on the size of wire you use Refer to Table 27 Table 27 Cable distances 0 6 mm 22 AWG 800 m 2 500 ft 1200 m 4 000 ft 0 5 mm 24 AWG 500 m 1 500 ft 1000 m 3 000 ft Caution When you use two power pairs connect both pairs with the same polarity Connect the RPI Connect the power pairs to the correct connectors Figure 165 shows the location of the input and output connectors on the RPI connector printed circuit board Figure 165 RPI connector printed circuit board 0B1X1 0B1X2 0B1X3 0B1X4 i E m J MJ 0B1X5 0B1X6 OB1X7 OB1X8 OB1X9 0B1X13 0B1X14 0B1X15 Ea e e Installation and Maintenance Guide 256 Chapter 12 Install Companion or DECT Systems RPI output connections Feed the output pairs in through the bottom of the RPI and route the pairs to the output connectors Figure 166 shows how to route the output pairs If you use one
363. stem using The task in this section is to specify IP and subnet addresses for the computer Note Your interface can differ depending on what version of system software you are Click Start Settings Control Panel Double click the Network icon Select your TCP IP adapter and then click the Properties button Click the IP Address tab Click the Specify an IP address option In the IP Address field enter 10 10 10 2 In the Subnet Mask field enter 255 255 255 0 Click OK Click OK 0 Click Yes to restart the PC Connect the Ethernet crossover cable After you configure the computer connect the computer to the Business Communications Manager base function tray in the following manner 1 2 Shut down the computer Attach one end of the Ethernet crossover cable to the LAN card on the Business Communications Manager Connect the other end of the cable to the network interface card on your computer Start the computer Log on to the Unified Manager using the default IP address Installation and Maintenance Guide 142 Chapter 5 Business Communications Manager System Startup 6 Use the Quick Start Wizard to create the system configuration Refer to the Business Communications Manager 3 0 Programming Operations Guide for details about using the wizard The Programming Operations Guide provides a detailed record about the information that you require to configure basic system programming Warning
364. stralia only same features Note There is no Business Series Terminal equivalent to this telephone Business Series Terminal T7208 one line display eight memory buttons with indicators 12004 IP telephone connects through an internet link to the Business Communications Manager Multi line display six memory keys with indicators It can be used to call through VoIP or PBX lines Not shown 12002 IP telephone and 12050 Software Phone interface Central answering position CAP North American systems only connects to an M7324 telephone and provides 48 additional memory buttons You need one Station Auxiliary Power Supply SAPS for every M7324 telephone that has CAP modules Central answering position CAPN UK and Australia only same features connects to M7324N telephones Installation and Maintenance Guide 86 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware one line display one memory button without indicator Norstar M7100N UK and Australia only same features Norstar M7310 two line display with three display buttons 10 memory buttons with indicators 12 dual memory buttons without indicators Norstar M7310N UK Australia only same features Mobility options Companion region specific provides twinning capability between a stationary set and a wireless mobile set These handsets communi
365. sure the base stations are correctly installed and connected to the appropriate modules on the Business Communications Manager In the case of the NetVision wireless system ensure that the access point is correctly set up to connect to the Business Communications Manager LAN or WAN Installation and Maintenance Guide 124 Chapter 4 Install remove or replace the Media Bay Modules e Configure and register the handsets according to the instructions provided for each type of system Companion Programming Operations Guide DECT DECT Installation and Maintenance Guide T7406 T7406 Cordless Handset Installation Guide NetVision and NetVision data IP Telephony Configuration Guide 5 This procedure is complete FEM Wiring A Fiber Expansion module FEM allows you to upgrade from a Norstar system to a Business Communications Manager system by reusing the Norstar expansion modules The expansion modules connect to the FEM module using the same fiber cable that connected them to the Norstar fiber expansion card i Warning Handling optical fiber cables If the cable is too long ensure that it is coiled correctly using the fiber spool Coil excess fiber cable carefully around the spool provided Do not bend the cable around any tight corners Bends in the fiber cable must not be less than 100 mm in diameter Place the fiber cable spool into a slot at the back of the cable trough in the Norstar module Note
366. system are small lightweight units with complete digital performance to provide clear voice quality Companion portable telephones feature a three line 16 character alphanumeric display Administration and Maintenance Tools Programming of the Companion system is easily and quickly done through the Business Communications Manager Unified Manager You can assign portable telephones to the system check base station parameters and enable and disable registration through programming Companion Diagnostics Software allows you to run diagnostics on the wireless system You run the diagnostics using a personal computer located at the customer site or in a remote location For more information about programming Companion and running diagnostics see the Business Communications Manager 3 0 Programming Operations Guide P0993133 03 Chapter 12 Install Companion or DECT Systems 251 Companion Hardware Installation The Companion hardware must be in place and configured before you can use the handsets to connect to the Business Communications Manager This section describes how to install the Companion hardware components The base station has the option of using internal or external antennas For most installations the internal antenna will be used If you need to install external antennas refer to Install an external antenna and lightning surge protection on page 265 Install the base station remote power interconnect RPI un
367. t mounting screws 9 Remove the screws that secure the I O card to the platform base chassis see Figure 119 Place the screws in a safe location 10 Remove the I O card from the platform base chassis Place the I O card in a safe clean and static free location Note Power supply and hard disk cables run underneath the I O card Remember the location and position of the power supply and hard disk cables You will need to route the cables in the same manner when you re install the power supply Installation and Maintenance Guide 194 Chapter 9 Replace or Upgrade a Power Supply Figure 119 Remove the I O card from the BCM200 platform base chassis 11 Remove the four power supply chassis screws from the back of the platform base chassis see Figure 120 Place the screws in a safe location Figure 120 Remove the BCM200 power supply chassis screws 12 Separate the power supply cable from the hard disk cable Cut the tie wrap that secures the power supply cable to the hard disk cable see Figure 122 13 Remove the power supply from the interior of the platform base chassis Note Remove the power supply carefully Ensure the power supply cables are not entangled or connected to any internal components 14 This procedure is complete P0993133 03 Chapter 9 Replace or Upgrade a Power Supply 195 Install a BCM200 standard power supply Use this procedure to install a functiona
368. t Transfer Protocol HTTP The set of rules used for exchanging text graphic images sound video and other multimedia files on the world wide web Hz hertz A unit of measure for indicating frequency in cycles per second Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN A digital telephone service that allows for a combination voice and data transfer over a single high speed connection over the same copper twisted pair telephone line as analog telephone service intercom button A button that provides access to internal lines used for calls within a Business Communications Manager system These buttons also provide access to external lines through a line pool or external code Assign intercom buttons under Line access in System DNs programming internal line A line on your telephone dedicated to making calls to destinations inside your system An internal line can connect you with an external caller if you use it to access a line pool Also you can answer an external caller using the call handling features such as Call Park or Call Pickup Directed Installation and Maintenance Guide 366 Glossary Internet Protocol IP The protocol that supports data being sent from one computer to another through an interconnection internet of networks IP is a connectionless protocol which means that there is no established connection between the end points that are communicating IP address The internally assigned address that
369. t and away from the connector Place the jumper in a safe location 7 Connect the PA cable to the PSU status connector see Figure 31 P0993133 03 Chapter 9 Replace or Upgrade a Power Supply 205 Figure 132 Remove the PSU status connector jumper PSU Status connector IL Jumper O Card 8 This procedure is complete Install a redundant power supply cage This procedure describes how to install a redundant power supply cage in the BCM400 platform base chassis After you install the redundant power supply cage in the platform base chassis install the two power supply modules see Install a power supply module on page 212 Use this procedure only with the BCM400 platform base chassis Note When you upgrade to a redundant power supply you should also install a redundant fan Refer to Install a BCM400 cooling fan on page 182 Note When you install a redundant power supply you must also remove the jumper installed in the PSU Status connector RPS output signaling connector on the I O card See Remove the PSU status connector jumper on page 204 Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge N Always wear a ground wrist strap before you handle co
370. t bezel clips irs 4 Position bezel into base function v 7 between latches and tray chassis move upward 9 If required install the base function tray in the platform base chassis Refer to Install the base function tray on page 151 Continue to the next step of this procedure when complete 10 This procedure is complete Installation and Maintenance Guide 156 Chapter 6 Prepare Hardware for Maintenance or Upgrades Advanced Function Tray Maintenance Procedures This procedure applies only to the BCM400 platform This procedure describes how to remove and install the advanced function tray in the platform base chassis Use this procedure for maintenance purposes The advanced function tray AFT houses the hard disk or RAID components for the BCM400 platform see Figure 84 For further information see also BCM400 advanced function tray AFT on page 50 Figure 84 Advanced function tray Advanced function tray latch Advanced function tray chassis Status LEDs e RAID only Reset button Bezel screw Reserved bay For information on how to replace the hard disk refer to Remove a hard disk cage from a BCM400 platform base chassis on page 168 Danger Electrical shock warning Disconnect the power cord telephone cables and network cables before opening the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis Read and follow installation instructions c
371. tem and the outside world Trunk media bay module Physical units installed in a Business Communications Manager that connect the system to the outside world User Speed Dial Two digit codes 71 94 programmed to dial external telephone numbers These numbers are available only at the telephone on which they are programmed V 90 A data transmission standard used by the modem installed in the Business Communications Manager This standard allows data to be transmitted to the modem at 56 kbit s and transmitted from the modem at 33 kbit s P0993133 03 Glossary 373 Voice Message Cenier If you have subscribed to Call Display services you can receive visual Voice Message Waiting Indication on a display telephone If you have Voice Message Waiting Indication you can program the telephone numbers required to access a maximum of five external voice message centers You can program which of the five centers is to be accessed by each specific line Voice over IP VoIP The capability to deliver voice using the Internet Protocol In general this means sending voice information in digital form in discrete packets rather than in the traditional circuit committed protocols of the public switched telephone network PSTN Weighted Fair Queuing WFQ WFQ is a queuing method that allows low volume traffic such as Telnet to be given priority Interactive traffic receives higher priority than batch transfers Wide Area Network WA
372. th America version has a T1 and v 35 interface The international version has a x 21 and v 35 interface Countries outside of North America must order separately a power cord that conforms to their specific requirements or standards All North American base and expansion systems are equipped with a North American power cord Installation and Maintenance Guide 98 Chapter 2 Auxilliary Requirements and Installation Process Overview Companion equipment If you are installing a Companion system check that you have the following hardware C3050 CT2 Plus Canada C3050 Etiquette USA e base station kit base station kit e handsets C3050 e handsets C3050 e battery packs NiCad 600 e battery packs NiCad 600 mAh mAh high capacity battery charger e high capacity battery charger e UTAM software keycode for base station activation Optional Companion equipment e clip holster e leather glove rugged protector e headset earbud battery not included e headset over the head battery not included Other cordless systems The DECT cordless system T7406 cordless handset and Symbol NetVision wireless IP handsets all have installation documentation specific to the installation of base stations and registration of the handsets to the Business Communications Manager DECT Equipment If you are installing a DECT system check that you have the following hardware e DECT module e base station kit handsets and r
373. the Page output on the MSC Refer to Figure 185 Figure 185 Audio input jack Audio input jack MSC Faceplate Ring Page output Tip Lloooo Sleeve Tip Page signal Ring Page signal Sleeve Ground 2 Connect the paging system relay to the Page relay output on the MSC Refer to Figure 186 P0993133 03 Chapter 14 Install Optional Telephony Equipment 289 Figure 186 Page relay jack Page relay jack MSC Faceplate Ring Page relay Tip Lloooo Sleeve Tip Page relay output Ring Page relay output Sleeve Ground i Warning The paging connections must not be connected to exposed plant Tip Paging tips Business Communications Manager external paging does not support talk back paging equipment unless you use an external line port The Business Communications Manager system provides paging over the telephone speakers when there is no external paging equipment 3 This procedure is complete Connect an external music source Use this procedure to connect the external music source to the Business Communications Manager jack You can use any customer supplied approved low power device as a music source A music source includes equipment such as a radio with a high impedance earphone jack as a music source Music on hold specifications Ensure that the music source follows these guidelines e Nominal input impedance is 3 3 kilohms e Nominal sensitivity of
374. the System after Maintenance on page 147 13 This procedure is complete Initialize a new WAN card Use this procedure to configure the Business Communications Manager to recognize a new WAN card installation Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static discharge Always wear a ground wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container 1 When the Business Communications Manager system is operational display the configuration main menu through a telnet session See Display the configuration menus on page 139 Refer to Figure 148 Figure 148 Configuration main menu display E Telnet 10 10 10 1 _ ri x Connect Edit Terminal Help MSS SSS SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS SS SSS SS SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSesessessssssseeeeeeeeseae Nortel Networks Business Communications Manager 3 6 Main Henu dGemmmmmmmmmumiiIImnininincinccmcum cmm 1 Platform Initialization Menu 2 System Configuration 3 Configuration Wizard Hedia Services Card System ID 5 Diagnostics 6 System Status Honitor 7 Command line 8 Restart the system x Exit R Product Version BCM466 Release 3 8 Version RC 2 8 Issue 1 Initialization C
375. the base function tray face 12 Restore the Business Communications Manager system to operation See Restart the System after Maintenance on page 147 13 Observe the system status monitor LEDs to ensure the base function tray initializes correctly 14 This procedure is complete P0993133 03 Chapter 6 Prepare Hardware for Maintenance or Upgrades 153 Remove the base function tray bezel Use this procedure to remove the base function tray bezel Remove the base function tray bezel to remove or install the PCI cover plate during processor card removal or installation i Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static discharge Always wear a ground wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container i Warning Use care when removing or inserting the Base function tray Do not forcefully remove or insert the base function tray You could damage or stretch the cables i Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static discharge Always wear a ground wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container If you still have access to the Unified Manager shut down the system using the Shutdown command For details refer to Shut down the system software on page 145 Otherwise skip to step 2 Set up the server for maintenance as described in Shut down the system hardwa
376. the base function tray from the platform base chassis Do not exert force on the DS30 cables or connectors 10 Disconnect DS30 cable connectors from the media services card If necessary remove the WAN card to access the DS30 cables see Remove the WAN card on page 219 P0993133 03 Chapter 6 Prepare Hardware for Maintenance or Upgrades 151 Figure 80 Remove the base function tray Unfasten base function tray latch screws 4 Disconnect DS30 X cables from the MSC SS V Move base function tray latches to l the unlocked position A T iss 14 r J Slide base function tray partially away from the platform base chassis 11 Remove the base function tray completely from the platform base chassis Remove the base function tray carefully to prevent damage to the cables and connectors 12 Place the base function tray on a flat clean and static free surface 13 This procedure is complete Install the base function tray Use this procedure to insert the base function tray in the platform base chassis Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static discharge Always wear a ground wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container or work area Warning Use care when removing or inserting the Base function tray Do not forcefully N remove or insert the base function tray You could damage
377. the components in static free container Note If you purchased optional Business Communications Manager applications that gt require keycode activation regenerate the keycodes after you re install the replacement MSC For further information see Regenerating keycodes after system replacement on page 142 and Install the media services card MSC on page 226 10 11 12 Ensure you have a current data backup of your system If you still have access to the Unified Manager shut down the system using the Shutdown command For details refer to Shut down the system software on page 145 Otherwise skip to step 2 Set up the server for maintenance as described in Shut down the system hardware on page 146 Disconnect the Business Communications Manager from the AC power outlet Disconnect any cables from the front of the base function tray Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface Partially remove the base function tray from the platform base chassis See Remove the base function tray on page 150 Do not exert force on the DS30 cables and connectors Disconnect the DS30 cables Remove the base function tray completely from the platform base chassis Ensure you do not pinch or damage any cables see Remove the base function tray on page 150 Place the base function tray on a flat clean and static free surface Continue to the n
378. the installation and use of the Product Read carefully and retain for future reference Installation Warning To avoid electrical shock hazard to personnel or equipment damage observe the following precautions when installing telephone equipment 1 Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm 2 Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations 3 Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface 4 Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the product Installation and Maintenance Guide This symbol on the product is used to identify the following important information Use only with a CSA or UL certified CLASS 2 level C power supply as specified in the user guide Use When using your telephone equipment basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons including the following 1 11 12 13 14 15 Read and understand all instructions Follow the instructions marked on the product Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners Use a d
379. tic free container 1 Disconnect the Business Communications Manager from the AC power source 2 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 3 Install the hard disk in the hard disk cage see Install a hard disk into a hard disk cage on page 171 4 Position the hard disk cage in front of the cage chassis mounting points in the advanced function tray The hard disk cage lift tab is at the rear of the hard disk cage 5 Slide the hard disk cage in the direction shown in Figure 101 until the unit engages with the chassis mounting points in the advanced function tray Figure 101 Insert the hard disk cage to the BCM400 advanced function tray chassis Lift and slide the hard disk cage P d Insert hard disk cage 6 Partially insert the advanced function tray into the BCM400 platform base chassis Ensure you do not pinch any cables against the chassis or internal components 7 Connect the hard disk to the system a Connect the hard disk to the IDE interface ribbon cable b Connect the power supply to the hard disk Note AII connectors have a notch that allows you to align the connectors correctly If you cannot push a connector in easily do not force it Installation and Maintenance Guide 176 Chapter 7 Hard Disk Replacement Procedures 10 11 Slide the advanced function tray completely into the BCM400 platform base chassis see Install the advan
380. tion Configure the module Refer to the Business Communications Manager Programming Operations Guide for details 6 This procedure is complete Remove a media bay module Use the procedures is this section to remove one or more media bay modules from a Business Communications Manager platform base chassis or expansion unit Figure 62 provides an overview of the process for removing media bay modules P0993133 03 Chapter 4 Install remove or replace the Media Bay Modules 113 Figure 62 Overview of removing a media bay module Shutdown BCM amp expansion unit Remove module cables Disconnect power from both units Remove module Remove a media bay module from the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis Use this procedure to remove a media bay module from the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis Remove the media bay modules after the system is powered down 1 Power down the Business Communications Manager system see Shut down the system on page 110 Remove any cabling from the media bay module faceplate Grasp the right edge of the MBM ejector lever with your thumb index and middle fingers Pull outward to partially eject the media bay module bay Pull further on the lever to eject the media bay module from the bay Refer to Figure 63 or Figure 64 4 Grasp the top and bottom edges of the media bay module Remove the media bay module from
381. tion device 7 Central Office Business Communications Manager ATA 2 Line loop resistance Terminal loop resistance 135 ohms maximum 200 ohms maximum 1 Connect a single line telephone to the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 2 Check that the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 is in the Tones OFF mode lift the handset and press 9 9 Note appears as on some telephones If you are using a telephone without a or button refer to the ATA 2 User Guide for details 3 Make sure the terminal loop resistance is less than or equal to 200 ohms Note If necessary install the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 near to the data communication device to maintain a maximum loop resistance of less than 200 ohms When using 0 4 mm wire 26 AWG the ATA 2 must be within 800 m 2 600 ft of the Business Communications Manager system 4 Disconnect the single line telephone from the ATA 2 5 Plug the data communication device into ATA 2 6 This procedure is complete Installation and Maintenance Guide 286 Chapter 13 Install Analog Terminal Adapters P0993133 03 287 Chapter 14 Install Optional Telephony Equipment Use the procedures described in this chapter to connect the optional ringer page and music telephony equipment to the
382. tions 2 000 cece eens 73 Media bay module DIP switches lille 74 Trunk Media Bay Modules o ers rieron r CETER EE enl 74 Digital trunk media bay module 0 cee ee 75 Caller ID trunk media bay module 000000 else eee ee 76 Basic rate interface media bay module cee eee eee 77 Station Media Bay Modules 0 00 ccc cece ene eee 78 Digital station media bay module DSM 0 00 0c eee eee 78 4X16 Media Bay Module 0 cee ae 79 Analog station media bay module 0 000 e eee eee 80 Specialized Media Bay Modules 0 000 cece eee eee tees 81 Digital enhanced cordless telecommunications DECT media bay module 0 cece eae 81 Fiber expansion media bay module FEM 00 e eee eae 82 Digital Drop amp Insert MUX DDIM 0 0c ee 83 P0993133 03 Contents 17 Telephones and adapters osca irra enaren E E E tees 85 Portable systems dunt r T ped a r NA a Ra b 87 Companion System Components s sasaaa eee 87 DECT System Components naana anaana 88 T7406 system components 00 000 cece eee 88 NetVision system components 20000 cece eee eee eee 88 Business Communications Manager Expansion Unit 0 00000 90 Chapter 2 Auxilliary Requirements and Installation Process Overview 91 Computer Specifications 0000s 91 Brow
383. tions 0 0000 e eee eee eee 262 Table 33 UTAM messages 0 c eee ett 264 Table 34 LED Display screen settings 00 200 eee eeeee 294 Table 35 Core software defined by region and carrier profile 299 Table36 Languages ueeeseeeeeleeeelee ln 300 Table 37 South Central America language breakout 0 300 Table 38 Compandinglaw sessssseee eh 301 Table 39 ISDN line services slsslssse IR 301 Table 40 ISDN services by Protocol 000 e eee eee ee 302 Installation and Maintenance Guide 32 Tables Table 41 Table 42 Table 43 Table 44 Table 45 Table 46 Table 47 Table 48 Table 49 Table 50 Table 52 Table 53 Table 54 Table 55 Table 56 Table 57 Table 58 Table 59 Table 60 Table 61 Table 62 Table 63 Table 64 Table 65 Table 66 Table 67 Table 68 Table 69 Table 70 Table 71 Table 72 Table 73 Mobility services by region 0 0 eee ae 303 Module availability by profile resnie Taata aeia aa e eee 303 Trunk availability by region 2 eE KET eee 304 PRI line protocol supported by region 0 0 e eee eee 305 BRI and PRI line types DTM and BRI modules 306 Time date formats based on language lisse 308 Region defaults 325 kid euer te ele wh PL rb rbi bah a QE 309 Determining trunk module requirements 0 000 eee eee 314 Station me
384. to monitor on line the status of Business Communications Manager system components T1 Digital carrier system or line that carries data at 1 544 Mb s Installation and Maintenance Guide 372 Glossary Target lines Lines used only to answer incoming calls A target line routes a call according to digits it receives from an incoming trunk You refer to target lines in the same way as physical lines Telephony Application Program Interface TAPI A standard program interface that allows communication over telephones or video phones to people or phone connected resources elsewhere in the world Transfer A feature that allows you to redirect a call to another telephone in your Business Communications Manager system over a network or outside your system Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP A language controlling communication between computers on the Internet TCP e checks packets of information for errors e sends requests for re transmission in the event of errors returns multiple packets of a message into the original sequence when the message reaches its destination IP controls how packets are sent out over networks e has a packet addressing method that allows any computer on the Internet forward a packet to another computer that is a step or more nearer to the recipient Trunk The public telephone system or private network connection between the Business Communications Manager sys
385. to the BCM200 chassis 100 Attach the rack mount bracket to the BCM400 chassis 100 Fasten the BCM200 platform base chassis to an equipment rack 101 Fasten the BCM400 platform base chassis to an equipment rack 101 Attach the wall mount brackets to the BCM200 platform base chassis 103 Attach the wall mount brackets to the BCM400 platform base chassis 103 Attach the rack mounting bracket to the expansion unit 105 Fasten the expansion unit to the equipment rack 106 DS256 connector on the expansion unit 0 000 eee 107 Business Communications Manager platform base chassis DS258 CONNECION une v e PE appe ERE DR bende ea HE 107 Overview of installing a media bay module 109 Overview of removing a media bay module 113 Remove a BCM200 media bay module 0 00005 114 Remove a BCM400 media bay module seules 114 Remove the expansion unit front bezel 00 00a 115 Overview of module replacement process n ununun annann 116 Trunk and station wiring overview llle 118 DTM RJ48C wiring array wrae sata aa e a m 119 CTM RJ11 wiring array 1 eh 119 BRIM S T RJ45 wiring array liliis 120 Wiring for DSM 16 4X16 and DSM 32 0 0 2c eee eee 122 Wiring for ary ASM 845 er eee RRCEUENEG ROME dUPRE vce 123 Module power and status LEDs 0 0 0 0 cee eee
386. to the MSC Install the base function tray completely into the chassis Be careful not to crimp the DS30 cables See Install the base function tray on page 151 Continue to the next step in this procedure when complete Insert all connectors in the correct locations on the base function tray face Restore the Business Communications Manager to operation For details refer to Restart the System after Maintenance on page 147 Continue to the next step in this procedure when complete Restore your Business Communication Manager application keycodes if applicable The step applies only if you installed a new MSC See Regenerating keycodes after system replacement on page 142 This procedure is complete Remove the modem card Use this procedure to remove the modem card from the main card in the base function tray Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static discharge Always wear a ground wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container If you still have access to the Unified Manager shut down the system using the Shutdown command For details refer to Shut down the system software on page 145 Otherwise skip to step 2 Set up the Business Communications Manager for maintenance as described in Shut down the system hardware on page 146 Disconnect the Business Communications Manager from the AC power outlet Attach on
387. to the rear exterior of the platform base chassis Remove the four power supply chassis screws from the rear of the platform base chassis see Figure 139 Place the screws in a safe location P0993133 03 Chapter 9 Replace or Upgrade a Power Supply 211 Figure 139 Remove the BCM400 redundant power supply chassis screws chassis mounting screws 10 Unfasten the exterior and interior power supply support bracket mounting screws see Figure 127 Place the screws in a safe location 11 Remove the redundant power supply cage and support bracket out and away from the BCM400 platform base chassis see Figure 140 Place the power supply in a safe clean and static free location Note Remove the power supply carefully Ensure the power supply cables are not entangled or connected to any internal components 12 Cut the cable ties that hold the power cables to the power supply support bracket Be careful not to cut or damage the cable insulation Installation and Maintenance Guide 212 Chapter 9 Replace or Upgrade a Power Supply Figure 140 Remove the redundant power supply cage and support bracket 9 Remove the power SA supply amp support _ bracket from platform base chassis _ Cut the cable tie wrap away from the power gt Supply support bracket Remove m Unfasten the power 1 supply support bracket power supply not shown 13 This proc
388. top of the platform base chassis cover This procedure assumes that maintenance or installation activities are complete and that you are ready to start the Business Communications Manager Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static discharge Always wear a ground wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container or work area Disconnect the Business Communications Manager from the AC power outlet 2 If required remove the platform base chassis from the server rack 3 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 4 Set the top cover on the platform base chassis 5 Slide the top cover forward until the cover engages with the platform base chassis 6 Press the top cover down until it rests on the chassis Refer to Figure 90 or Figure 91 7 Install the two top cover screws at the rear of the platform base chassis Figure 90 Install the BCM200 top cover E Press cover lt gt Slide cover into chassis lnstallthe top cover screws Installation and Maintenance Guide 164 Chapter 6 Prepare Hardware for Maintenance or Upgrades Figure 91 Install the BCM400 top cover Bu Press cover gt id Slide cover V 4 into chassis ms SES BB Install the top o V cover screws ie 8 This procedure is complete
389. torm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak Caution To eliminate the possibility of accidental damage to cords plugs jacks and the telephone do not use sharp instruments during the assembly procedures Warning Do not insert the plug at the free end of the handset cord directly into a wall or baseboard jack Such misuse can result in unsafe sound levels or possible damage to the handset P0993133 03 11 16 Save these instructions International Regulatory Information The CE Marking on this equipment indicates compliance with the following This device conforms to Directive 1999 5 EC on Radio V Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment as adopted by the European Parliament And Of The Council This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Hereby Nortel Networks declares that Enterprise Edge Business Communications Manager Model No NT7B10xxxx is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Information is subject to change without notice Nortel Networks reserves the right to make changes in design or components as progress in engineering and manufacturing may warrant This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
390. ts against damage from electro static discharge Always wear a ground wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container or work area Warning Use care when removing or inserting the Base function tray Do not forcefully N remove or insert the base function tray You could damage or stretch the cables 1 Disconnect the Business Communications Manager from the AC power outlet 2 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface Remove the base function tray latch screws if applicable Place the screws in a safe location Move the base function tray latches to the unlocked position Position the bezel below and between the base function tray latches Lift the bezel until the bezel clips line up with the corresponding base function tray bezel holes 6 Tilt the bezel forward then push the bottom of the bezel into the base function tray chassis to engage the bezel clips P0993133 03 Chapter 6 Prepare Hardware for Maintenance or Upgrades 155 7 Push on the face of the bezel so that it rests flush with the face of the base function tray chassis 8 Install the base function tray bezel screws See Figure 83 Figure 83 Install the base function tray bezel o N Push bezel against E A 2 Abase function tray ye a P Pe 3 p XI p d o J I Install Bezel a V Screws SU E Inser
391. ty DSMs plus a single density DSM for Companion 348 Three BRI modules two DSM 32s and 1 DECT module 349 Cross referencing ports and DNS 00 0c eee eee 351 P0993133 03 33 Preface This guide describes how to install initialize and maintain the hardware for the Business Communications Manager BCM200 and BCM400 systems Information in these chapters explains e how to set up the system hardware how to start and initialize the system hardware e how to troubleshoot and maintain the hardware To use this guide you must e bea Nortel Networks installer with Business Communications Manager certification e know basic Nortel Networks terminology Display Tips You can read this publication from your computer monitor or printed hard copy For best on screen display results use Adobe Acrobat Reader TM version 4 0 or 5 0 If you use Adobe Acrobat Reader version 4 0 perform the following to optimize the illustrations Increase display magnification e Print the document For Adobe Acrobat Reader version 5 0 perform the following steps to optimize the graphical display 1 Start the Adobe Acrobat Reader version 5 0 application 2 From the top line menu select Edit gt Preferences gt General 3 Select Display from the preferences menu at the left side of the setup screen 4 Select the following smoothing options from the Display setup screen Smooth Text Smooth Line Art
392. u must supply your own screws to attach the expansion unit to the rack gt 1 Determine the location in the rack you want to install the Business Communications Manager expansion unit Position the expansion unit in the rack Refer to Figure 58 Align the holes in the rack mounting bracket with the holes in the rails Fasten the rack mounting brackets to the equipment rack using four screws Business Communication Manager 3 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 106 Chapter 3 Install the Business Communications Manager amp Expansion Unit Platform Base Chassis Figure 58 Fasten the expansion unit to the equipment rack 2 222 2 2 Ooooooooooo B D Q Qj 39 d 2 O c cO oO oc oOo ocooooo o c Ppoooooocodcoc Install the Expansion Unit on a Flat Surface You can install the Business Communications Manager expansion unit on any flat surface that can support the weight of the unit and which is within 5 m 16 ft of the Business Communications Manager platform base chassis Note Do not place anything on top of the expansion unit chassis gt 1 Attach the supplied rubber feet to the corners of the bottom of the expansion unit Position the expansion unit on the table or shelf Ensure that you leave enough space around the unit for ventilation and access to the cables and media bay modules Connect th
393. ua St MES Mexico Barbados Ca PERETE Nicaragua Dominica ERE Grenada P0993133 03 System Region Attributes 301 Caller ID Displays The North American region supports the following format 5554775 613 All other regions display the numbers in a continuous string of a maximum of 14 characters 6135554775 Companding Law by Region Table 38 shows the companding law used for each region Table 38 Companding law Companding Law p law A law Caribbean Australia Hong Kong CALA North American Denmark Taiwan France Germany Global Holland Italy Norway PRC Spain Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom ISDN Line Services Table 39 shows the ISDN private network services that are supported by the Business Communications Manager Table 40 shows the network based ISDN supplementary services and the features available for each Table 39 SDN line services MCDN over PRI SL 1 DPNSS DASS2 ETSI QSIG Basic Call Basic Call Basic Call Basic Call DDI DDI DDI DDI Name display Diversion Originating line identity OLI Name display Number display Redirection Terminating Line Identity TLI Number display Centralized voice mail Centralized voice mail Call Charge Indication CCl Installation and Maintenance Guide 302 System Region Attributes Table 39 ISDN line services Continued MCDN over PRI SL 1 DPNSS DASS2 ETSI QSIG Camp on Call Offer Cal
394. ules Station modules require 25 pair wired cables to connect the modules to the equipment in the telephone room where your telco demarcation point is located Use a qualified technical professional to ensure the cable wiring and your interior telephone wiring are correct Trunk modules and DECT base stations are connected using RJ type jacks These cables can be supplied by qualified technical personnel to ensure the correct pin out A Warning Use only qualified persons to service the system The installation and service of this unit must be performed by service personnel with the appropriate training and experience Service personnel must be aware of the hazards of working with telephony equipment and wiring They must have experience in techniques that minimize any danger of shock or equipment damage Warning Leakage currents Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of high leakage currents becoming available on metal system surfaces during power line fault events on network lines These leakage currents normally safely flow to Protective Earth ground via the power cord However if the ac power is unplugged prior to disconnecting the cables from the front of the base function tray this hazard can occur System shutdown You must disconnect the media bay module cables from the system before disconnecting the power cord from a grounded outlet System startup You must reconnect the power cords to an grounded outlet befor
395. ules starting from the top DS30 3 Install the modules into the Business Communications Manager or expansion unit Refer to Chapter 4 Install remove or replace the Media Bay Modules on page 109 4 This procedure is complete Installation and Maintenance Guide 322 Telephony Hardware Selection and Settings Set Media Bay Module Dip Switches Before you install a media bay module assign switch settings for the media bay module These settings determine which line numbers trunks or DNs extensions the equipment connected to the module will have access to The DIP switches are located on the back or underside of the media bay module Note Fiber Expansion Module FEM switches gt The switches on the fiber expansion module FEM do not work in the same way as those on the other media bay modules On the FEM the switches turn the fiber ports on and off For information about setting the switches on an FEM refer to FEM switch settings on page 344 Start from the list of modules you chose in Chapter 4 Install remove or replace the Media Bay Modules on page 109 After you determine which DS30 buses you want to use and how much DS30 capacity each module requires determine the location of the modules on the DS30 array From that information you choose switch settings for each module These settings are then set on the module DIP switches This chapter describes the latter process of positioning your
396. unction tray loosen and remove the PCI cover plate screw use a 2 Phillips screwdriver Figure 146 shows an interior view of the base function tray Place the screw in a safe location Remove the PCI cover plate from the BFT chassis Place the PCI cover plate in a safe location Use both hands to carefully hold the WAN card along the side edges Push the WAN card away from the PCI riser card connector Figure 146 Remove the WAN card and PCI cover plate 1 Remove the PCI PCI lat cover plate screw SUE RS Sa os j 4 J d 2 Remove the WAN a X I card WAN card UU 12 Remove the WAN card from the base function tray Place the card in a safe static free and clean location or container 13 This procedure is complete P0993133 03 Chapter 10 Replace Data Cards and Processing Hardware 221 Install the WAN card Use this procedure to install a replacement WAN card If you are installing a new WAN card for the first time refer to Initialize a new WAN card on page 222 Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro static discharge Always wear a ground wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container 1 Disconnect the Business Communications Manager from the AC power outlet 2 Partially remove the base function tray from the platform base chassis If required remove the base function tray co
397. undant SSD iH Exec saa connector em C Connect to I O Card single fan Modem card ej o l D oo Modem card an Main Card Connect to connector _ Power supply a 20 pin Lower PCI riser Upper PCI riser Main card Connect to connection to connection to and I O card Power supply MSC WAN card connector PSU AUX PCI riser card The PCI riser card extends upward and at a right angle from the main card The PCI riser card provides a peripheral component interface PCI for the MSC and field installed WAN cards Figure 22 shows the PCI riser card installed in the Base function tray Figure 23 shows the PCI connectors without the MSC or WAN cards Two screws at the top of the PCI riser card attach the card to the side of the BFT chassis Installation and Maintenance Guide 62 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Communications Manager Platform Hardware Figure 22 PCI Riser card MSC WAN card field installable IS X i WAN PCI connector Salle M t e a MSC PCI connector e le Main card PCI riser card connector Main card Figure 23 PCI Riser card connectors PCI Riser card mounting screws es Base WAN PCI connector d function TTT TTT TTT MTCC tray mmnm ea chassis MSC PCI connector e front NANa NANNAN ANANN NANNAN NANANA NANNAN Annana IIT PCI riser card TTT
398. ure button 4 Type your user name in the Login box The default user name is supervisor 5 Type your password in the Password box The default password is visor 6 Choose System 7 Click the Logoff menu and then click Shutdown 8 Click the Yes button 9 Wait until the Status changes to Complete It is safe to turn off the system Installation and Maintenance Guide 146 Chapter 6 Prepare Hardware for Maintenance or Upgrades 10 Click the Done button 11 Quit the web browser 12 This procedure is complete Shut down the system hardware Perform the procedure Shut down the system software on page 145 before attempting this procedure Warning Remove all of the connections to the Business Communications Manager before you power the system down Failure to disconnect lines before power down can cause damage to the system Use this procedure to ensure a safe shutdown of the Business Communications Manager hardware system 1 Remove the DS256 cables from the front of the Business Communications Manager and expansion unit if there is one This includes the data connections on the MSC Mark the cables to ensure correct reconnection 2 Disconnect the Business Communications Manager and expansion unit power cords from the AC outlet Warning You must disconnect power from the base platform after you have performed a Unified Manager shutdown The platform base chassis cannot start operating again until after pow
399. us To perform this procedure the Business Communications Manager must be correctly powered up as described in Check system power and status on page 129 1 Attach the null modem cable to the serial port on the Business Communications Manager Note The location of the transmit TX and receive RX pins on your terminal can vary Refer to your terminal or computer documentation to confirm pin locations Attach the other end of the null modem cable to the serial port on the terminal or computer Ensure that the Business Communications Manager and your terminal or computer are turned on If you are using a computer start your VT100 terminal program Press ENTER When prompted for a User ID type ee admin ENTER When prompted for a Domain press ENTER When prompted for a Password type eedge ENTER The Main Menu screen appears Refer to Figure 76 Figure 76 Main Menu of Telnet 10 10 10 1 SBE Connect Edit Terminal Help 1 Platform Initialization Menu 2 System Configuration 3 Configuration Wizard 4 Media Services Card System ID 5 Diagnostics 6 System Status Monitor 7 Command line 8 Restart the system X Exit Product Version BCH400 Release 3 8 Version RC 2 8 Issue 1 R Initialization Complete Configuration Ualid
400. using the four plastic rivets a Align the fan chassis mounting holes with the holes in the fan access panel see Figure 108 P0993133 03 Chapter 8 Install or Replace a Cooling Fan 183 Figure 108 Fan chassis mounting holes e Chassis mounting holes I O card fan connector b Hold the fan in place against the fan access panel Push the rivet collar through the fan access panel and fan chassis mounting holes C Insert the rivet pin into the rivet collar Repeat this step for the second fan in the BCM400 RFO configuration see Figure 109 Figure 109 Insert the snap rivets into the BCM400 fan access panel 4 Insert the rivet collar into Fan exhaust the fan access panel hole fan access panel a A Insert the rivet pin into the rivet collar E Rivet collar Rivet pin 3 Connect the power supply cables for each fan to the I O card see Figure 110 a Connect Fan 1 fan farthest from the power supply to connector 1 on the I O card b Connect Fan 2 fan closest to the power supply to connector 2 on the I O card Installation and Maintenance Guide 184 Chapter 8 Install or Replace a Cooling Fan Figure 110 Connect the fan cable s to the I O card Connect to redundant I fan fan 2 z C Connect to
401. ws Installation and Maintenance Guide 254 Chapter 12 Install Companion or DECT Systems 4 Install the remaining two screws 5 Feed the power cord through the bottom of the RPI and route it through the clip and around the strain relief support Figure 164 shows how to route the power cord Figure 164 RPI components Jumper lead to PSU 2 The RPI 8 has grounding straps ol Grounding plates plates PSU 1 PSU 2 if equipped 741 aT and plates fitted to allow an upgrade to an RPI 16 Jpn strap CC CCCUI CC CCCUI Up to 16 outputs TCM power Power supply cabling Connection board p Ferrite rings Clip Strain relief support Power cord Route the power cord to the input power socket just to the left of PSU 1 Connect the plug to the socket Follow the appropriate wiring instructions in the wiring charts in section RPI wiring and connections Caution Do not apply power to the RPI until its installation and wiring are complete 9 After the cable is wired correctly connect the RPI power cord to the ac outlet 10 Label each RPI 11 This procedure is complete P0993133 03 Chapter 12 Install Companion or DECT Systems 255 RPI wiring and connections The maximum two way DC loop resistance for power pairs including interconnections for each base
402. y central office since the PBX is owned and operated by the enterprise rather than the telephone company protocol A set of rules and procedures for exchanging data between computers or Business Communications Managers on a network or through the Internet Proxy A server that acts on behalf of another Installation and Maintenance Guide 370 Glossary pulse tone dialing Pulse is the traditional method of dialing used by rotary dial or push button single line telephones Tone dialing allows telephones to communicate with other devices such as answering machines You require tone dialing to access the features that PBX systems can provide or to use another system remotely Quality of Service QoS On the Internet and in other networks QoS refers to guaranteed throughput level QoS allows a server to measure improve and to some level guarantee the transmission rates error rates and other data transmission characteristics QoS is critical for the continuous and real time transmission of video and multimedia information Q reference point signalling QSIG QSIG is an ETSI standard signalling for multi vendor peer to peer communications between PBXs and or central offices This is an International standard and not available in North America Random Access Memory RAM Computer memory that stores data temporarily RAM stores the data used by the microprocessor because it executes instructions The contents of RAM are era
403. ystem DNs programming Call Forward Override An automatic system feature that allows the user to call another user and ask that user to stop forwarding calls to their set P0993133 03 Glossary 361 call log An incoming call log accessed through the set that displays the following information for every call sequence number within the Call Log e name and number of caller e long distance indication call answered indication e time and date of the call e number of repeated calls from the same source e name of the line that received the call Camp on A feature that allows the user to reroute a call to a telephone when all the lines on that telephone are busy To answer a camped call use Call Queuing or select a line if the camped call appears on the set Queued calls get priority over camped calls camp timeout The length of a delay before a camped call returns to the telephone that camped the call Set the length of delay under Feature settings in System programming central answering position CAP An M7324 telephone that provides backup answering and set monitoring Assign a CAP under CAP assignment in System programming channel service unit CSU A device on the Digital Trunk Interface that is the termination point of the T1 lines from the T1 service provider The CSU collects statistics on the quality of the T1 signal The CSU ensures network compliance with FCC rules and protects the network from harmfu
404. ystem features They also share some of the same programming as desk telephones Delayed Ring Transfer DRT to prime This feature allows the system to transfer unanswered calls on external line to the prime telephone related to the called set The number of rings can be adjusted Activate this feature under Feature settings in System programming dial up connection A dial up connection is a temporary connection between computers This connection is established over an analog or digital telephone line dialing restriction Restrictions are numbers you cannot dial when the dialing filter with those numbers is in effect Digital Private Network Signaling System DPNSS DPNSS is a networking protocol that provides operators with access to Enterprise Edge features over multiple combined networks Corporate offices separated geographically can be linked over DPNSS to other Enterprise Edge systems bypassing the restrictions of the PSTNs to which they may be connected This allows connected Enterprise Edge systems to function like a private network DPNSS is available for International systems only directory number DN A unique number that the Business Communications Manager system assigns to every telephone or data terminal P0993133 03 Glossary 363 disconnect supervision A feature that enables the system to detect if an external caller hangs up Enable Disconnect Supervision under Trunk Line data in Lines programming
405. ystem hang Note During system initialization the system performs diagnostics on the hardware configuration size and installation If the power fails system data remains in memory Table 16 describes the possible operating states of the LEDs on the front of the Business Communications Manager base function tray The Business Communications Manager expansion unit has both a power and a status LED which provide the same indicators as for the base function tray Table 16 Business Communications Manager LED states Indicates state of all OK N A voltage N A powered components irregularity or component failure Indicates access to indicates disk drive N A N A N A g the system disk drive activity Indicates condition of all monitored Failure in one or N A not all services are system status services are more telephony working functioning service 1 PCI Device Device is present driver is not running N A Device is not WAN Port 1 and the driver is present active 2 PCI Device Device is present driver is not running N A Device is not WAN Port 2 and the driver is present active Modem Device is present driver is not running N A Device is not LN and the driver is present active LAN 1 Device is present driver is not running N A Device is not SS and the driver is present i active LAN 2 Device is present driver is not running N A Device is not eu and the driver is present active

Avaya BCM200/400 Installation and Maintenance Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents